Home

User Manual - v8.8 C166/ST10 C Compiler

1. MISRA C A 1 DEBUG ENVIRONMENT B 1 1 CrossView Pro and Evaluation Boards B 3 2 Kontron Debugger 00 00 0c cee eee B 4 3 Hitex HiTOP Telemon 80C167 45 B 6 4 pls fast view66 0 cece B 7 CPU FUNCTIONAL PROBLEMS C 1 1 Introduction ig iie eh has hs ee a EE ees C 3 2 CPU Functional Problem Bypasses C 4 USER STACK MODEL D 1 1 Introduction csee oa a ea a a e D 3 2 Function Call and Return 0 0 0000 e eee D 4 2 1 Direct Intra segment Function Call and Return D 4 2 2 Indirect Intra segment Function Call and Return D 5 2 3 Indirect Inter segment Jumps Using the Extended Instruction Set cask fase vas RS ee ic nh D 6 2 4 Direct Inter segment Function Call and Return D 7 2 5 Indirect Inter segment Function Call and Return D 8 3 Mixing User Stack and non User Stack Functions D 9 INDEX CONTENTS Table of Contents Manual Purpose and Structure xI MANUAL PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE PURPOSE This manual is aimed at users of the TASKING C166 ST10 C Cross Compiler It assumes that you are familiar with the C language MANUAL STRUCTURE Related Publications Conventions Used In This Manual Chapters 1 Software Installation Describes the installation of the C Cross Compiler for the C166 ST10 2 Overview Provides an overview of the TASKING C166 ST10 toolchain and gives you some familiarity with the different parts
2. Table 2 1 File extensions 2 4 WORKING WITH PROJECTS IN EDE EDE is a complete project environment in which you can create and maintain project spaces and projects EDE gives you direct access to the tools and features you need to create an application from your project A project space holds a set of projects and must always contain at least one project Before you can create a project you have to setup a project space All information of a project space is saved in a project space file psp e a list of projects in the project space e history information Within a project space you can create projects Projects are bound to a target You can create add or edit files in the project which together form your application All information of a project is saved in a project file pjt e the target for which the project is created e alist of the source files in the project e the options for the compiler assembler linker and debugger e the default directories for the include files libraries and executables e the build options e history information When you build your project EDE handles file dependencies and the exact sequence of operations required to build your application When you push the Build button EDE generates a makefile including all dependencies and builds your application 2 14 Chapter 2 7 Overview of steps to create and build an application 1 Create a project space 2 Add one or more pr
3. Table 3 22 Register usage for C return types The compiler assumes no registers to be destroyed in any case except for the registers to pass the return value R4 R5 USRO may also be used as a scratch register You do not need to save restore these registers When an intrinsic function returns a double precision floating point value or a struct union the compiler assumes this value at the top stack entry on return Note that other stack space must be completely released The compiler will take care of copying this value to the stack location reserved for the return value and for releasing the top stack entry The stack space for the return value will also be reserved by the compiler before the intrinsic function is called A typical code example is 3 132 7 test c SUB SUB MOV MOV CALLS MOV CALLS ADD Chapter 3 30 r double func f RO 08h stackspace for return value RO 08h stackspace for parameter R12 R0 R4 _f SEG __load8n ___load8n R4 R12 SEG __store8n __store8n RO 08h Macro call parameter assignments i offset 0 double_func 0 MOV MOV ADD CALLS ADD MOV ADD ADD MOV MOV CALLS ADD R10 RO R4 RO0 R4 010h SEG _ store8n _store8n R0 08h R4 R0 R4 08h RO 08h R10 R4 R4 r SEG __store8n __store8n RO 08h r 7 load parameter on user stack store parameter release space allocated by __load8n intrinsic macro call load sou
4. Now compile this module using the correct memory model The compiler makes the correct frame and you can edit the generated assembly module to make the real assembly function inside this frame Run time Environment 7 13 Inline assembly A second method to create an interface to assembly is to use inline assembly in C Assembly lines in the C source must be introduced by a pragma asm the end is indicated by a pragma endasm For example int inline char c int i pragma asm NOP do something in assembly pragma endasm j 0 return j If the inserted assembly code does not change any registers like in the example above also pragma asm_noflush may be used instead of pragma asm The advantage of this pragma is that the peephole buffer is not flushed so the compiler will emit a JMPR instructions instead of a JMPA instruction for the condition above Note that the inserted assembly is NOT interpreted so code size reported is only the code generated for C statements The disadvantage of the pragma asm_noflush is that the distance checking for relative jumps becomes your responsibility Note that the compiler also does NOT recognize inline CALL instructions If a function does not call any other function from C it is treated like a leaf function so parameter registers of this function are not saved on the user stack at function entry If a leaf function calls anothe
5. allowed supports shuge data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single shuge object is limited to 64K 16 bit address arithmetic Shuge data access is as fast as huge data but arithmetic on shuge addresses is faster Table 3 7 Huge memory model 3 2 1 6 MODEL c166 introduces the predefined preprocessor symbol MODEL The value of this symbol represents the memory model selected This can be very helpful in making conditional C code in one source module used for different applications in different memory models See also section 3 21 Portable C Code explaining the include file c166 h Language Implementation 3 19 The value of MODEL is tiny model v small model g medium model m large model sk huge model H Example if MODEL m _MODEL 1l1 medium or large model endif 3 2 1 7 EFFICIENCY IN LARGE DATA MODELS MEDIUM LARGE HUGE For programs compiled with the medium large and huge memory model the compiler creates default data sections member of the default data group and additional far huge shuge data sections for each module Since accessing data outside the default data page is slower than accessing data within the default data page programs will run faster if as many of their variables as possible are declared in such a way that they are allocated in the default data page There are a number of ways to control the allocation of data 1 All initia
6. Resume in code section 1 pragma fragment void func5 void Code section 4 pragma fragment continue void func6 void Continue in code section 5 void _near func7 void Code section 5 pragma fragment resume No effect Code section 5 void func8 void pragma fragment continue No effect pragma fragment _near void func9 void Code section 6 pragma fragment resume void main void Resume in code section 5 func9 func7 return 3 2 5 CONSTANT ROMDATA SECTION ALLOCATION In the small memory model c166 default allocates all constant romdata for strings floating point constants initialization of aggregates and jump tables in normal data near in small memory model which is limited to 4 pages of 16K When you do not want to sacrifice a normal data page for ROM you should use the Oe option of c166 When the Oe option is enabled the following changes are in effect for the small memory model Language Implementation 3 39 e 166 allocates string and floating point constants in a far romdata section PDAT During startup this data is copied from far ROM to near RAM like initialized ramdata The code generated for accessing these constants is not changed This means no change in execution speed The disadvantage is that the memory for these constants is allocated twice once in far ROM and once in near RAM The ROM sections have class CINITRO
7. Ac 1 AC option 2 i sizeof a b Ac 1 AC option 2 You can enable disable character arithmetic with the Ac AC command line option 3 58 Chapter 3 3 4 3 THE BIT TYPE The _bit type is subject to the following rules 1 A bit type variable is always placed in bit addressable RAM 2 A bit type variable is always unsigned 3 A bit type variable can be exchanged with all other type variables The compiler generates the correct conversion 4 Pointer to a bit variable and array of bit is not allowed because the C166 ST10 has no instructions to indirectly access a bit variable 5 Structure of bit is supported with the restriction that no other type than bit is member of this structure Structure of bit is not allowed as parameter or return value of a function 6 A union of a bit structure and another type is not allowed The bitword type can be used for this purpose 7 A bit type variable is not allowed as parameter The allowed classes for bit are automatic static public or extern 8 A function may have return type bit 9 The sizeof of a bit type is 1 10 A bit typed expression is not allowed as switch expression amp The constants need a bit cast operator in order to enable bit operations such as amp Of course this is not needed with compound assignments The following table shows which operators are allowed with bit type variables Allowed is p lt
8. It is very useful to share the register bank of interrupt functions which are at the same interrupt priority level so they cannot be active simultaneously This approach saves internal RAM space which is a scarce resource 3 The C module is called intrpt c present in the examples directory The examples illustrates the using keyword The C code and the generated code large memory model is listed below int i interrupt 0x30 using INTRPT_RB void i 2 ASSUME DPP3 SYSTEM INTRPT_1 NB SECTION DATA WORD PUBLIC CNEAR ASSUME DPP2 INTRPT_1 NB INTRPT_1 NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE _i LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC i INTRPT_1_NB ENDS INTRPT_2_PR SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM E PROC TASK INTRPT_TASK INTNO INTRPT_INUM 030h Stack 0 MOV DPP3 INTRPT_RB R0 SCXT CP DPP3 INTRPT_RB PUSH DPP2 MOV DPP2 PAG C166 _DGROUP MOV R4 02h ADD _i R4 POP DPP2 POP CP BCLR IEN RETI f ENDP INTRPT_2_PR ENDS C166_BSS SECTION DATA WORD GLOBAL CINITROM DW 06h DPPTR INTRPT_1 NB ENTRY DW 02h C166_BSS ENDS C166 _DGROUP DGROUP INTRPT 1 NB INTRPT RB REGDEF RO R15 REGDEF RO R15 END 3 86 7 Chapter 3 3 14 SWITCH STATEMENT c166 supports two ways of code generation for a switch statement a jump chain or a jump table A jump chain is comparable with an if else if else if else construction If all of the following conditions are true a jump table is emitted type is not long char
9. R10 R11 seeeeeeeemmmmmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmM s sign e exponent m mantissa The result is stored in R4 R5 again R4 R5 seeeeeeeemmmmmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmnmmmm s sign e exponent m mantissa Available float base expression subroutines Subroutine Operation Operands Result __adf4r float addition R4R5 R10R11 R4R5 __cmf4r float comparison R4R5 R10R11 R4 __dvf4r float division R4R5 R10R11 R4R5 __mlf4r float multiplication R4R5 R10R11 R4R5 __sbf4r float subtraction R4R5 R10R11 R4R5 Table 3 16 Float base expression subroutines 3 92 Chapter 3 7 3 16 4 2 FLOAT CONVERSION SUBROUTINES Operands return value The single precision operand or return value is stored in R4 R5 R4 R5 seeeeeeeemmmmmmmM mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmMM s sign e exponent m mantissa Available float conversion subroutines Subroutine Operation Operands Result __cff48r 1 float to double conversion R4R5 R10 __cff84r double to float conversion R10 R4R5 __cfi42r float to signed int conversion R4R5 R4 __cfi44r float to signed long conversion R4R5 R5R4 2 __cfu42r float to unsigned int conversion R4R5 R4 __cfu44r float to unsigned long conversion R4R5 R5R4 2 __cif24r signed int to float conversion R4 R4R5 __cif44r signed long to float conversion R5R4 2 R4R5 __cuf24r unsigned int to float conversion R4 R4R5
10. of array so array may not be used from register contents but MUST be read from memory gt alias checking MUST be ON in this case 4 100 7 Chapter 4 4 7 COMPILER LIMITS The ANSI C standard 1 2 2 4 defines a number of translation limits which a C compiler must support to conform to the standard The standard states that a compiler implementation should be able to translate and execute a program that contains at least one instance of every one of the following limits c166 s actual limits are given within parentheses Most of the actual compiler limits are determined by the amount of free memory in the host system In this case aD Dynamic is given between parentheses Some limits are determined by the size of the internal compiler parser stack These limits are marked with a P Although the size of this stack is 200 the actual limit can be lower and depends on the structure of the translated program e 15 nesting levels of compound statements iteration control structures and selection control structures P gt 15 e 8 nesting levels of conditional inclusion 50 e 12 pointer array and function declarators in any combinations modifying an arithmetic a structure a union or an incomplete type in a declaration 12 e 31 nesting levels of parenthesized declarators within a full declarator P gt 31 e 32 nesting levels of parenthesized expressions within a full
11. 0 it is not allowed to specify while si si i 55 operand has not integer type The operand of a if directive must evaluate to an integral constant So if 1 is not allowed 56 lt debugoption gt lt level gt no associated action This warning can only appear in the debug version of the compiler There is no associated debug action with the specified debug option and level 58 invalid warning number number The warning number you supplied to the w option does not exist Replace it with the correct number 59 sorry more than number errors Compilation stops if there are more than 40 errors 60 label label multiple defined A label can be defined only once in the same function The following is an example of this error labl labl error 61 type clash The compiler found conflicting types For example a long is only allowed on int or double no specifiers are allowed with struct union or enum The following is an example of this error unsigned signed int i error Compiler Diagnostics 5 13 E 62 bad storage class for name The storage class specifiers auto and register may not appear in declaration specifiers of external definitions Also the only storage class specifier allowed in a parameter declaration is register 63 name redeclared The specified identifier was already declared The compiler uses the second declaration The following is an example of this er
12. include lt stdio h gt FILE fopen const char filename const char mode Opens a file for a given mode Returns a stream If the file cannot not be opened NULL is returned fopen needs a heap size of at least 512 bytes You can specify the following values for mode r read open text file for reading w write create text file for writing if the file already exists its contents is discarded a append open existing text file or create new text file for writing at end of file Pr open text file for update reading and writing PWE create text file for update previous contents if any is discarded a append open or create text file for update writes at end of file The update mode with a allows reading and writing of the same file In this mode the function fflush must be called between a read and a write or vice versa By including the letter b after the initial letter you can indicate that the file is a binary file E g rb means read binary w b means create binary file for update The filename is limited to FILENAME MAX characters At most FOPEN_MAX files may be open at once Libraries 6 35 Sprintf include lt stdio h gt int fprintf FILE stream const char format Performs a formatted write to the given stream Gb See also printfQ and _writeQ Sputc include lt stdio h gt int fputc int c FILE stream Puts one character onto the gi
13. lt Sy SS CALL RETURN amp amp conversions to from char int long float double bit structures bit members only unary plus Language Implementation 3 59 Not allowed or not recommended is post pre increment decrement unary minus indirection array pointer address fy Sy lt lt gt gt lt lt gt gt 3 4 4 THE BITWORD TYPE You can declare word variables in the bit addressable area as _bitword You can access individual bits using the intrinsic functions _getbit and _putbit or declare the individual bits of this _bitword variable using _atbit A prototype for these functions is given in the include file c166 h For example _bitword bwl bw2 bitaddressable words if _getbit bwl 3 _putbit 1 bw2 7 set bit 7 of bw2 d gt See also section 3 2 7 The _atbit Attribute The _bitword type is subject to the following rules 1 A bitword type variable is always unsigned and volatile 2 A bitword type variable can be exchanged with all other type variables The compiler generates the correct conversion 3 Pointer to a bitword variable and array of bitword is allowed 4 Structure of bitword is supported with the restriction that no other type than bitword is member of this structure Structure of bitword is not allowed as parameter or return value of a function 5 A bitword type variable is not allo
14. or CHUGEROM unless part of the default data group where all sections must have the same class name See section 3 8 Initialized Variables for details Six_byte_write For all code following this pragma the compiler generates two NOP instructions after each instruction which does a byte write These instructions are ADDB ADDCB ANDB CPLB MOVB NEGB ORB SUBB SUBCB XORB This is a bypass for the erroneous byte forwarding on internal RAM problem This pragma is equivalent to the new command line option BB nofix_byte_write Default For all code following this pragma the compiler does not generate two NOP instructions after each instruction which does a byte write This pragma is equivalent to the new command line option Bb By default the generation of two extra NOP instructions after a byte write operation is disabled The pragmas fix_byte_write nofix_bytewrite and the BB option only have to be used for the steps of the SAB 88C166 flash which have the Erroneous Byte Forwarding for internal RAM locations Please refer to the Infineon errata sheets of your CPU step for more information fragment fragment resume fragment continue Controls fragmentation of code memory See section 3 2 4 Code Memory Fragmentation for details global_dead_store_elim Default Enable dead store elimination on global and local static variables 4 94 Chapter 4 no_global_dead_store_elim Disable dead store elimination
15. AN Note that the use of DFAP may have a performance penalty on the compiler itself The DFAP optimizations are rather aggressive and can make programs less debugable The OV option overrules the pragmas dfap nodfap in the source So OV default always disables the DFAP optimizer no matter the pragma settings in your source With Ov active you can control the DFAP optimizer with the pragmas dfap nodfap If none of these pragmas are present in your source the default is dfap d gt Pragmas dfap and nodfap in section 4 5 Pragmas Compiler Use 4 65 Ow OW Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Relax cross type alias checking Ow OW Default Ow Description With Ow the compiler relaxes alias checking assuming there are no pointer aliases for different type For example when a pointer to an int is dereferenced written it is reasonable to assume that this cannot have any effect on char objects With OW the compiler performs cross type alias checking 4 66 Chapter 4 Ox 0X Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Inlining of some small C library functions Ox OX Default OX Description
16. Display module summary and write section information in output file Treat all char variables as unsigned Suppress one or all warning messages Suppress warning messages 183 196 and 216 4 7 4 8 Chapter 4 Option Description x 1 2 22 d Allow all or some functions of the extended architectures to be used with ext or ext2 library sets zpragma Identical to pragma pragma in the C source Table 4 2 Compiler options alphabetical Description Options Include options Read options from file f file Include file before starting compilation Hfile Look in directory for include files Idirectory Preprocess options Preprocess only E m c i p x Define preprocessor macro Dmacro def Remove preprocessor macro Umacro Allocation control options Use groupname to group near data sections Ggroupname Mm MI or Mh only Change class name combine type or align type of section for mem Static allocation of automatics Use size as threshold before allocating data in default data group Mm MI Mh only In addition to the previous option you can also specify a threshold for intiialized data Default infinite Specify memory size Specify maximum section size for mem and in addition a threshold n for switching to a new section R cl co al mem new S Tsize T size size2 mmemesize mmem size n Code generation options Cont
17. E 744 bad pragma ml66include syntax 3 17 2 IMPLEMENTING OTHER COXXX INTRINSICS USING THE COXXX INTRINSIC FUNCTIONS Many CoXXX instructions are automatically generated if a special sequence is recognized Examples _CoLOAD argl _CoABS generates the CoABS opl op2 instruction _CoMUL argl arg2 _CoRND generates the COMUL opl op2 rnd instruction _CoSUB argl _CONEG generates the COSUBR opl op2 instruction Note that the MP flag influences the result it is highly recommended to keep the MP flag cleared 3 134 Chapter 3 The CoXxXXus instructions are identical to the CoxxXsu variants with exchanged operands For example CoMACus opl op2 rnd is identical to COMACSu op2 opl rnd The missing _CoXXX intrinsics can be defined as inline functions For example _inline void _CoMUL_rnd int x int y _CoMUL x y _CORND Language Implementation 3 135 3 18 CODE MEMORY BANKING c166 supports code memory banking With this technique you can extend your code memory beyond 16 MB This technique is only useful in the small and large memory model code gt 64Kb You can specify parts of any size of the 16 MB of memory to use EPROM memory that is not addressable with a normal 24 bit address The parts of this extra memory are called memory banks You can use code memory banking in C by using the function qualifier _bank number where number is any numb
18. EE 2pragma Arguments A pragma as listed in section 4 5 Pragmas Description With this option you can give a pragma on the command line This is the same as specifying pragma pragma in the C source Dashes C on the command line in the pragma are converted to spaces Example To issue a pragma autobita 2 using the command line enter c166 zautobita 2 file c The between autobita and 2 is converted to a space d gt Section 4 5 Pragmas Compiler Use 4 85 4 4 INCLUDE FILES You may specify include files in two ways enclosed in lt gt or enclosed in When an include directive is seen c166 uses the following algorithm trying to open the include file 2999 1 If the filename is enclosed in and it is not an absolute pathname does not begin with a for PC or a for UNIX the include file is searched for in the directory of the file containing the include line For example in PC c166 source test c UNIX c166 source test c c166 first searches in the directory source source for UNIX for include files If you compile a source file in the directory where the file is located c166 test c the compiler searches for include files in the current directory LN This first step is not done for include files enclosed in lt gt 2 Use the directories specified with the I options in a left to right order For example PC c1
19. ELSE __FP_ENV_BUF SECTION DATA WORD PUBLIC CNEAR ENDI __FP_ENV LABEL WORD DS 16 sizeof jmp_buf __FP_ENV_BUF ENDS IF EQS MODEL TINY C166 BSS SECTION LDAT WORD GLOBAL CINITROM DW 05h init code 05 linear data DW __FP_ENV Start address buffer DW 16 number of bytes to clear C166_BSS ENDS ENDI IF EQS MODEL SMALL c166_BSS SECTION PDAT WORD GLOBAL CINITROM DW 06h init code 06 paged data DPPTR _ FP_ENV start address buffer r DW 16 number of bytes to clear C166_BSS ENDS ENDI IF NES MODEL TINY amp NES MODEL SMALL C166_DGROUP DGROUP __FP_ENV_BUF add to default data group C166_BSS SECTION DATA WORD GLOBAL CINITROM DW 06h init code 06 paged data DPPTR _ FP_ENV start address buffer 7 DW 16 number of bytes to clear C166_BSS ENDS ENDI IF EQS MODEL TINY EQS MODEL SMALL REGDEF R1 R12 R13 ELSE REGDEF R1 R12 R14 ENDI END Figure 3 7 Floating point trap handling assembly listing Language Implementation 3 105 The floating point trap handler checks if an environment is set in __FP_ENV to return to When the return address contains a NULL pointer it is supposed that there is no environment set and the trap handler continues looping infinitely When a return address is set the address of the jump buffer _ FP_ENV and the trap code are passed to longjmp Calling the longjmp function at the end of the t
20. MOV R12 _p MOV R13 1 MOV R14 _1 2 MOV R4 SOF _func_bl pass inter segment address of MOV R5 SEG _func_bl banked function MOV R3 0001H pass code bank number and no restore of current bank at pass character pointer pass long value return MOV R0 R3 save code bank number s on the user stack CALLS SEG _ banksw _ banksw call code bank switch function ADD R0 2 Remove code bank number s from the user stack MOV _x R4 return result from banked function The default startup situation assumes that a function is in a non banked portion of code memory The bank switch function and all other library functions must be located in non banked memory so library functions can be shared by both banked and non banked functions The bank switch function may not introduce a conflict with the register usage and user stack usage implementation of C function parameter passing and C register variables See section 3 15 Register Usage for details The registers which are used for fast C parameter passing R12 R15 may not be used by the code bank switch function and also the registers which are used for C register variables R6 R9 may not be altered without saving them at entry and restoring them at return of the bank switch function Register R1 R5 R10 and R11 are free for use However registers R4 and R5 may contain a return value from the banked function The user stack pointer RO may not be change
21. _ prior 3 122 _putbit 3 120 _pwrdn 3 122 _read 6 18 _rol 3 117 _ror 3 118 _seg 3 127 _SINGLE_FP 3 62 _ sof 3 127 _srvwdt 3 122 _sstrcat 6 18 _sstrchr 6 19 _sstremp 6 19 _sstrepy 6 19 _sstrespn 6 19 _sstrlen 6 20 _sstrncat 6 20 _sstrncmp 6 20 _sstrnepy 6 21 _sstrpbrk 6 21 _sstrrchr 6 21 _sstrspn 6 21 _sstrstr 6 22 _sstrtok 6 22 _stime 6 18 _testclear 3 118 _testset 3 119 _tolower 6 22 _toupper 6 22 _tzset 6 23 _unlink 6 23 _usm function qualifier 3 28 _USMLIB 3 62 _USRSTACK 7 5 _write 6 23 _xnear 3 21 _xsfr keyword 3 60 A a166 2 9 abort 6 23 abs 6 24 access 6 24 accessing memory 3 5 acos 6 24 address ranges 3 5 addresses linear 3 8 alias 4 44 4 88 4 98 align 4 91 align type 3 30 3 35 4 69 align32 4 89 ansi standard 2 3 3 3 3 68 3 70 ar166 2 11 asctime 6 24 asin 6 25 asm 4 90 asm_noflush 4 90 assembly language interfacing 7 12 assembly source file 2 9 assert 6 25 assert h 6 7 assert 6 25 atan 6 25 atan2 6 25 atexit 6 26 atof 6 26 atoi 6 26 atol 6 26 atomic instruction D 6 autobita 4 90 autobitastruct 4 90 automatic 4 90 automatic initializations 3 68 autosavemac 4 96 Index 6 backend compiler phase 2 5 optimization 2 5 bank function qualifier 3 135 bank switch 3 137 benchmark 2 25 bit 3 53 bit type 3 58 BIT_INIT 7 5 bita 3 26 bitword 3 53 bitword type 3 59 bsearch 6 27 btowc 6 27 build v
22. argument allocates strings in the memory model s default memory space In the small memory model this also means that the Oe OE option is effective See also section 3 2 5 Constant Romdata Section Allocation The following example illustrates the use of the pragma pragma stringmem _huge allocate strings in _huge memory _huge char txt textl1 3 72 7 This results in the following code STR_IR_NB STR_IR_NB ENTRY DSPTR STR_IR_NB STR_ID_NB STR_ID NB ENTRY _txt LABEL DS PUBLIC STR_ID_NB STR_3_HC 3 DB STR_3_HC C166_INIT DW DPPTR DW C166_INIT The pragma can appear anywhere in the source and remains in effect until SECTION PDAT WORD PUBLIC LABEL BYTE 3 ENDS SECTION LDAT WORD PUBLIC LABEL BYTE WORD 4 _txt ENDS SECTION HDAT WORD PUBLIC 074h 065h 078h 074h 031h ENDS SECTION PDAT WORD GLOBAL 06h CINITROM CINITIRAM CHUGEROM 00h CINITROM STR_ID NB ENTRY STR_IR NB ENTRY 04h ENDS the pragma is used again to set a different memory space Language Implementation 3 11 INLINE ASSEMBLY c166 supports an inline assembly facility by means of the following pragmas pragma asm Insert the following non preprocessor lines as assembly language source code into the output file The inserted lines are not checked for their syntax pragma asm_noflush Same as asm except that the peephole optimizer does not flush t
23. char name int offset return name offset If prototyping is enabled the function call to cg_var is using the full prototype and the function body of cg_var is treated like a new style function using the full prototype Try to use the unsigned type modifier as much as possible because it takes less code to convert an unsigned variable to a long variable than a signed variable Do NOT use the A option This option is implemented as strict ANSI conformance checking disabling language extensions and character arithmetic code generation This option may decrease code density and execution speed In most of the cases it is safe to use the Oa option which results in better code density However you have to check your application on aliases If this option is not used default c166 forgets all register contents bound to C variables if an indirect write operation e g MOV R4 R5 is performed See section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge Use the Om option default and non protected library if multiply and divide instructions do not have to be protected against interrupts This results in better code density and faster execution 3 145 3 146 10 11 Chapter 3 Use the intrinsic functions if special C166 ST10 instructions are needed If you want to overrule the c166 register allocation of C variables you must use the register storage cla
24. 0 struct b offset 0 struct a offset 8 double offset 16 s Se Roe int The macro call parameter assignments will be included in the output file as comment similar to the following Macro call parameter assignments i i il R12 11 R13R14 s dl offset 16 func ifunc i2 d2 offset 8 A d2 offset 0 T function R12 R13 R14 16 8 0 If a parameter occupies more than one register all registers will be passed separately to the macro See the example above where parameter 11 has type long int This parameter is passed in R13 R14 at position 2 and 3 in the parameter list If there are more registers needed then available max 13 an error will be generated E 745 no registers left for expression Language Implementation 3 131 The following registers are not used for parameter passing RO cannot be used gt User stack pointer R4 cannot be used gt Used for return values scratch RS cannot be used gt Used for return values scratch USRO cannot be used gt Used for return values scratch The return value of the macro call must conform with the C166 calling convention Return type Register s bit PSW 6 USRO char RL4 short int R4 long R4 R5 float R4 R5 double double accu on user stack near pointer R4 far pointer R4 R5 huge pointer R4 R5 shuge pointer R4 R5 structure structure on user stack
25. 2 9 Build your Application 000 cee eee 2 23 2 10 How to Build Your Application on the Command Line 2 24 2 10 1 Using the Control Program 0 2 0 c eee eee 2 24 2 10 2 Using the Separate Programs 0 0005 2 26 2 10 3 Using a Makefile 0 0 eee 2 29 2 11 Debugging your Application 0 0 000 2 30 2 12 Using DAVE Projects with EDE 2 31 VI 7 Table of Contents LANGUAGE IMPLEMENTATION 3 1 3 1 IntrOGUCHON re ar E es RA E Sete es 3 3 3 2 Accessing Memory 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 3 5 3 2 1 Memory Models sanii Secu he iie cette URES ih 3 6 3 2 1 1 Tiny Memory Model 0000 0 c cee eee 3 6 3 2 1 2 Small Memory Model 00 000 eee eee eee 3 8 3 2 1 3 Medium Memory Model 0 00 0 eee eee 3 13 3 2 1 4 Large Memory Model 0 0000 cece eee 3 15 3 2 1 5 Huge Memory Model 00 000 c eee eee 3 17 3 2 1 6 MODEL neiere het e haan ea aaa ea 3 18 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge 3 19 3 2 1 8 Near Xnear Far Huge and _Shuge 3 22 3 2 1 9 _System _Iram and _Bita 00 eee eee eee 3 25 3 2 2 User Stack Model suree urranna o ea ccc 3 28 3 2 3 Section Allocation 1 0 0 cece cece eee 3 30 3 2 4 Code Memory Fragmentation 005 3 37 3 2 5 Constant Romdata Section Allocation 3 38 3 2 6 The at Attribute epay a a cate a 3 41 3 2 7 The _atbi
26. 3 13 small 3 8 tiny 3 6 memory size 4 36 memset 6 67 MISRA C 3 140 4 38 4 39 mk166 2 11 mktime 6 67 MODEL preprocessor symbol 7 4 modf 6 67 module summary 4 77 ncalloc 6 67 near 3 20 near function D 5 near function call D 4 near pointer 3 53 near xnear far huge and shuge 3 22 3 27 nfree 6 68 nmalloc 6 68 no global dead_store_elim 4 94 noalias 4 89 noalign32 4 89 NOBITCLEAR 7 5 noclear 4 92 nocustack 4 91 node locked license 1 9 nodfap 4 92 nofix_byte_write 4 93 noframe 4 95 nomacro 4 95 non initialized variables 3 69 nop removal 4 56 noreorder 4 95 nosavemac 4 96 nosource 4 96 novolatile_union 4 97 O offsetof 6 68 open 6 69 optimization 4 41 4 43 backend 2 5 frontend 2 5 2 6 optimization frontend common subexpression elimination 2 8 common tail merging 2 8 conditional jump reversal 2 7 constant folding 2 6 constant value propagation 2 8 control flow optimization 2 7 dead code elimination 2 8 expression rearrangement 2 7 expression simplification 2 7 jump chaining 2 7 logical expression optimization 2 7 loop rotation 2 7 register coloring 2 8 sharing of string literals and floating point constants 2 8 switch optimization 2 7 options control program 4 4 detailed compiler options 4 10 overview compiler options 4 6 overview control program options 4 4 output file 4 67 overlay 3 135 3 137 P packed st
27. 3 2 10 USING PACKED STRUCTURES packed By default the compiler aligns structure members on word boundaries Due to this alignment gaps can appear between the structure members When you do not want these gaps you can use the _packed qualifier In this case the compiler does not align the structure members However bit fields will still be aligned in some special cases as explained below With the _packed attribute the compiler pads the size of the structure or union to an 8 bit boundary instead of a 16 bit boundary You can use the _ packed attribute on struct and union types only The _packed attribute applies to the struct union definition itself rather than to an instance of the struct union So each instance of the struct union must also have the _ packed attribute The following example demonstrates the usage of the _packed attribute _packed struct ps char Cc offset 0 bytes int i offset 1 byte he _packed struct ps st0 correct _packed struct struct ps stl error conflict in _packed attribute Language Implementation 3 47 Besides the padding of the struct union size the _packed attribute is basically a shortcut for struct s _noalign char Cc _noalign int i st2 So if you want to use a pointer to a member of a __ packed struct union you must qualify the pointer with the _noalign attribute _noalign int p amp st2 i The _packed attribute does not say anything
28. 6 103 wcstoul 6 103 wesxfrm 6 103 wctob 6 104 wctomb 6 104 wctrans 6 104 wctype 6 105 wctype h 6 9 iswalnum 6 47 iswalpha 0 47 iswentrl 6 47 iswctype 0 47 iswdigit 6 48 iswgraph 6 48 iswlower 6 48 iswprint 6 48 iswpunct 6 48 iswspace 6 49 iswupper 6 49 iswxdigit 0 49 towctrans 6 92 towlower 6 92 towupper 6 93 wetrans 6 104 wetype 0 105 wmemchr 6 105 wmemcmp 6 105 wmemcepy 6 106 Index 24 Index 7 wmemmove 6 106 wmemset 6 106 xX wprintf 6 106 write 6 107 wscanf 6 107 XC16x C language extensions 3 79 xnear pointer 3 53 xsfr 3 53
29. 6 7 localeconv 6 50 setlocale 6 79 localeconv 6 50 localtime 6 50 log 6 51 log10 6 51 logical expression optimization 2 7 long double 3 53 longjmp 6 51 loop rotation 2 7 Istat 6 51 m166 2 11 m166include 4 94 macro 4 95 macros in C 3 62 makefile automatic creation of 2 20 updating 2 20 makefiles 2 29 malloc 6 52 math h 6 7 acos 6 24 asin 6 25 atan 6 25 atan2 6 25 ceil 6 28 cos 6 29 cosh 6 29 exp 0 30 fabs 0 31 floor 6 33 Index fmod 6 34 frexp 0 37 hypot 6 43 hypotf 6 43 hypotl 0 44 Idexp 6 50 log 6 51 log10 6 51 modf 6 67 pow 6 69 sin 6 81 sinh 6 81 sqrt 0 82 tan 6 90 tanh 6 90 mblen 6 52 mbrlen 6 52 mbrtowc 6 53 mbsinit 6 53 mbsrtowcs 6 54 mbstowcs 6 54 mbtowc 6 55 medium model 3 23 memchr 6 55 memcemp 6 55 memcpffb 6 56 memcpffw 6 56 memcepfhb 6 56 memcpfhw 6 57 memcepfnb 6 57 memcpfnw 6 57 memepfsb 6 58 memcpfsw 6 58 memcphfb 6 58 memcphfw 6 59 memcephhb 6 59 memcphhw 6 59 memcphnb 6 60 memcphnw 6 60 memcphsb 6 60 memcphsw 6 61 memcpnfb 6 61 Index Index 15 memcpnfw 6 61 memcpnhb 6 62 memcpnhw 6 62 memcpnnb 6 62 memcpnnw 6 63 memcepnsb 6 63 memcpnsw 6 63 memcepsfb 6 64 memcpsfw 6 64 memcepshb 6 64 memcpshw 6 65 memcepsnb 6 65 memcpsnw 6 65 memcepssb 6 66 memcpssw 6 66 memcpy 6 66 memmove 6 66 memory accessing 3 5 memory model 3 6 huge 3 17 large 3 15 medium
30. Available double base expression subroutines Subroutine Operation Operands Result __adf8r double addition R10 R11 R10 __cmf sr double comparison R10 R11 R4 __dvf8r double division R10 R11 R10 __mlf r double multiplication R10 R11 R10 __ngf8r double negation R10 R10 __sbf8r double addition R10 R11 R10 Table 3 18 Double base expression subroutines 3 94 z 3 16 5 2 DOUBLE CONVERSION SUBROUTINES Operands return value Chapter 3 The double precision operand or return value is referred to by R10 R10 0 R10 2 R10 4 R10 6 s sign e exponent m mantissa Available double conversion subroutines Subroutine Operation Operands Result __cff48r 1 float to double conversion R4R5 R10 __cff84r double to float conversion R10 R4R5 __cfi82r double to signed int conversion R10 R4 __cfi84r double to signed long conversion R10 R5R4 2 __cfu82r double to unsigned int conversion R10 R4 __cfu84r double to unsigned long conversion R10 R5R4 2 __cif28r 1 signed int to double conversion R4 R10 __cif4sr 1 signed long to double conversion R5R4 2 R10 __cuf2sr 1 unsigned int to double conversion R4 R10 __cuf48r 1 unsigned long to double conversion R5R4 2 R10 Table 3 19 Double conversion s
31. Description These functions are only called by explicit function calls in your application program However some compiler generated code contain calls to run time library functions that would use too much code when generated as inline code The name of a run time library function always contains two leading underscores For example to perform a long 32 bit signed division the function __sdil1 is called Because 166 generates assembly code and not object code it adds a leading underscore to the names of public C variables to distinguish these symbols from 80166 registers So if you use a function with a leading underscore the assembly label for this function contains two leading underscores This function name could cause a name conflict double defined with one of the run time library functions Therefore you should avoid names starting with an underscore Note that ANSI states that it is not portable to use names starting with an underscore for public C variables and functions because results are implementation defined Libraries 6 5 The code sections of the C166 library have the class CLIBRARY SHAREDCLIB RTLIBRARY or SHAREDRTLIB allowing the library to be allocated in a special memory area via the CLASSES control of 1166 6 2 SMALL MEDIUM AND LARGE I O FORMATTERS B The C library contains the SMALL I O formatter version of the printfQ and scanfQ functions and their variants like sprintfQ fp
32. Multiplication by 0 or 1 and additions or subtractions of 0 are removed Such useless expressions may be introduced by macros in C define or by the compiler itself Logical expression optimization Expressions involving amp amp series of conditional jumps gt and are interpreted and translated into a Loop rotation With for and while loops the expression is evaluated once at the top and then at the bottom of the loop This optimization does not save code but speeds up execution Switch optimization A number of optimizations of a switch statement are performed such as the deletion of redundant case labels or even the deletion of the switch Control flow optimization By reversing jump conditions and moving code the number of jump instructions is minimized This reduces both the code size and the execution time Jump chaining A conditional or unconditional jump to a label which is immediately followed by an unconditional jump may be replaced by a jump to the destination label of the second jump These situations frequently occur with nested control structures This optimization does not save code but speeds up execution Conditional jump reversal A conditional jump over an unconditional jump is transformed into one conditional jump with the jump condition reversed This reduces both the code size and the execution time 2 8 Chapter 2 Register coloring Optimize register
33. Preprocessor symbols used in startup code There are a number of other preprocessor symbols used which can be enabled or disabled using the command line control DEFINE Syntax DEFINE dentifier replacement Run time Environment 7 5 In the startup file the following preprocessor symbols are used please also review cstartx asm or cstartx2 asm EX_AB _EXT2 BIT_INIT Must be enabled set to 1 if the C library function exit or abort is called by the application Otherwise it must be cleared set to 0 Default cleared because the total code size is increased due to assumptions about buffered file I O which must be flushed at exit Must be enabled set to 1 when a XC16x Super10 architecture ext2 needs to be initialized It must be cleared set to 0 when a C16x ST10 architecture needs to be initialized Must be enabled set to 1 if initialized bit variables bit b 1 are used so the initialization is done at startup Non initialized bit variables are always set to 0 Default set to 0 because initialized bit variables are very seldom used and rather expensive in both ROM space and execution time during startup Therefore if possible initialized bit variables should be avoided NOBITCLEAR EVA CPU _USRSTACK When set skips clearing of the bitaddressable RAM Must be enabled set to 1 when using the ROM RAM monitor on evaluation boards as execution environment Needed to force the tiny mod
34. You can replace this routine with your own trapping routine or link your own trap routine to your application Default the trapping routine as delivered with the floating point libraries will never return The infinite loop on a public label called __FPTRAPLOOP is easy to find in a debug session See the listing of the trap handler in figure 3 6 of section 3 16 8 Handling Floating Point Traps in a C Application 3 98 Chapter 3 A floating point routine calls the trap routine if an error condition occurs The type of error is specified by a trap code which is passed via register R1 to the trap routine The result of a floating point operation is not undefined in an error situation On error the result will be a special floating point number such as infinite not a number etc except when a floating point underflow or overflow occurs The following table lists all the trap codes and the corresponding error description and result Error Description Trap code Result float unsigned integer Integer overflow 3 Ox7FFF or 0x8000 integer result OxFFFF or 0x0000 unsigned integer result Floating overflow 4 INF or INF float result Floating underflow 5 0 0 float result Divide by zero 7 INF or INF or NaN float result Undefined float 9 NaN float result Conversion error 10 O integer result INF Infinite which is the largest absolute floating point number NaN Not a Number special notation for un
35. ad TEST_ DS 2 PUBLIC _fptr 4 NB ENDS 5 NB SECTION LDAT WORD PUBLIC CNEAR 5 NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC _j 5 NB ENDS For example in this case the linker locator assigns a value of Ox0A to DPP2 This is the same as using the SND DPP2 10 linker locator control When specifying a near address bits 14 and 15 implicitly specify the DPP register that will be used DPP3 cannot be changed This is because DPP3 points to the memory that contains SFRs and bit addressable memory Therefore it is not possible to locate near variables in the third page of any segment other than segment 0 Language Implementation 3 43 3 2 7 THE ATBIT ATTRIBUTE In c166 it is possible to define bit variables within a _bitword or bit addressable _sfr variable This can be done with the _atbit attribute The syntax is _atbit name offset where name is the name of a_bitword or _sfr variable and offset range 0 15 is the bit offset within the variable Examples _sfr P0 _sfrbit PO 6 _atbit PO 6 _bitword bw bitaddressable word _bit myb _atbit bw 3 Using the defined bit if myb myb 0 generates the same code as if _getbit bw 3 _putbit 0 bw 3 The first example defines an _sfrbit within a bit addressable _sfr variable The second example defines a bitaddress within a bitaddressable word For more information on SFR variables see section 3 4 5 Special Fu
36. after the conversion In most cases you can safely switch off this warning w196 or wstrict 197 unrecognized w argument argument The w option only accepts a warning number or the text strict as an argument See the description of the w option for details Compiler Diagnostics 5 31 W 198 trigraph sequence replaced The character set of C source programs is contained within seven bit ASCH but is a superset of the ISO 646 1983 Invariant Code Set In order to enable programs to be represented in the reduced set all occurrences of the following trigraph sequences are replaced by the corresponding single character This replacement occurs before any other processing represents represents 2 represents represents represents represents lt represents gt represents represents The compiler issuses a warning when it performs a trigraph replacement to inform that something occured which was probably not expected to occur F 199 demonstration package limits exceeded The demonstration package has certain limits which are not present in the full version Contact TASKING for a full version W 200 unknown pragma name ignored The compiler ignores pragmas that are not known For example pragma unknown W 201 name cannot have storage type ignored A register variable or an automatic parameter cannot have a storage type To eliminate this warning remove the st
37. compiler With a C source file as input cc166 calls c166 a166 and 1166 with the appropriate command line arguments It is advised to use cc166 when you compile C source programs because of the complex nature of C compilation The global storage optimizer gso166 is a program to optimize allocation of objects in memory spaces The macro preprocessor m166 is a program to preprocess assembly files suffix asm The ihex166 program formats the a out file into an Intel Hex format file You can load this output file into an EPROM programmer The srec166 program formats the a out file into a Motorola S Format for EPROM programmers The ar166 program is a librarian facility You can use this program to create and maintain object libraries A utility to disassemble absolute object files and relocatable object files is d166 A utility to display the contents of an object file is dmp166 The mk166 program builder uses a set of dependency rules in a makefile to build only the parts of an application which are out of date For a full description of all available utilities see chapter 12 Utilities in the C166 ST10 Cross Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Manual The name of the C166 ST10 CrossView Pro Debugger is xfw166 For more information check the C166 ST10 CrossView Pro Debugger User s Manual This manual uses xvw166 as the general executable name 2 12 7 Chapter 2 File extensions The following tab
38. const char newname Changes the name of the file Returns zero if file is successfully renamed or a non zero value if the attempt fails 6 76 Chapter 6 7 rewind include lt stdio h gt void rewind FILE stream Sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream to the beginning of the file This function is equivalent to void fseek stream OL SEEK_SET clearerr stream Returns nothing scalloc include lt stdlib h gt void _shuge scalloc size_t nobj size t size Shuge variant of callocQ See section 7 3 Heap Size scanf include lt stdio h gt int scanf const char format Performs a formatted read from the standard input stream d See also _read0 Returns the number of items converted successfully All arguments to this function should be pointers to variables in default memory of the type which is specified in the format string The format string may contain Blanks or tabs which are skipped Normal characters not which should be matched exactly in the input stream Conversion specifications starting with a character Conversion specifications should be build as follows in order A meaning that no assignment is done for this field Libraries 6 77 A number specifying the maximum field width The conversion characters d i n o u and x may be preceded by h if the argumen
39. const char far cs const char far ct Returns a far pointer to the first occurrence in cs of any character out of far string ct If none are found NULL is returned _Sfstrrcehr include lt string h gt char far fstrrchr const char far cs int c Returns a far pointer to the last occurrence of c in the far string cs If not found NULL is returned _Sfstrspn include lt string h gt size_t _fstrspn const char far cs const char far ct Returns the length of the prefix in far string cs consisting of characters in the far string ct _Sfstrstr include lt string h gt char far fstrstr const char far cs const char far ct Returns a far pointer to the first occurrence of far string ct in the far string cs Returns NULL if not found 6 14 Chapter 6 7 _fstrtok include lt string h gt char far fstrtok char far s const char far ct Search the far string s for tokens delimited by characters from far string ct It terminates the token with a NULL character Returns a pointer to the token A subsequent call with s NULL will return the next token in the string _hstrcat include lt string h gt char huge hstrcat char huge s const char huge ct Concatenates huge string ct to huge string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s _hstrcbr include lt string h gt char huge _hstrchr const char huge cs int c Returns a huge pointer to the fir
40. ct size tn Copies huge string ct onto the huge string s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character if the string is smaller than n characters Returns s _hstrpbrk include lt string h gt char huge hstrpbrk const char huge cs const char huge ct Returns a huge pointer to the first occurrence in cs of any character out of huge string ct If none are found NULL is returned _hstrrchr include lt string h gt char huge _hstrrchr const char huge cs int c Returns a huge pointer to the last occurrence of c in the huge string cs If not found NULL is returned Libraries 6 17 _hbsirspn include lt string h gt size_t _hstrspn const char huge cs const char huge ct Returns the length of the prefix in huge string cs consisting of characters in the huge string ct _hstrstr include lt string h gt char huge hstrstr const char huge cs const char huge ct Returns a huge pointer to the first occurrence of huge string ct in the huge string cs Returns NULL if not found _hstrtok include lt string h gt char huge hstrtok char huge s const char huge ct Search the huge string s for tokens delimited by characters from huge string ct It terminates the token with a NULL character Returns a pointer to the token A subsequent call with s NULL will return the next token in the string _lseek include lt stdio h gt off t _lseek int fd
41. data else char buffer 100 endif void f DSTPO int buffer when you use the c compiler use a long cast instead of an integer DSTPO long buffer If large model MI is used the following code is generated PEC1_1 FB SECTION DATA PECADDRESSABLE PUBLIC firstsegment PEC 1 FB ENTRY LABEL BYTE _buffer LABEL BYTE DS 100 PUBLIC _ buffer PEC1_1_FB ENDS PUBLIC _f PEC1_2_PR_ SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM f PROC FAR MOV R4 SOF _buffer MOV DSTPO R4 RETS f ENDP PEC1_2_PR_ ENDS The following example shows how to allocate a PEC addressable section for a buffer in the SYSTEM page page 3 16K The SYSTEM page is in the PEC addressable range segment 0 Therefore it is not needed to declare the buffer data section PECADDRASSABLE with pragma align sb c Language Implementation 3 143 include lt reg166 h gt char _system buffer 100 explicitly _system allocated in system page DSTPO int buffer If large model MD is used the following code is generated ASSUME DPP3 SYSTEM PEC1 1 SB SECTION DATA WORD PUBLIC CSYSTEM PEC1_1_SB_ENTRY LABEL BYTE _buffer LABEL BYTE DS 100 PUBLIC _buffer PEC1_1 SB ENDS PUBLIC f PEC 2 PR SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM f PROC FAR MOV R4 SOF _buffer MOV DSTPO R4 RETS f ENDP PEC1_2_PR ENDS C166_SGROUP DGROUP PEC1_1 SB SYSTEM AN The XC16x Super10 architecture supports a PECSEGx reg
42. expression P gt 32 e 31 significant characters in an external identifier full ANSI C mode 500 significant characters in an external identifier non ANSI C mode e 511 external identifiers in one translation unit D e 127 identifiers with block scope declared in one block D e 1024 macro identifiers simultaneously defined in one translation unit D e 31 parameters in one function declaration D e 31 arguments in one function call D e 31 parameters in one macro definition D e 31 arguments in one macro call D e 509 characters in a logical source line 1500 e 509 characters in a character string literal or wide string literal after concatenation 1500 Compiler Use 4 101 e 8 nesting levels for included files 50 e 257 case labels for a switch statement excluding those for any nested switch statements D e 127 members in a single structure or union D e 127 enumeration constants in a single enumeration D e 15 levels of nested structure or union definitions in a single struct declaration list D As far as the compiler implementation uses fixed tables they will be large enough to meet the standards limits However most of the internal structures and tables of the compiler are dynamic Thus the actual compiler limits are determined by the amount of free memory in the system 4 102 USAGE Chapter 4 COMPILER DIAGNOSTICS all TASKING M ddaLdVH Compiler Diagnosti
43. for more details on the default data group Address arithmetic on near and far data is always 14 bit As in the small and medium models huge and shuge data access is supported Without any of the near xnear far huge and _shuge keywords the default data access is _far paged data for the large model and _huge for the huge model These models also support xnear data This data is allocated together with the user stack in DPP1 The access to this memory space is just as fast as to near data Address arithmetic on _xnear data is done in 14 bits See section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge for more details on the C166 _XGROUP data group All function calls are assumed to be _huge in another code segment of 64K unless you use the _near keyword in the function prototype In fact you could declare and define all static functions as near functions because they are always allocated in the same code section as the functions they are called by Object or pointer modification The near xnear far huge and_shuge keywords modify either objects or pointers to objects When using them to declare data or code or pointers to data or code the following rules must be kept in mind e The keyword always modifies the object or pointer immediately to its right In complex declarations such as char far _near p think of the _far keyword and the item to its right as being a single unit In thi
44. near function in the first segment E 598 invalid number atomic instructions atomic range is 1 4 The _atomic intrinsic function only accepts a number in the range 1 4 W 599 nothing to restore no section attributes are saved with pragma save_attributes Pragma restore attributes was used without a previous pragma save_attributes F 602 corrupt initialized variable different size between initialized RAM and ROM section The initialized RAM and ROM sections must have the same size This may be due to a different level of indirection with an assignment 5 40 Chapter 5 W 604 possible un aligned access on byte label name Characters are not aligned Functions and pointers are always aligned 605 _atbitO only possible on objects not on constant addresses Use _atbit to define bit variables within a bitword or sfr variable with a previously defined name 606 _atbitQ only possible for bit sfrbit objects Only bit and sfrbit objects can be declared with _atbit 607 _atbitO only possible on bitword sfr objects _atbit only accepts bitword or sfr objects as an argument 608 specified object not BIT addressable The object specified to _atbit must be a bitword or sfr object 610 sfrbit object can only have _atbitQ on sfr object bit object can only have _atbitQ on a bitword object You cannot specify a sfrbit object with atbit ona bitword object and you cannot specify a bit object with atbit onasfr object 611 m
45. object c166 has the following intrinsic functions _CoABS void _CoABS void Use the CoABS instruction to change the MAC accumulator s contents to its absolute value Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoABS CoABS 3 108 Chapter 3 7 _CoADD void _CoADD long x Use the CoADD instruction to add a 32 bit value to the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoADD argl CoADD R12 R13 _CoADD2 void _CoADD2 long x Use the CoADD2 instruction to add a 32 bit value multiplied by two to the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoADD2 argl CoADD2 R12 R13 _CoASHR void _CoASHR unsigned int count Use the CoASHR instruction to arithmetic shift right the contents of the MAC accumulator count times Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 The CoASHR instruction has a maximum value for count Check your CPU manual for the CoASHR behaviour for large arguments Returns nothing _COASHR 2 CoASHR 02h Language Implementation _CoCMP unsigned int _CoCMP long x Inline code is generated by the C compiler to compare the MAC accumulator contents with a 32
46. pointed to by cmp aN This function is recursive and therefore may need an increased user stack section raise include lt signal h gt int raise int sig Sends the signal sig to the program d See also signalQ Returns zero if successful or a non zero value if unsuccessful rand include lt stdlib h gt int rand void Returns a sequence of pseudo random integers in the range 0 to RAND MAX read include lt unistd h gt size t read int fd char buffer size_t count Reads a sequence of characters from a file This function calls _ read as See also readQ Libraries 6 75 realloc include lt stdlib h gt void realloc void p size_t size Reallocates the space for the object pointed to by p The contents of the object will be the same as before calling reallocd The maximum space that can be allocated can be changed by customizing the heap size see section 7 3 Heap Size By default no heap is allocated Returns NULL and p is not changed if there is not enough space for the new allocation Otherwise a pointer to the newly allocated space for the object is returned remove include lt stdio h gt int remove const char filename Removes the named file so that a subsequent attempt to open it fails Returns zero if file is successfully removed or a non zero value if the attempt fails rename include lt stdio h gt int rename const char oldname
47. pwcs into a sequence of multi byte characters that begins in the initial shift state and stores these multi byte characters into the array pointed to by s stopping if a multi byte character would exceed the limit of n total bytes or if a null character is stored Returns the number of bytes modified not including a terminating null character if any or size_t 1 if a wide character is encountered that does not correspond to a valid multi byte character westoul include lt wchar h gt unsigned long int wcestoul const wchar_t nptr wchar_t endptr int base Same as westol except that it converts the initial portion of the wide string to unsigned long int Returns the converted value or zero if no conversion could be performed wesxfrm include lt wchar h gt size_t wcesxfrm wchar_t sl const wchar t s2 SiZ eE Transforms the wide string pointed to by s2 and places the resulting string into the array pointed to by s1 No more than n wide characters are placed into the resulting array pointed to by s1 including the terminating null wide character Returns the length of the transformed wide string 6 104 Chapter 6 7 wctob include lt wchar h gt int wctob wint t c Determines whether c corresponds to a member of the extended character set whose multi byte character representation is a single byte when in the initial shift state Returns EOF if c does not correspond to a multi byte character
48. same as OABCDEFGHJ KLMNOPQRSTUVWxX no optimization O1 same as OABcdEFghjkLmnopQrS UVwxX default 02 same as OaBcdEFghjkLmnopQrS UVwx size 03 same as OaBcdEfghjklmnopQrS UVwx speed t for Mm M1 Mh T for Mt Ms Example To optimize for code size enter c166 02 test c 4 44 Chapter 4 Oa 0A Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Relax all alias checking fee Oa OA Pragma noalias alias Default OA Description With Oa you relax alias checking If you specify this option c166 will not erase remembered register contents of user variables if a write operation is done via an indirect calculated address You must be sure this is not done in your C code check pointers before turning on this option With OA you specify strict alias checking If you specify this option the compiler erases all register contents of user variables when a write operation is done via an indirect calculated address Example An example is given in section 4 6 Alias in this chapter d Pragmas noalias and alias in section 4 5 Pragmas Compiler Use 4 45 Ob OB Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Allocation of Variables Enable or disable the Perform clearing of of no
49. select Project Options Expand the Application entry and select Memory Model Select the Medium or Large memory model Expand the C Compiler entry and select Allocation of Variable Enter a name in the Near data group name field E Ggroupname Arguments The name for a group of near data sections Description With this option you can specify a name for a group of near data sections This option can only be used in the medium and large memory model See sections 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge and 3 12 Interrupt for more details 4 30 Chapter 4 g Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Enable the Generate high level language debug infomation check box Optionally enable one or more of the other check boxes E gp f 1 s Description Add directives to the output files incorporating symbolic information to facilitate high level debugging Note using g may turn off some peephole optimizations With gb bit type information and pointer behavior description is omitted for compatibility with old IEEE 695 consuming tools With gf high level language type information is also emitted for types which are not referenced by variables Therefore this suboption is not recommended With gl you disable lifetime information for all types With gs user stack adjustment information is omitted for compatibility
50. size t n Copies n words from far data pointed by src to huge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for far data 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcpfnb include lt string h gt void memcpfnb void near dest void far src size t n Copies n bytes from far data pointed by sre to near data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap and page boundaries are not checked 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpfnw include lt string h gt void memcpfnw void near dest void far src size t n Copies n words from far data pointed by src to near data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap and page boundaries are not checked 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing 6 58 Chapter 6 7 memcpfsb include lt string h gt void memcpfsb void shuge dest void far src size t n Copies n bytes from far data pointed by sre to shuge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for far data 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpfsw include lt string h gt void memcpfsw void shuge dest void far src size t n Copies n words from far data pointed by src to shuge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but n
51. stack and public data The public extern variables are solved at the link stage of 1166 In practice it is in a lot of cases possible to share code and data between several tasks or interrupt functions The following ways exist to do this define code or data to be shared to COMMON In this case the common section must be linked with each task needing access to the shared data code The COMMON section attribute tells the locator to overlay the section with another common section carrying the same name The module referencing the shared data of another C module uses the normal keyword extern in the declaration When using a prototype of the function is enough Similar to the normal C rules the extern keyword may be omitted with functions This approach is used by the C library where a number of standard C functions such as strlen and isdigit are allocated in common sections The ROM table used by lt ctype h gt functions is allocated in a common data section Therefore the C library must be linked with each task The combine type of a section can be changed in two ways Firstly a command line option R resulting in shared code and data of the complete C module Secondly via a pragma allowing some data or code of a C module to be shared and the rest not 3 50 Chapter 3 7 Example C module is called test c The example illustrates how to declare a ROM table array as shared among several tasks and the rest
52. the order of the objects in the library file is very important To know the exact order in which the objects should be placed in the library make a list of the order in which the delivered libraries are made by using the command ar166 t c166m 1ib for example The easiest method to create your own library is to make a copy of the existing library use the library in the same memory model you want to create and replace the existing objects in it by your own made objects with the command ar166 crv libname objectname This way the order of the objects in the library will be maintained At link time you only have to link the newly made library to your application instead of a delivered library You can rebuild your library with mk166 To use the correct makefile first make sure you are in the directory of the library you want to rebuild lib sre architecture library Windows or lib sre architecture library UNIX Use mk166 to rebuild your library now You may want to make a backup copy of the original library first 6 112 LIBRARIES Chapter 6 RUN TIME ENVIRONMENT all TASKING M ddaLdVH Run time Environment 7 3 7 1_ STARTUP CODE When linking Task Concept or locating Flat Interrupt Concept the module containing main which is an object module containing the C startup code has to be linked to the application This module called start obj is included in each C library with a s
53. void shuge dest void near src size t n Copies n bytes from near data pointed by sre to shuge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for shuge data but not for near data 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpnsw include lt string h gt void memcpnsw void shuge dest void near src size t n Copies n words from near data pointed by src to shuge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for shuge data but not for near data 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing 6 64 Chapter 6 7 memcpsfb include lt string h gt void memcpsfb void far dest void shuge src size t n Copies n bytes from shuge data pointed by src to far data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for shuge data but not checked for far data 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpsfw include lt string h gt void memcpsfw void far dest void shuge src size t n Copies n words from shuge data pointed by src to far data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for shuge data but not checked for far data 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcpshb include lt string h gt void memcpshb void huge dest void shuge src size t n Copies n bytes from shuge data pointed by src to huge data pointed
54. 0 error int i int i 0 error Compiler Diagnostics 5 21 W 130 operands of operator are pointers to different types Pointer operands of an operator or assignment must have the same type For example the following code generates this warning long pl int pi 0 pl pi warning E 131 bad operand type s of operator The operator needs an operand of another type The following is an example of this error int pi pi 1 error pointer on left needs integral value on right W 132 value of variable name is undefined This warning occurs if a variable is used before it is defined For example the following code generates this warning int a b a b warning value of b unknown E 133 illegal struct union member type A function cannot be a member of a struct or union Also bit fields may only have type int or unsigned E 134 bitfield size out of range set to 1 The bit field width may not be greater than the number of bits in the type and may not be negative The following example generates this error struct i unsigned i 999 error W 135 statement not reached The specified statement will never be executed This is for example the case when statements are present after a return E 138 illegal function call You cannot perform a function call on an object that is not a function The following example generates this error int i j j i error i is not
55. 29 bad Ainclude syntax A include must be followed by a valid header name syntax For example include lt stdio h misses the closing gt E 30 include file file not found Be sure you have specified an existing include file after a include directive Make sure you have specified the correct path for the file E 31 end of file encountered inside comment The compiler found the end of a file while scanning a comment Probably a comment was not terminated Do not forget a closing comment when using ANSI C style comments E 32 argument mismatch for macro name The number of arguments in invocation of a function like macro must agree with the number of parameters in the definition Also invocation of a function like macro requires a terminating token The following are examples of this error define A a 1 int i A 1 2 error define B b 1 int j B 1 error E 33 name redefined The given identifier was defined more than once or a subsequent declaration differed from a previous one The following examples generate this error int i char i error main 5 10 W Chapter 5 main int j int j error 34 illegal redefinition of macro name A macro can be redefined only if the body of the redefined macro is exactly the same as the body of the originally defined macro This warning can be caused by defining a
56. 3 41 _atbit attribute 3 43 _atomic 3 123 _bfld 3 119 Index 4 Index 7 _C166 3 62 _fstrepy 6 11 _close 6 10 _fstrespn 6 11 _CoABS 3 107 _fstrlen 6 11 _CoADD 3 108 _fstrneat 6 12 _CoADD2 3 108 _fstrncmp 6 12 _CoASHR 3 108 _fstrncpy 6 12 _CoCMP 3 109 _fstrpbrk 6 13 _CoLOAD 3 109 _fstrrchr 6 13 _CoLOAD2 3 109 _fstrspn 6 13 _CoMAC 3 110 _fstrstr 6 13 _CoMAC_ min 3 111 _fstrtok 6 14 _CoMACsu 3 110 _getbit 3 120 _CoMACsu_min 3 111 _hstreat 6 14 _CoMACu 3 110 _hstrchr 6 14 _CoMACu_min 3 111 _hstremp 6 14 _CoMAX 3 112 _hstrepy 6 15 _CoMIN 3 112 _hstrespn 6 15 _CoMUL 3 112 _hstrlen 6 15 _CoMULsu 3 113 _hstrnceat 6 15 _CoMULu 3 113 _hstrncmp 6 16 _CoNEG 3 113 _hstrnepy 6 16 _CoNOP 3 114 _hstrpbrk 6 16 _CoRND 3 114 _hstrrchr 6 16 _CoSHL 3 114 _hstrspn 6 17 _CoSHR 3 115 _hstrstr 6 17 _CoSTORE 3 115 _hstrtok 6 17 CoSTOREMAH 3 115 _idle 3 121 _CoSTOREMAL 3 116 _inline 3 44 _CoSTOREMAS 3 116 _int166 3 120 _CoSTOREMSW 3 116 _lseek 6 17 CoSUB 3 117 _mkfp 3 127 CoSUB2 3 117 mkhp 3 128 CPU 7 5 _mksp 3 128 _CPUTYPE 3 62 _mod32 3 125 _diswdt 3 123 _MODEL 3 18 3 62 _div32 3 124 _modu32 3 125 divu32 3 124 _mul32 3 124 DOUBLE FP 3 62 _mulu32 3 124 _einit 3 123 _noalign 3 45 _EXT2 7 5 _nop 3 121 _fstreat 6 10 _nousm function qualifier 3 28 _fstrchr 6 10 _open 6 18 _fstremp 6 11 _ packed 3 46 Index Index 5 _pag 3 126 _pof 3 126
57. 37 freopen include lt stdio h gt FILE freopen const char filename const char mode FILE stream Opens a file for a given mode associates the stream with it This function is normally used to change the files associated with stdin stdout or stderr db See also fopen0 Returns stream or NULL on error Srexp include lt math h gt double frexp double x int exp Splits x into a normalized fraction in the interval 1 2 1 gt which is returned and a power of 2 which is stored in exp If x is zero both parts of the result are zero For example frexp 4 0 amp var_ results in 0 5 23 The function returns 0 5 and 3 is stored in var Returns the normalized fraction JSscanf include lt stdio h gt int fscanf FILE stream const char format Performs a formatted read from the given stream d See also scanf0 and readQ Returns the number of items converted successfully 6 38 Chapter 6 7 fseek include lt stdio h gt int fseek FILE stream long offset int origin Sets the file position indicator for stream A subsequent read or write will access data beginning at the new position For a binary file the position is set to offset characters from origin which may be SEEK SET for the beginning of the file SEEK CUR for the current position in the file or SEEK _END for the end of file For a text stream offset must be zero or a value returned by fte1l1
58. 4 47 Od OD Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Constant and copy propagation E od OD Default Od Description With Od you enable constant and copy propagation With this option the compiler tries to find assignments of constant values to a variable a subsequent assignment of the variable to another variable can be replaced by the constant value With OD you disable constant and copy propagation Example Compile with OD 00 i is actually assigned to j Compile with Od 00 15 is assigned to j i was propagated int i int j void main void 4 48 Chapter 4 Oe OE Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Allocation of Variables Enable or disable the Allocate constant ROM data in near memory check box Oe OE Default OE Description With Oe you enable allocation of constant romdata CROM in paged data sections PDAT This option is explained in section 3 2 5 Constant Romdata Section Allocation With OE standard allocation of constant romdata CROM in linear data sections LDAT is done These options only affect the code generation and section allocation in the small memory model d Section 3 2 5 Constant
59. 7 2 Expand the Application entry and select Startup 3 Enable the check box Generate system startup code and add it to project 4 Specify the filename in the Startup code file name field 5 Click OK After this multiple startup code files may be present in your project 6 Manually remove the obsolete startup code files from the project You can control the contents of the generated startup code from the Startup entry in the Project Options dialog From the subentries under Startup you can specify the registers and their settings that must be known to the startup code enable the Include in startup code check box for the register settings you want to add to the startup code EDE automatically generates the register initializations in the startup code Startup code and the command line When you are not using EDE you must use m166 before a166 when a new version of the object file has to be created m166 start asm DEFINE MODEL LARGE al66 start noprint You must specify the memory model for the preprocessing phase Therefore you have to define the preprocessor symbol MODEL You can do this with the m166 command line control DEFINE by defining the memory model you are using When preprocessing the startup file MODEL is checked to select skip or include certain pieces of code The new start obj can be supplied to 1166 when linking the module containing main 1166 will use this object instead of the object from the library
60. 79 suspend_align32 4 89 switch optimization 2 7 4 61 switch statement 3 86 3 87 switch_force_table 3 86 4 96 switch_smart 3 86 4 97 switch_tabmem_default 3 39 4 97 switch_tabmem_far 3 39 3 86 4 97 switch_tabmem_near 3 39 4 97 swprintf 6 89 swscanf 6 90 system 3 20 3 26 system stack 7 8 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 for task switch 4 63 4 05 system stack registers 7 6 T tan 6 90 tanh 6 90 target processors 2 4 task scope 3 49 3 52 task switch 4 63 4 65 temporary files setting directory 1 7 tentative declarations 3 21 4 62 threshold 3 21 4 76 time 6 90 time h 6 8 6 9 _stime 6 18 _tzset 6 23 asctime 6 24 clock 6 28 ctime 6 29 difftime 6 30 gmtime 6 42 localtime 6 50 mktime 6 67 sirftime 6 85 time 6 90 tiny model 3 23 tmpfile 6 91 tmpnam 6 91 toascii 6 91 tolower 6 92 toupper 6 92 towctrans 6 92 Index 22 7 towlower 6 92 towupper 6 93 trap 3 98 trap routine 3 98 trap obj 3 97 trial mode 1 9 U unaligned data 3 45 ungetc 6 93 ungetwc 6 93 unistd h 6 8 access 6 24 chdir 6 28 close 6 29 fstat 6 38 getcwd 6 41 Istat 6 51 read 6 74 stat 6 83 unlink 6 93 write 6 107 unlink 6 93 unsigned char 3 53 int 3 53 long 3 53 short 3 53 updating makefile 2 20 user defined intrinsics 3 129 user stack 3 64 7 8 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 7 D 8 for task switch 4 63 4 05 user stack model 4 68 4 74 D 9 special library 3 28 use
61. 9 isgraph include lt ctype h gt int isgraph int c Returns a non zero value when c is printable but not a space isinf include lt float h gt int isinf double d IEEE 754 1985 recommended function Test the given variable on being an infinite IEEE 754 value Returns zero if the variable is not infinite else non zero isinff include lt float h gt int isinff float f IEEE 754 1985 Recommended function Test the given variable on being an infinite IEEE 754 value Returns zero if the variable is not infinite else non zero islower include lt ctype h gt int islower int c Returns a non zero value when c is a lowercase character a z 6 46 Chapter 6 7 isnan include lt float h gt int isnan double d IEEE 754 1985 recommended function Test the given variable on being a NaN Not a Number IEEE 754 value Returns zero if the variable is not NaN else non zero isnanf include lt float h gt int isnanf float f IEEE 754 1985 Recommended function Test the given variable on being a NaN Not a Number IEEE 754 value Returns zero if the variable is not NaN else non zero isprint include lt ctype h gt int isprint int c Returns a non zero value when c is printable including spaces ispunct include lt ctype h gt int ispunct int c Returns a non zero value when c is a punctuation character such as 20 etea iss pace include lt
62. CODE_PAGE Now you can actually call the banked function indirectly using the run time library function __icall The inter segment address of the banked function is passed in registers R4 and R5 to __icall The code bank number of the currently active code bank is pushed on the user stack and afterwards removed from it by the function calling the bank switch function It is not possible to save the current code bank number on the user stack at function entry of the bank switch function because this affects the user stack pointer introducing a conflict with precalculated offsets for C function parameters and automatics When code execution returns from the banked function this code bank number is read from the user stack and when needed the previous code bank is reactivated by calling __pgbk again This allows you to call a banked function from a banked function in a different code bank You can use the skeleton bankswh asm in the bank subdirectory of the examples directory as a starting point to implement your hardware implementation of bank switching In this case you only have to replace the code from __ pgbk with your own code actually performing the hardware bank switch It is obvious that your hardware bank switch approach is not limited to the size of a page Restriction When a banked function e g f1 calls a non banked function e g f2 which on its turn calls a banked function in another bank e g f3 the original bank is n
63. Character Scanned as p pointer interpreted as a hexadecimal number must be prefixed with lt near gt lt far gt or lt huge gt For the different pointer types the following formats are expected lt near gt 0000 lt far gt PPPP 0000 lt huge gt SS 0000 where o is offset P is page s is segment Matches a string of input characters from the set be tween the brackets A NULL character is added to terminate the string Specifying includes the character in the set of scanning characters sd Matches a string of input characters not in the set between the brackets A NULL character is added to terminate the string Specifying includes the character in the set Literal no assignment is done Table 6 2 Scanf conversion characters The p conversion character can be used to read pointers In the tiny and small memory models pointers will be read as near pointers by default In the medium and large memory models pointers will be read as far pointers by default By specifying one of the length modifiers h T or T a pointer will always be read as near far or huge respectively Two different version of the formatter _doscan c are delivered The LARGE version is able to scan everything as specified above The SMALL version has no floating point scanning When a floating point conversion character is found errno is filled with the correct
64. DPP1 This memory space shares DPP1 with the user stack hence xnear data user stack lt 16K Use the _xnear keyword near data lt 16K 16K per task of fast accessible user data anywhere in 256K 16M via default data group Automatically utilized by c166 The keywords near systemand_iram also allow explicit user manipulation huge data allowed supports huge data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single huge object is not limited to 16K 24 bit address arithmetic Huge data access is less fast than normal data access Size of one struct lt 64K Array of struct any type gt 64K shuge data allowed supports shuge data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single shuge object is limited to 64K 16 bit address arithmetic Shuge data access is as fast as huge data but arithmetic on shuge addresses is faster Table 3 6 Large memory model Language Implementation 3 17 3 2 1 5 HUGE MEMORY MODEL The compiler does not assume the CSP register to contain something valid Each call results in a far inter segment code access unless the _near keyword is used explicitly in the function prototype Therefore this model allows code access in all segments up to 16M All data accesses are huge The four DPP registers do not contain the system startup values The DPP registers are used to access the 16M of explicitely far data Because all accesses are huge by default da
65. ID and section 1 4 6 How to Determine the Host Name When you order a TASKING product provide the host ID host name and number of users to your local TASKING sales representative The license key will be sent to you by E mail 1 4 2 INSTALLING NODE LOCKED LICENSES 2 If you do not have received your license key read section 1 4 1 Obtaining License Information before continuing Install the TASKING software product following the installation procedure described in section 1 2 1 Installation for Windows if you have not done this already Create a license file by importing a license key or create one manually Import a license key During installation you will be asked to run the License Administrator Otherwise start the License Administrator dicadmin exe manually Software Installation 1 11 In the License Administrator follow the steps to Import a license key received from Altium by E mail The License Administrator creates a license file for you Create a license file manually If you prefer to create a license file manually create a file called license dat in the c flex1m directory using an ASCII editor and insert the license key information received by E mail in this file This file is called the license file If the directory c flex1m does not exist create the directory 1 4 4 Modifying the License File Location If you already have a license file add the license key information to the
66. In the Variable name field enter C166INC 5 In the Variable value field enter c c166 include 6 Click on the OK button to accept the changes and close the dialogs Example for Solaris Enter the following line C shell setenv C166INC usr local cl166 include Software Installation 1 9 1 4 LICENSING TASKING PRODUCTS TASKING products are protected with license management software FLEXIm To use a TASKING product you must install the license key provided by Altium for the type of license purchased You can run TASKING products with a node locked license with a floating license or in trial mode When you order a TASKING product determine which type of license you need Solaris products only have a floating license Node locked license PC only This license type locks the software to one specific PC so you can use the product on that particular PC only Floating license This license type manages the use of TASKING product licenses among users at one site This license type does not lock the software to one specific PC or workstation but it requires a network The software can then be used on any computer in the network The license specifies the number of users who can use the software simultaneously A system allocating floating licenses is called a license server A license manager running on the license server keeps track of the number of users Trial mode When you use the product without a valid license the
67. In this case origin must be SEEK SET Returns zero if successful a non zero value on error Jfsetpos include lt stdio h gt int fsetpos FILE stream const fpos_t ptr Positions stream at the position recorded by fgetpos in ptr Returns zero if successful a non zero value on error Sstat include lt unistd h gt int fstat int fd struct stat buf This function is identical to stat except that it uses a file descriptor instead of a name Returns zero if successful 1 on error Libraries 6 39 Stell include lt stdio h gt long ftell FILE stream Returns the current file position for stream or 1L on error fwide include lt wchar h gt int fwide FILE stream int mode Determines the orientation of the stream If mode is greater than zero the function first attempts to make the stream wide oriented If mode is less than zero the function first attempts to make the stream byte oriented Otherwise mode is zero and the function does not alter the orientation of the stream Returns a value greater than zero if after the call the stream has wide orientation a value less than zero if the stream has byte orientation or zero if the stream has no orientation Swprintf include lt wchar h gt int fwprintf FILE stream const wchar t format Writes output to the given stream under control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments a
68. Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the Application entry and select Memory Model Enable the Use user stack for return addresses check box E rid Description Enable user stack model See section 3 2 2 User Stack Model for details Requires linking with user stack model library unless Pd is specified d Appendix D User Stack Model Compiler Use 4 69 Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option to the Additional options field Ea Ricl co alynem new Pragma class combine align Arguments mem is a two letter abbreviation indicating the memory area of a C program mem can be one of mem Description BI bits co strings floating point BA bitwords NB near data FB far data XB shuge data HB huge data PR functions SB system data IR internal ramdata Table 4 6 Memory spaces new is the new class name combine type or align type for mem Description The compiler defaults to a section naming convention as described in the section 3 2 3 Section Allocation With this option you can change the class name combine type or align type of a compiler generated section for mem 4 70 Chapter 4 In case a module must be loaded at a fixed address or a data section needs a special place in memory the R option enables you to generate a u
69. Returns lt Oifes lt ct 0 ifes ct gt 0 ifcs gt ct _Sfstrcepy include lt string h gt char far fstrcepy char far s const char far ct Copies far string ct into the far string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s _fstrcspn include lt string h gt size_t _fstrcspn const char far cs const char far ct Returns the length of the prefix in far string cs consisting of characters not in the far string ct _fstrlen include lt string h gt size t _fstrlen const char far cs Returns the length of the far string in cs not counting the NULL character 6 12 Chapter 6 7 _fstrncat include lt string h gt char far fstrncat char far s const char far ct size tn Concatenates far string ct to far string s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character Returns s _fstrncmp include lt string h gt int _fstrncmp const char far cs const char far ct size tn Compares at most n bytes of far string cs to far string ct Returns lt 0 ifcs lt ct 0 ifes ct gt 0 ifcs gt ct _Sfstrncpy include lt string h gt char far fstrncpy char far s const char far ct size tn Copies far string ct onto the far string s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character if the string is smaller than n characters Returns s Libraries 6 13 _fstrpbrk include lt string h gt char far fstrpbrk
70. Romdata Section Allocation Pragmas switch_tabmem_far switch_tabmem_near and switch_tabmem default in section 4 5 Pragmas Compiler Use 4 49 Of OF Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Favor code size above execution speed E of OF Pragma speed size Default OF Description With Of you produce fast code Favour execution speed above code density Note that this option may increase code size With OF you produce small code Favour code density above execution speed If OF is specified c166 calls a run time library routine for a number of operations d Pragmas speed and size in section 4 5 Pragmas 4 50 Chapter 4 Og OG Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Code recognition to generate optimal code for expressions E Og OG Default Og Description With Og you enable expression recognition Expressions for which very efficient code can be generated are recognized and optimal code is emitted With OG you disable expression recognition Handle expressions that could be recognized using the Og option as generic cases Compiler Use 4 51 Oh OH Option Q From the Proje
71. SMALL mov R12 __FP_ENV R12 passes environment address buffer to longjmp R13 passes trap code to longjmp see Ne mov R13 fptrap IF FPEXC_OP mov R14 fpexcop R14 passes exception operation ENDI ELSE mov R12 POF __FP_ENV R12 R13 passes environment address mov R13 PAG __FP_ENV buffer to longjmp mov R14 fptrap R14 passes trap code to longjmp IF FPEXC_OP mov R15 fpexcop R15 passes exception operation ENDI ENDI restore environment loaded in the environment buffer _FP_ENV and return the trap code by calling longjmp IF EQS MODEL TINY EQS MODEL MEDIUM jmpa cc_UC _longjmp ELSE STBUS1 _longjmp ENDI loop infinite if no environment set to return to ___FPTRAPLOOP jmpa CC_UC __FPTRAPLOOP RETV virtual return 3 104 Chapter 3 __fptrap8 ENDP __FPCODE ENDS g Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe ER Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe He He Fe He He He data section for floating point environment buffer which is cleared at startup with C166_BSS jmp_buf _FP_ENV FERRER Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe He Fe Fe Fe Fe He Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe He Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe He Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe He Fe He Fe He RK ER IF EQS MODEL TINY EQS MODEL SMALL __FP_ENV_BUF SECTION LDAT WORD PUBLIC CNEAR
72. The C module is called intrpt c present in the examples directory The example illustrates the use of pragma regdef and shows the code the compiler emits as interrupt frame using large memory model DPPO and DPP2 saving The user stack pointer must be inherited and the multiply registers must be saved The C source and the generated code is listed below 3 84 pragma regdef 6 int stackparm ext_func int Chapter 3 MINIMIZE REGISTER USAGE to RO R5 stack parameter passing NOT R12 R15 interrupt 0x30 void int i allocate on user stack NOT R6 R9 i ext_func 3 INTRPT_1 PR SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM PROC TASK INTRPT_TASK INTNO INTRPT_INUM 030h Stack 2 MOV DPP3 INTRPT_RB R0 SCXT CP DPP3 INTRPT_RB SCXT MDC 00h PUSH DPPO PUSH DPP2 MOV DPP2 PAG C166 _DGROUP PUSH MDL PUSH MDH SUB RO 02h MOV R4 03h MOV RO R4 CALLS SEG ext func ext func ADD R0 02h MOV R0 R4 ADD R0 02h POP MDH POP MDL POP DPP2 POP DPPO POP MDC POP CP BCLR IEN RETI f ENDP INTRPT_1 PR ENDS INTRPT_RB REGDEF R0 R5 Instead of using pragma regdef 6 you can also use the command line option r6 When you use the r command line option you can also specify the register bank name to be used and whether this register bank should be COMMON or not Specifying r6 MYBANK c results into MYBANK REGDEF RO R5 COMMON MYBANK_RB Language Implementation 3 85
73. The _iram sections are limited to 2048 bytes internal RAM By default the _iram section size is limited by the compiler to 2048 bytes But you can always set your own _iram sections size limit with the m mem size compiler option e g mIR 512 See for more information section 4 3 Detailed Description of the Compiler Options _bita When using bit fields in structures that are located in bitaddressable memory the compiler can take advantage of the bit and bit field instructions of the processor You can tell the compiler that a struct must be located in bitaddressable memory by using the _bita memory qualifier Example _bita struct unsigned bf1 1 unsigned pit 2 unsigned bf2 1 S The compiler will allocate the struct in a bitaddressable section For nested structures and unions _bita can only be applied to the outer level When _bita is used for structure members the compiler ignores this Language Implementation 3 27 Example struct m int ml1 2 int m2 3 mm struct n _bita struct m nl _bita ignored struct m n2 nn Even with the _bita keyword structures will be word aligned Also the structure members are aligned as they would be without the _bita qualifier i e byte addressable members signed unsigned char are byte aligned and word addressable members such as int and pointers are word aligned The _bita keyword can also be applied to global or static variables of type char int and l
74. Workaround for this restriction Replace C statements which seems to make the inline assembly not reachable by an assembly equivalent inside the pragma asm void workaround void pragma asm jmp the_end entry assembly statements here will be emitted by cl66 the_end pragma endasm Gb See also section 7 4 Assembly Language Interfacing in the chapter Run time Environment 3 76 Chapter 3 7 The MODULE SUMMARY of c166 reporting code size and data size of the module is no longer valid if code or data has been added using inline assembly 3 12 INTERRUPT c166 supports both the Infineon Task Concept and the Flat Interrupt Concept These two concepts are explained in the chapter Software Concept of the TASKING Cross Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Manual We strongly recommend reading this section first See also section 3 3 Task Scope in this chapter In the Task Concept a Task is initiated via an interrupt or software trap The reset task is the task which defines main The system startup file start asm in assembly code delivered with the compiler initializes the processor and each task and finally calls main In the Flat Interrupt concept an interrupt is an entry point in the code The system startup code is such an entry point Defining an Interrupt Function _interruptQ With the function type qualifier interrupt you can declare a function as an interrupt funct
75. _sj R5 3 118 Chapter 3 _ror unsigned int _ror unsigned int operand unsigned int count Use the ROR instruction to rotate right operand count times Returns the result sj _ror si pi MOV R4 si ROR R4 R12 MOV _sj R4 _testclear bit _testclear _bit semaphore Read and clear semaphore using the JBC instruction Returns 0 if semaphore was not cleared by the JBC instruction 1 otherwise if _testclear b BSET USRO JBC _b 7 BCLR USRO JNB USRO 3 success semaphore b was free 1 and now used for our critical region set to 0 Note that the code of this action may be longer than 127 words g CALLA cc_UC _g b 1 end critical actions free semaphore BSET _b Language Implementation 3 119 _testset _bit _testset bit semaphore Read and set semaphore using the JNBS instruction Returns 0 if semaphore was not set by the JNBS instruction 1 otherwise if _testset b BSET USRO JNBS _b 8 BCLR USRO 8 JNB USRO _5 success semaphore b was free 0 and now used for our critical region set to 1 Note that the code of this action may be longer than 127 words g CALLA cc_UC _g b 0 end critical actions free semaphore BCLR _b _bfld void _bfld BITADDR operand ICE mask ICE value Use the BFLDL BFLDH instructions to assign the constant value to the bit field indicated by the constant mask of the bi
76. a numeric value also may be specified the value is then taken from the next argument which is assumed to be of type int A period This separates the minimum field width from the precision Libraries 6 71 A number specifying the maximum length of a string to be printed Or the number of digits printed after the decimal point only for floating point conversions Or the minimum number of digits to be printed for an integer conversion Instead of a numeric value also x may be specified the value is then taken from the next argument which is assumed to be of type int A length modifier h T or L h indicates that the argument is to be treated as a short or unsigned short number l should be used if the argument is a long integer L indicates that the argument is a long double Flags length specifier period precision and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Character Printed as d i int signed decimal o int unsigned octal x X int unsigned hexadecimal in lowercase or uppercase respectively u int unsigned decimal c int single character converted to unsigned char s char the characters from the string are printed until a NULL character is found When the given precision is met before pr
77. a shuge pointer to the first occurrence in cs of any character out of shuge string ct If none are found NULL is returned _Sstrrchr include lt string h gt char shuge _sstrrchr const char shuge cs int c Returns a shuge pointer to the last occurrence of c in the shuge string cs If not found NULL is returned _ssirspn include lt string h gt size t _sstrspn const char shuge cs const char shuge ct Returns the length of the prefix in shuge string cs consisting of characters in the shuge string ct 6 22 Chapter 6 7 _sstrstr include lt string h gt char shuge _sstrstr const char shuge cs const char shuge ct Returns a shuge pointer to the first occurrence of shuge string ct in the shuge string cs Returns NULL if not found _sstrtok include lt string h gt char shuge sstrtok char shuge s const char shuge ct Search the shuge string s for tokens delimited by characters from shuge string ct It terminates the token with a NULL character Returns a pointer to the token A subsequent call with s NULL will return the next token in the string _tolower include lt ctype h gt int _tolower int c Converts c to a lowercase character does not check if c really is an uppercase character Returns the converted character _toupper include lt ctype h gt int _toupper int c Converts c to an uppercase character does not check if c really is a lowercase chara
78. about the alignment of the struct union itself Therefore when an instance of a struct union does not need alignment you must add the _noalign attribute typedef packed struct ps char Cc offset 0 bytes int i offset 1 byte char byte offset 3 bytes tPS struct size 4 bytes tPS st3 aligned _packed structure _noalign tPS st4 not aligned _packed structure When you do not use the _noalign attribute on _packed structures the compiler can use the word copy routines for _packed struct unions AN Since the code that is generated after the _packed qualifier is less efficient use packed structures only when really needed for example for data exchange with 8 bit processors Consider in such case first other solutions like for example mapping structures on character arrays 3 48 7 Chapter 3 Bit fields in packed structures B Bit fields in a _packed struct union sometimes need alignment The following example shows such a situation _packed struct ps int bf7 7 bit offset 00 06 gap 1 bit int bf10 10 bit offset 08 17 bit offset 18 23 padding to next byte In this example there is a gap of one bit between bf7 and bf10 and the total size of the structure is 3 bytes The alignment is needed because otherwise 3 byte moves are needed in order to access all bits of b 10 In the next situation no alignment is needed _packed struct ps
79. above The pragmas switch_tabmem_far switch_tabmem_near and switch_tabmem_default can be used anywhere in the source file The location of the jump table is affected by the last pragma before a switch statement 3 40 Chapter 3 The pragmas can be passed through the command line by using the zpragma command line option The delivered small C libraries do not support constant romdata as far data because it is not commonly used All C library functions are compiled with the default option OE to allocate constant romdata CROM in linear data sections LDAT You have to re compile the C library functions which contain constant romdata CROM with the option Oe if you do not want near ROM You can rebuild the small C libraries c166s 1ib and c166ss 1lib using the makefiles in the library directories All library modules are re compiled and the libraries are rebuilt by these makefiles String constants are in _doflt c _dowflt c _doprint c _dowprin c _doscan c _dowscan c _tzone c asctime c assert h fss_init c locale c perror c raise c strerror c strftime c tmpfile c tmpnam c wcesftime c wctrans c wctype c The const keyword is in _ctype c strftime c wcsftime c Floating point constants are in _atan c _doflt c _dowflt c _fmod c _getflt c _getwflt c _sinus c _strtod c _wcstod c acos c asin c atan c atan2 c cos c cosh c exp c log c logl0 c pow c sinh c sqrt c strtod c tan
80. access near far huge or shuge objects using special declarations But also special declarations are supported by c166 to access data objects in the SYSTEM page like internal RAM data overall system data or bitaddressable memory This is done with the keywords _system _iram and _bita These special type modifiers can be used in all memory models to overcome addressing limitations for particular near data items The system iramand_bita keywords are not allowed with automatics functions and constants unless used as a target of a pointer 3 26 Chapter 3 z _system Objects declared with the keyword _system are allocated in system data sections see paragraph 3 2 3 Section Allocation The system data sections are member of the special group C166_SGROUP which is limited to the size of the SYSTEM page 16K SFRs DPP3 is ASSUMED to contain the page number of this group which is equal to the SYSTEM page number page 3 and is assigned at system startup _iram Objects declared with the keyword _iram are allocated in IRAMADDRESSABLE data sections see paragraph 3 2 3 Section Allocation The locator places IRAMADDRESSABLE sections in the internal RAM of the C166 ST10 Addressing of _iram objects is exactly the same as addressing system objects because the internal RAM is located in the SYSTEM page Both _iram and _system are addressed via the SYSTEM data page pointer DPP3 which is assigned to the system page at system startup
81. accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoMULsu argl arg2 CoMULSu R12 R13 _CoMULu void _CoMULu unsigned int x unsigned int y Use the CoMULu instruction to store the multiplication result of two unsigned 16 bit values in the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoMULu argl arg2 CoMULu R12 R13 _CoNEG void _CoNEG void Use the CoNEG instruction to change the MAC accumulator s contents to its negated value Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoNEG CoNEG 3 114 Chapter 3 7 _CoNOP void _CoNOP void A CoNOP instruction is generated Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoNOP CoNOP RO _CoRND void _CoORND void Use the CoRND semi instruction to change the MAC accumulator s contents to its rounded value Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoRND CORND _CoSHL void _CoSHL unsigned int count Use the CoSHL instruction to shift left the contents of the MAC accumulator count times Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the
82. all static functions as near functions because they are always allocated in the same code section as the functions they are called by You cannot apply the _far keyword to functions medium model In this model near data means data allocated into a special page for fast access See section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge for more details on the default data group Address arithmetic on near and far data is always 14 bit As in the small model huge and shuge data access is supported This model also supports xnear data This data is allocated together with the user stack in DPP1 The access to this memory space is just as fast as to near data Address arithmetic on _xnear data is done in 14 bits See section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge for more details on the C166_XGROUP data group 3 24 Chapter 3 All function calls are assumed to be in the same first segment of 64K However an inter segment call is supported via a huge function the keyword _huge must be present in the function prototype The _huge function may not call any standard C library function run time library or any normal near function in another segment You cannot apply the _far keyword to functions large huge model In these models near data means data allocated into a special page for fast access See section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge
83. always reached c atl while c unsigned char atl This code is never reached Keep in mind that the arithmetic conversions apply to multiplications also static int h i j static long k 1 m In C the following rules apply int int result int A long long result long and NOT int int result long Language Implementation 3 57 void f h i j int int int k 1 m long long long l i j int int int afterwards promoted sign or zero extended to long 1 long i j long long long 1 long i j int int int afterwards casted to long 3 4 2 CHARACTER ARITHMETIC c166 generates code using 8 bit character arithmetic as long as the result of the expression is exactly the same as if it was evaluated using integer arithmetic This approach increases code density and execution speed when character typed variables are used of course In strict ANSI C character arithmetic does not exist all character variables are converted to integer before the operation is performed However if the integer result is not used e g by assigning it to a character variable the operation could have been evaluated using character arithmetic giving the same result This is how c166 works There is one exception to this rule dealing with the sizeof operator char a b int i void main i sizeof A
84. are used by the monitor 00000h 40000h 40200h OFCEOh OFA00h 079FFh 401FFh 415FFh OFCFFh OFA3Fh monitor code monitor vector table monitor data register bank system stack You should use the 1166 RESERVE MEMORY locator control to prevent the locator from locating sections in these regions For example RE ME ME ME ME 00000hTO 079FFh 40000hTO 401FFh 40200hTO 415FFh OFCEOhTO OFCFFh ss estart x orl asm uses SSKDEF 0 256 words by default and initializes SP to the top of the system stack OFBFF So there is no conflict with the system stack area of the monitor e Inthe start asm file the EVA symbol must be enabled set to 1 e The TASKING ieee166 converter must be used to generate an IEEE 695 output file from the absolute located output file The Hitex SP166TA filter program is needed to translate this IEEE 695 file into Hitex format e Bit variables bitword variables and bit fields are supported by HiTOP but not when using HiTOP with a telemon Debug Environment B 7 4 PLS FAST VIEW66 When using the fast view66 debugger the following operation remarks exist e Use the g compiler option to generate debug information for use with fast view66 e Fast view66 supports all C C language debug information generated by c166 cp166 e You can use the absolute output file format locator output file for download to the C166 ST10 target hardware Appendix B
85. assembly source file from the file with suffix c The suffix of this file is sre which is the default for a166 However you can direct the output to stdout with the n option or to another file with the o option C source lines can be intermixed with the generated assembly statements by means of the s option High level language debugging information can be generated with the g option You should not use the g option when inspecting the generated assembly source code because it contains a lot of unreadable high level language debug directives C166 makes only one pass on every file This pass checks the syntax generates the code and performs a code optimization The a166 cross assembler which processes the generated assembly source file into a relocatable object file with suffix obj A full assembly listing with suffix 1st is available after this stage The 1166 link stage which links the generated relocatable object files and C libraries The result is a relocatable link file with suffix lno A linker task map file with suffix 1n1 is available after this stage The 1166 locate stage which locates the generated relocatable object files from assembler or link stage The result is a loadable file with suffix out A full application map file with suffix map is available after this stage The ieee166 program which formats an a out type file into a CrossView Pro load file The next figure explains the relationship between
86. bit value The returned value is a copy of the MSW register Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns copy of MSW register isequal _CoCMP argl amp 0x0200 CoCMP R12 R13 CoSTORE R4 MSW AND R4 0200h _CoLOAD void _CoLOAD long x Use the CoLOAD instruction to copy a 32 bit value to the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoLOAD argl CoLOAD R12 R13 _CoLOAD2 void _CoLOAD2 long x Use the CoLOAD2 instruction to copy a 32 bit value multiplied by two to the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoLOAD2 argl CoLOAD2 R12 R13 3 109 3 110 Chapter 3 7 _CoMAC void _CoMAC int x int y Use the CoMAC instruction to add the multiplication result of two signed 16 bit values to the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd Note that the MP flag influences the result it is highly recommended to keep the MP flag cleared Returns nothing _CoMAC argl arg2 CoMAC R12 R13 _CoMACsu void _CoMACsu int x unsigned int y Use the CoMACsu instruction to add the multiplication result of a signed 16 bit value with an unsigned 16 bit value to the MAC accumulator Only available
87. by default In this model a huge pointer is returned allowing allocation of objects larger than 64K in fact as large as the total heap Run time Environment It is possible to use various flavours of the memory allocation routines The following table shows the available variants and indicates in which model these variants are used by default Routine variant Pointer type Used by default in Size nmalloc _near tiny small lt 64kB ncalloc nrealloc nfree fmalloc _far medium large lt 16kB fealloc frealloc ffree smalloc _shuge lt 64kB scalloc srealloc sfree hmalloc _huge huge lt 16MB hcalloc hrealloc hfree Please note that the non near variants of the memory allocation routines all use the same heap stack C166_FHEAP and are in the same source module Use of the fmalloc routine will therefore automatically include support for the smalloc and hmalloc routines 7 12 Chapter 7 7 7 4 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE INTERFACING Assembly language functions can be called from C and vice versa The names used by c166 are case sensitive so you must specify a166 to act case sensitive too using the CASE control e166 adds an underscore for the name of public C variables to distinguish these names from the C166 ST10 registers So any names used or defined in C for the C166 ST10 must have a leading underscore in assembly code In section 3 15 Register Usage of the chapter Language
88. c tanh c wcestod c Before running these makefile you should have rights to write to the library files c166s 1ib and cl66ss 1lib Restriction When the pragma initeram or pragma initiram is used only the last pragma in the source file affects the section attributes of the near ram data sections for string and floating point constants Language Implementation 3 41 3 2 6 THE AT ATTRIBUTE In 166 it is possible to locate a global variable at a specified address This can be done with the _at attribute The syntax is _at address where address is the location in memory of the variable In the tiny memory model the address is limited to 64Kbytes In all other models the address space of the used device is the limit The _at attribute can only be used on non initialized global variables Variables which are declared constant using the const modifier can be initialized and they will be placed in a rom section Depending on the memory modifier this will be near far huge or shugerom If a variable meets the autobita or autobitastruct pragma requirements and the _at keyword is specified the _at attribute overrules the autobita autobitastruct pragmas The _at attribute has no effect on variables which are declared extern In the segmented memory models variables which have the _at attribute are not moved automatically to near memory However you can explicitly specify an absolute variable to be
89. command produces the following output c166 sieve c o sieve src e g al66 sieve src TO sieve obj NOPR 1166 LNK TO sieve lno sieve obj ext cl66s lib ext fpl66s lib ext rt166s lib 1166 LOC TO sieve out sieve lno ieeel66 sieve out sieve abs As you can see if you use the tmp option the assembly source files and linker output file will be created in your current directory also Of course you will get the same result if you invoke the tools separately using the same calling scheme as the control program As you can see the control program automatically calls each tool with the correct options and controls 2 10 2 USING THE SEPARATE PROGRAMS If you want to call each tool separately instead of using the control program you can issue the following commands steps 3 7 replace step 3 of the previous section Compile the module c166 s g t sieve c The s option puts the C source text as comments into the output assembly source file sieve src The other options are the same as explained by the invocation of the control program 4 Assemble the module al66 sieve Overview 2 27 The suffix src is default and may therefore be omitted The assembler produces a relocatable object file called sieve obj and a list file called sieve lst If you want to build a complete C166 ST10 executable application the module containing the C function main is treated like a reset task and therefore must be linked with
90. const wchar_t format Is equivalent to fwprintf except that the output is written to stdout instead of a stream Returns the number of wide characters transmitted or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred Libraries 6 107 wscanf include lt wchar h gt int wscanf const wchar_t format Is equivalent to fwscanf except that the input is obtained from stdin Returns the number of input items assigned or EOF on error write include lt unistd h gt size_t write int fd char buffer size_t count Write a sequence of characters to a file This function calls _ write Gb See also _writeQ 6 108 Chapter 6 7 6 7 CAN LIBRARY INTERFACE DESCRIPTION check_busoff_16x include lt can_ext h gt unsigned char check busoff_16x void Check if a bus off situation has occurred and recover from bus off Returns one if CAN controller was in bus off state zero otherwise check_mo_16x include lt can_ext h gt unsigned char check _mo_16x unsigned char nr Check for new data in a message object Returns one if the specified message object contains new date zero otherwise check_mo15_16x include lt can_ext h gt unsigned char check mol5 16x void Check for new data or remote frame in message object 15 Returns one if message object 15 contains new data zero otherwise def_mo_16x include lt can_ext h gt void def_ mo _16x unsigned char
91. cs int c size tn Checks the first n bytes of cs on the occurrence of character c Returns NULL when not found otherwise a pointer to the found character is returned memcmp include lt string h gt int memcmp const void cs const void ct size tn Compares the first n bytes of cs with the contents of ct Returns a value lt 0 if cs lt ct Oifes ct ora value gt 0 if cs gt ct 6 56 Chapter 6 7 memcpffb include lt string h gt void memcpffb void far dest void far src size t n Copies n bytes from far data pointed by src to far data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap and page boundaries are not checked 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpffw include lt string h gt void memcpffw void far dest void far src size t n Copies n words from far data pointed by src to far data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap and page boundaries are not checked 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcpfhb include lt string h gt void memcpfhb void huge dest void far src size t n Copies n bytes from far data pointed by src to huge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for far data 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing Libraries 6 57 memcpfhw include lt string h gt void memcpfhw void huge dest void far src
92. ctype h gt int isspace int c Returns a non zero value when c is a space type character space tab vertical tab formfeed linefeed carriage return Libraries 6 47 isupper include lt ctype h gt int isupper wint_t we Returns a non zero value when c is an uppercase character A Z iswalnum include lt wctype h gt int iswalnum wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is an alphabetic wide character or a number A Z a z 0 9 iswalpha include lt wctype h gt int iswalpha wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is an alphabetic wide character A Z a z iswentrl include lt wctype h gt int iswentrl wint t we Returns a non zero value when we is a control wide character iswctype include lt wctype h gt int iswctype wint_t wc wctype _t desc Returns a non zero value true if and only if the value of the wide character we has the property described by desc For example the function iswalnum wc is the same as specifying iswctype wc wctype alnum 6 48 Chapter 6 7 iswdigit include lt wctype h gt int iswdigit wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is a numeric character 0 9 iswgraph include lt wctype h gt int iswgraph wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is printable but not a space iswlower include lt wctype h gt int iswlower wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is a lowercase
93. customizing the heap size see section 7 3 Heap Size By default no heap is allocated Returns a pointer to space in external memory of size bytes length NULL if there is not enough space left mblen include lt stdlib h gt int mblen const char s size tn Determines the number of bytes comprising the multi byte character pointed to by s if s is not a null pointer Except that the shift state is not affected At most n characters will be examined starting at the character pointed to by s Returns the number of bytes or 0 if s points to the null character or 1 if the bytes do not form a valid multi byte character mbrlen include lt wchar h gt size_t mbrlen const char s size t n mbstate_t ps Is equivalent to the call mbrtowc NULL s n ps NULL ps amp internal where internal is the mbstate_t object for the mbrlen function except that the expression designated by ps is evaluated only once Returns a value between zero and n inclusive size_t 2 or size _t 1 Libraries 6 53 mbrtowc include lt wchar h gt size_t mbrtowc wchar_t pwc const char s size_t n mbstate t ps Inspects at most n bytes beginning with the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next multi byte character including any shift sequences If the function determines that the next multi byte character is complete and valid it determines the value of the corre
94. divided by denom localeconv include lt locale h gt struct lconv localeconv void Sets the components of an object with type struct lconv with values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities according to the rules of the current locale Returns a pointer to the filled in object localtime include lt time h gt struct tm localtime const time t tp Converts the calender time tp into local time Returns a structure representing the local time Libraries 6 51 log include lt math h gt double log double x Returns the natural logarithm 1n x x gt 0 log10 include lt math h gt double logl0 double x Returns the base 10 logarithm 1og10 x x gt 0 longjmp include lt setjmp h gt void longjmp jmp buf env int val Restores the environment previously saved with a call to settmpQ The function calling the corresponding call to setimpQ may not be terminated yet The value of val may not be zero Returns nothing lstat include lt unistd h gt int lstat const char name struct stat buf This function is identical to stat except in the case of a symbolic link where the link itself is stat ed not the file that it refers to Returns zero if successful 1 on error 6 52 Chapter 6 malloc include lt stdlib h gt void malloc size_t size The allocated space is not initialized The maximum space that can be allocated can be changed by
95. error condition in the floating point trap handler and then continuing the floating point operation will result in most cases in a new error condition or unpredictable result So this is not a good solution to handle floating point error situations It is better to stop immediately the floating point operation which causes the floating point trap by returning back to your application and there decide what to do with the floating point error condition Therefore you have to predefine an environment in your application to return to Simply jumping back is not possible because the system stack and user stack are then corrupted The floating point trap code must also be returned to the application to examine the cause of the trap An environment to return to in an application can be saved with the C library function setjmp The C library function longjmp can be used in the floating point trap handler to return immediately to this saved environment The longjmp restores the stack pointers jumps back and passes the trap code to be processed 3 100 Chapter 3 The C listing below shows how to save an environment with setjmp The assembly listing of the floating point trap handler below shows how long jmp is used to return to the saved environment There are several ways to write a C function which handles floating point traps using setjmp and longjmp Always keep in mind that the longjmp function restores the environment saved by the most recent
96. existing license file If the license file already contains any SERVER lines you must use another license file See section 1 4 4 Modifying the License File Location for additional information AN If you wish to install the license file in a different directory see section The software product and license file are now properly installed 1 4 3 INSTALLING FLOATING LICENSES If you do not have received your license key read section 1 4 1 Obtaining License Information before continuing 1 Install the TASKING software product following the installation procedure described earlier in this chapter on each computer or workstation where you will use the software product 2 On each PC or workstation where you will use the TASKING software product the location of a license file must be known containing the information of all licenses Either create a local license file or point to a license file on a server Add a licence key to a local license file A local license file can reduce network traffic For Windows you can follow the same steps to import a license key or create a license file manually as explained in the previous section with the installation of a node locked license 1 12 Chapter 1 For Solaris you have to insert the license key manually in the license file The default location of the license file License dat is in directory usr local flexlm licenses for Solaris If you wish to install the license f
97. for the Motorola S formatter IEEE formatter or Intel Hex formatter Specify the formatter respectively with the options srec ieee or ihex e Everything else is considered an object file and is passed to the linker Normally cc166 tries to compile and assemble all files specified and link and locate them into one output file There are however options to suppress the assembler linker or locator stage The control program produces unique filenames for intermediate steps in the compilation process These files are removed afterwards If the compiler and assembler are called in one phase the control program prevents preprocessing of the generated assembly file Normally assembly input files are preprocessed first The following options are interpreted by the control program cc166 Option Description Display invocation syntax V Display version header and stop Waarg Pass argument directly to the assembler Wcarg Pass argument directly to the compiler Wcparg Pass argument directly to the C compiler Wfarg Pass argument directly to the object formatter Wlarg Pass argument directly to the linker Wmarg Pass argument directly to the macro preprocessor Woarg Pass argument directly to the locator Wplarg Pass argument directly to the C pre linker C Force c files to C mode C Do not link stop at obj cC Compile C files to c and stop cf Skip the linking phase call the locator directly cl Do no
98. given string to a double value White space is skipped conversion is terminated at the first unrecognized character Returns the double value atoi include lt stdlib h gt int atoi const char s Converts the given string to an integer value White space is skipped conversion is terminated at the first unrecognized character Returns the integer value atol include lt stdlib h gt long atol const char s Converts the given string to a long value White space is skipped conversion is terminated at the first unrecognized character Returns the long value Libraries 6 27 bsearch include lt stdlib h gt void bsearch const void key const void base size t n size t size int cmp const void const void This function searches in an array of n members for the object pointed to by ptr The initial base of the array is given by base The size of each member is specified by size The given array must be sorted in ascending order according to the results of the function pointed to by cmp Returns a pointer to the matching member in the array or NULL when not found btowc include lt wchar h gt wint_t btowc int c Determines whether c constitutes a valid single byte character in the initial shift state Returns WEOF if c has the value EOF or if unsigned char c does not constitute a valid single byte character in the initial shift state Otherwise it returns the wide cha
99. in 256K 16M The size of a single huge object is not limited to 16K 32 bit address arithmetic Huge data access is less fast than far data access Size of one struct lt 64K Array of struct any type gt 64K shuge data allowed supports shuge data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single shuge object is limited to 64K 16 bit address arithmetic Shuge data access is as fast as huge data but arithmetic on shuge addresses is faster Table 3 3 Small memory model ROM data e g strings floating point constants jump tables etc is also present in LDAT sections and thus needs some space in the 64K of normal user data We recommend using page 3 for external ROM allowing this ROM data and code sections to be allocated in this page and yet use DPP3 for SYSTEM SFR access This means that the other three pages can be used for external RAM 3 12 Chapter 3 In the small model far huge shuge data access causes the compiler to emit code which temporarily overrules DPPO with the page number of the far data The DPPO register is restored afterwards DPP2 is sometimes used for far near copy actions During a task switch interrupt DPPO and DPP2 are preserved and the correct page number is assigned to these DPP registers before activating the C code of this task because a far access might be interrupted The compiler also uses the special prefix instructions which are treated by the pro
100. intrinsic function is called at C level for example f intrinsic_func amp i 1l The compiler forces all parameters to be kept in registers except for the parameters of type struct union and double Those exceptions are passed on to the user stack Finally the compiler generates a macro preprocessor call intrinsic func R8 R6 R7 When a parameter is passed on to the user stack the stack offset of the parameter is filled in at the appropriate position for example _intrinsic void i_func double will result in i_func 8 indicating that the double parameter is located at stack offset 8 Parameters of the type char and bit will be passed to the macro call as 16 bit registers Each bit parameter will be passed in Rx 0 An unsigned signed char will be resp zero or sign extended The same applies to bitfield variables The name of the macro call will always be equal to the name of the intrinsic function at C level The parameters will be evaluated in two groups 3 130 Chapter 3 7 1 parameters passed in registers 2 parameters passed on stack only doubles and structs unions The parameter order within these groups will not differ from the order at C level The parameters passed on the user stack will be passed and evaluated to the macro after the parameters that are passed in registers For example _intrinsic void i_func double struct a int struct b will generate the following macro call i_func R12 16 8
101. invocation of the setjmp function And the environment must be saved before the longjmp function is called by the floating point trap handler else program execution will be undefined Language Implementation 3 101 Example program which handles floating point traps by printing the floating point trap code on stdout See also floating point trap handler in module trap asm include lt stdio h gt include lt setjmp h gt Floating point environment buffer declared in trap handler extern jmp_buf _FP_ENV void main void int exception Do not use floating point operations before this if statement because there is no environment saved to jump to The trap handler loops infinite when a floating point operation is called from this point which traps When the setjmp function has saved the environment it returns zero into the exception variable so the floating point operations are executed But if a floating point trap occurs the trap handler calls the function longjmp The longjmp function restores the environment and returns the trap code in the exception variable The trap code is a non zero value so the else part of this if statement will be executed on a floating point trap if exception setjmp _FP_ENV Insert your floating point operations here else The exception code is a non zero value printf Floating point except
102. is unsigned long the other is converted to unsigned long Otherwise if one operand is long and the other is unsigned int the effect depends on whether a long can represent all values of an unsigned int ifso the unsigned int operand is converted to long if not both are converted to unsigned long Otherwise if one operand is long the other is converted to long Otherwise if either operand is unsigned int the other is converted to unsigned int Otherwise both operands have type int d gt See also section 3 4 2 Character Arithmetic Language Implementation 3 55 Sometimes surprising results may occur for example when unsigned char is promoted to int You can always use explicit casting to obtain the type required The following example makes this clear static unsigned char a 0xFF b cC void f b a if b a This code is never reached because 0x0000 is compared to OxFFOO The compiler converts character a to an int before applying the operator c atl while c atl This loop never stops because 0x0000 is compared to 0x0100 The compiler evaluates atl as an integer expression As a side effect the comparison will also be an integer operation 3 56 Chapter 3 7 To overcome this unwanted behavior use an explicit cast static unsigned char a 0xFF b cC void f b a if b unsigned char a This code is
103. isdigit 6 45 Index Index 13 isgraph 6 45 isinf 6 45 isinff 6 45 islower 6 45 isnan 6 46 isnanf 6 46 iso646 h 6 7 isprint 6 46 ispunct 6 46 isspace 6 46 isupper 6 47 iswalnum 6 47 iswalpha 6 47 iswentrl 6 47 iswctype 6 47 iswdigit 6 48 iswgraph 6 48 iswlower 6 48 iswprint 6 48 iswpunct 6 48 iswspace 6 49 iswupper 6 49 iswxdigit 6 49 isxdigit 6 49 J jump chain 3 86 jump chaining 2 7 4 58 jump table 3 39 3 86 4 61 jump tables 3 19 K keyword _bita 3 26 _cached 3 82 _far 3 21 _huge 3 21 _inline 3 44 _interrupt 3 76 _iram 3 20 _localbank 3 79 _near 3 20 _nodlign 3 45 _ packed 3 46 _stackparm 3 63 _stacksize 3 80 _ system 3 20 _using 3 77 _xnear 5 21 register 3 60 system 3 20 L 1166 link stage 2 9 locate stage 2 9 labs 6 49 language extensions 4 12 large model 3 24 Id_modata_16x 6 109 LDAT 3 9 3 12 Idexp 6 50 Idiv 6 50 leaf function 3 64 7 13 libraries C 6 4 C single precision floating point 6 6 floating point 3 97 6 4 setting search directories 1 6 user stack model 3 28 license floating 1 9 node locked 1 9 obtaining 1 10 trial mode 1 9 wait for available license 1 7 license file location 1 13 setting search directory 1 7 Index 14 7 licensing 1 9 lifetime information disable 4 30 limits compiler 4 100 limits h 6 7 linear address space 3 8 LM_LICENSE_FILE 1 13 locale h
104. it to be Use the 1166 VECTAB locator control to supply the vector table start location to the locator For example VECTAB 08000h Please refer to the CrossView user s manual for the required vector table location for the board and monitor that you use When using this dual vector table ROM monitor you must also supply the sstartaddress option to the ieee166 IEEE 695 object formatter The startaddress should be address where you located the vector table with the VECTAB control This address will be generated in the absolute file CrossView Pro will start execution at this address after a program reset B 4 7 Appendix B 2 KONTRON DEBUGGER When using Kontron debuggers the following operation remarks exist Use the TASKING ieee166 converter program to generate an IEEE 695 output file from the absolute located output file The Kontron KSE695 filter program is needed to translate this IEEE 695 file into Kontron object and symbol files You can use the compiler option g to generate debug information for use by Kontron debuggers Versions of KSE695 previous to v4 3 04 may require using the compiler option gb The gb option prevents c166 from emitting bit bitfield and 80166 pointer behavior high level language information The KSE695 command line option t t x must be used when converting IEEE 695 format to Kontron format tt Specify TASKING c166 IEEE 695 format x Preserve filename and
105. keyword is only valid for the XC16x Super10 architecture and will be ignored if this chip is not selected Use x2 762 option i can only be used in combination with x2 ignored 763 _cached qualifier only allowed with interrupt functions 764 pragma name only allowed in small memory model with extended instruction set 766 initialized ramdata sections don t support section attributes 771 variable argument list not allowed with intrinsic function name 775 obsolete option Ff FF floating point library is reentrant by default The Ff FF option is no longer needed 781 _at has no effect on zero sized object s e g int af _at 0x1234 785 _xnear only allowed in medium large huge memory model In the medium large huge memory model the _xnear keyword allows you to allocate variables in DPP1 which shares this page with the user stack In the tiny small memory model the user stack is located in _near memory where normal data is also located Hence this memory space is already shared Therefore there is no need for an _xnear memory space in the tiny small memory model 787 bad argument in gso option argument The syntax of the gso option is gso file gso where file gso is the name of a gso file 788 GSO file not generated by gs0166 Missing GSO166 directive in the gso file Compiler Diagnostics 5 45 E 789 GSO file memory model mismatch MODEL modelname in the gso file does not match
106. language definition dictates promotion to double when using the math functions or floating point formatters printf and scanf The result is more code and less execution speed In fact the ANSI approach introduces a performance penalty To improve the code size and execution speed the compiler supports the option F to force single precision floating point usage If you use F a float variable passed as an argument is no longer promoted to double when calling a variable argument function or an old style K amp R function and the type double is treated as float It is obvious that this affects the whole application including libraries Therefore special single precision versions of the floating point libraries are now delivered with the package When using F these libraries must be used It is not possible to mix C modules created with the F option and C modules which are using the regular ANSI approach For compatibility with the old F option the Fe option is introduced This option only treats floating point constants having no suffix as float instead of double In EDE you can set floating point options as follows From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Floating Point Enable or disable floating point options 6 4 CAN SUPPORT The Infineon CAN protocol driver software routines including pre built CAN libraries are supplied with the 32 bit Windows 95 98 NT version of thi
107. memory map example 3 14 Chapter 3 Item Usage Comments CPU segmented code lt 64K limited to first segment of 64K xnear data lt 16K 16K per task of fast accessible user data anywhere in 256K 16M via DPP1 This memory space shares DPP1 with the user stack hence xnear data user stack lt 16K Use the _xnear keyword normal data gt 64K paged data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single data object is limited to 16K near data lt 16K 16K per task of fast accessible user data anywhere in 256K 16M via default data group Automatically utilized by c166 The keywords near systemand_iram also allow explicit user manipulation huge data allowed supports huge data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single huge object is not limited to 16K 24 bit address arithmetic Huge data access is less fast than normal data access Size of one struct lt 64K Array of struct any type gt 64K shuge data allowed supports shuge data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single shuge object is limited to 64K 16 bit address arithmetic Shuge data access is as fast as huge data but arithmetic on shuge addresses is faster Table 3 5 Medium memory model Language Implementation 3 2 1 4 LARGE MEMORY MODEL The compiler does not assume the CSP register to contain something valid Each call results in a far i
108. necessary to introduce a special static model to support this optimization It is even possible to enable this optimization for only one function in a module The compiler supports two ways of specifying function automatics can be treated in a static way 1 command line option S All functions of the C module are compiled using static memory for non register function automatics This option may be useful for non recursive applications 2 pragmas If only a few functions of the entire application are recursive the following pragmas can be used to enable or disable this optimization pragma static Use static memory for non register function automatics 3 66 Chapter 3 pragma automatic Default unless S is used Use stack approach for non register function automatics Support recursion The usage of the S option or pragma static does not change the semantic behavior of c166 with automatics explicit storage type specifiers far near huge shuge remain illegal and the initialization of an automatic variable is done run time each time the function is entered 3 7 REGISTER VARIABLES Via the register keyword you are able to control which automatic variable must be allocated to a CPU register by the code generator However if the register keyword is NOT used the front end phase of c166 determines which C automatic variables might be allocated to a register by the code generator unless the OR option is specifie
109. of it and their relationship A sample session explains how to build a C166 ST10 application from your C file 3 Language Implementation Concentrates on the approach of the C166 ST10 architecture and describes the language implementation The C language itself is not described in this document We recommend The C Programming Language second edition by B Kernighan and D Ritchie 1988 Prentice Hall 4 Compiler Use Deals with control program and C compiler invocation command line options and pragmas 5 Compiler Diagnostics Describes the exit status and error warning messages of the compiler 6 Libraries Contains the library functions supported by the compiler and describes their interface and header files XII Manual Purpose and Structure 7 Run time Environment Describes the run time environment for a C application It deals with items like assembly language interfacing C startup code and stack heap size Appendices A MISRA C Supported and unsupported MISRA C rules B Debug Environment Contains operation remarks when you want to use a debug environment such as CrossView Pro with evaluation boards Kontron debugger Hitex HiTOP or the pls fast view66 debugger C CPU Functional Problems Describes how the C166 ST10 toolchain can bypass some functional problems of the CPU D User Stack Model Describes the special coding methods used in the libraries and C166 ST10 C compiler to support a spec
110. of the C data in a normal data section The generated code is listed below pragma save_attributes if MODEL 1 _MODEL m pragma combine fc C define FAR far far common data else pragma combine nc C define FAR normal common data endif COMMON data section in ROM linked with each task and overlaid by the locator shared data among all tasks FAR const char table 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 pragma restore attributes public within task scope each task can have it s own instance of the public variable i int i task scope static within module scope each module can have it s own instance of the static variable s static int s module scope TEST_1_ NC SECTION LDAT WORD COMMON CNEARROM _table LABEL BYTE DB 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h DB 05h 06h 07h 08h 09h PUBLIC _table TEST_1_NC ENDS TEST 2 NB SECTION LDAT WORD PUBLIC CNEAR TEST 2 NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE at LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC i s LABEL WORD DS 2 TEST_2_NB ENDS Language Implementation 3 51 The same object module containing the common section must be linked with all tasks using the shared data because the module name is part of the section name Of course it is not possible for shared code to access non automatic data which is not shared If the medium or large model is used a shared near data section will cause all near data sections
111. on global and local static variables Example void func void enable 1 while activity enable 0 The first assignment will not be optimized away when this pragma was used indirect_access _jnear address address With this pragma you can specify the address ranges that have to be accessed using an indirect addressing mode When a near address is specified the near or _near keyword must be added otherwise the address will be interpreted as _huge In the segmented memory models _near _xnear and _system _iram _bita are all separate near memory spaces The correct DPP number must be included in the address Multiple uses of this pragma accumulate the specified addresses Example for a segmented memory model pragma indirect_access near 0x9234 near 0x5232 0x5236 0x200200 include DPP number in address void main void _near int 0x1234 5 _xnear int 0x1234 10 _far int 0x200200 15 return This pragma applies to constant pointers only m166include include file This pragma is intended to be used together with user defined intrinsics This pragma will generate a SINCLUDE header asm Compiler Use 4 95 control in the output file This header file can be used to include the definition of macro functions emitted by the compiler when user defined intrinsics are used Example pragma ml66include header asm macro Default P
112. option F Treat double as float _C166 Identifies the compiler You can use this symbol to flag parts of the source which must be recognized by the c166 compiler only It expands to the version number of the compiler For example if you use version 8 6r3 of the compiler C166 expands to 86 dot and revision number are omitted _CPUTYPE Expands to a value representing the CPU type depending on option x X 0x167 default xd 0x272 x1 0x1661 X2 0x1662 x22 0x16622 _MODEL Identifies the memory model Expands to the argument of option M See section 3 2 1 6 _MODEL _USMLIB Expands to _usm if P is specified or _nousm otherwise See section 3 2 2 User Stack Model for more information Table 3 13 Predefined macros Example if _CPUTYPE endif 0x1662 XC16x Superl0 Language Implementation 3 6 FUNCTION PARAMETERS B A lot of execution time of an application is spent transferring parameters between functions Therefore this is an area which is very interesting for optimization The conventional CPU approach for parameter passing is via the stack because C allows recursion and reentrancy the stack sizes of each task are accumulated by the locator stage of 1166 Because it is very important to optimize parameter passing c166 uses a resource which a RISC processor like the C166 ST10 has plenty of registers The first parameters are placed in specif
113. parameter passing and context saving before executing the called function Language Implementation 3 5 3 2 ACCESSING MEMORY The C166 ST10 allows to access memory up to 16 MB using a 24 bit address The processor does not use a linear addressing method as the Motorola 68000 family but uses a segmented approach of its memory as the Intel 8086 family Therefore the difference in address range is only visible in the amount of bits in the segment page registers The approach of data memory differs with the approach of code memory Code memory is accessed in segments of 64K using a 16 bit offset and an 8 bit segment number Because there is no translation done on this 8 bit segment number code memory access is almost linear However data memory is accessed within 16 KB pages The 16 bit address is translated into a 24 bit address via one of four data page pointers specified with bit 14 and 15 So the 24 bit address is made out of the 14 bit page offset and the 10 bit contents of the selected DPP c166 has two methods of gaining greater control over how your program uses memory These methods can be used together First you can specify the memory model for the program The compiler allows you to choose from a number of different approaches In section 3 2 1 Memory Models more detailed information is present Second you can use one of the keywords near xnear system iram far huge and_shuge in your program Note that a
114. peephole DFAP Options string We I PRODDIR include We Bhoeufmknladij We OB We DE Wc zswitch_tabmem_default Wc zautobitastruct 4 We zautobita 0 FSC noc We A1 We zvolatile_union We 01 We g We newerr We s tmp Cancel Defaut ixi l 3 For each page make your changes If you have made all changes click OK current page or all pages in the dialog The Cancel button closes the dialog without saving your changes With the Default button you can restore the default project options for the Make your changes for all other entries C Compiler Assembler Macro Preprocessor Linker Locator CrossView Pro of the Project Options dialog in a similar way as described above for the C compiler If available the Options string field shows the command line options B that correspond to your graphical selections Overview 2 23 2 9 BUILD YOUR APPLICATION If you have set all options you can actually compile the file s This results in an absolute IEEE 695 object file which is ready to be debugged Build your Application To build the currently active project e Click on the Execute Make command button The file is compiled assembled linked and located The resulting file is getstart abs The build process only builds files that are out of date So if you click Make again in this example nothing is done because all files are up to date Viewing the
115. pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing 6 62 Chapter 6 7 memcpnhb include lt string h gt void memcpnhb void huge dest void near src size t n Copies n bytes from near data pointed by sre to huge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for near data 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpnhw include lt string h gt void memcpnhw void huge dest void near src size t n Copies n words from near data pointed by src to huge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for near data 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcpnnb include lt string h gt void memcpnnb void near dest void near src size t n Copies n bytes from near data pointed by sre to near data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap and page boundaries are not checked 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing Libraries 6 63 memcpnnw include lt string h gt void memcpnnw void near dest void near src size t n Copies n words from near data pointed by src to near data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap and page boundaries are not checked 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcpnsb include lt string h gt void memcpnsb
116. processing 4 27 comments C style 4 14 common 3 49 common subexpression elimination 2 8 4 46 common tail merging 2 8 compile 2 23 compiler 4 6 compiler limits 4 100 compiler options 4 11 A 4 42 B 4 16 D 4 21 E gea e 4 23 err 4 24 exit 4 25 F 4 26 6 6 f 4 27 Fc 4 20 6 6 Fs 4 26 G 4 29 g 4 30 gb 4 30 Bf 4 30 gl 4 30 gs 4 30 gso 4 31 H 4 32 I 4 34 i 4 33 M 4 35 m 4 36 misrac 4 38 misrac advisory warnings 4 39 misrac required warnings 4 39 n 4 40 O 4 41 4 43 0 4 67 Oa OA 4 44 Ob OB 4 45 Oc OC 4 46 Od OD 4 47 4 49 Oe OE 4 48 Og OG 4 50 Obh OH 4 51 Oj OJ 4 52 Ok OK 4 53 Ol OL 4 54 Om OM 4 55 On ON 4 56 Oo OO 4 57 Op OP 4 58 0q OQ 4 59 Or OR 4 60 Os OS 4 61 Ot OT 4 62 Ou OU 4 63 Ov OV 4 64 Ow OW 4 65 Ox OX 4 66 P 3 28 4 68 Pd 4 68 r 4 71 Ral 4 69 Rcl 4 69 Rco 4 69 S 4 74 s 4 75 T 4 76 t 4 77 U 4 78 u 4 79 V 4 80 w 4 81 wstrict 4 81 x 4 82 Z 4 84 detailed description 4 10 overview 4 6 overview in functional order 4 8 compiler phases 2 4 backend 2 5 code generator phase 2 5 DFA peephole optimizer phase 2 6 instruction reordering phase 2 6 optimization phase 2 5 peephole optimizer phase 2 6 frontend 2 5 optimization phase 2 5 parser phase 2 5 pre
117. separate modules you can use the A option disable language extensions to check if c166 keywords are still present You can enable disable groups of language extensions separately See the description of the A option in the next chapter for more information 3 22 HOW TO PROGRAM SMART WITH C166 If you want to get the best code out of c166 the following guidelines should be kept in mind Always include the appropriate header file before using a standard C library function This is very important with variable argument list functions such as printf Note that you do not have to edit all the old style function bodies of your application into new style ANSI function bodies You only have to add a full prototype declaration before any function is called and before any function definition The following example shows how to migrate from old style programs to new style without editing the function bodies of the program The advantage of this method is that if prototyping is not possible because the C program must be translated with a non ANSI compiler the program does not have to be changed Language Implementation 2 ifdef prototyping define FD x x full function prototype else define FD x return type only no arguments endif char cg var FD char int void main FD void void main char p p cg_var text 2 char cg _var name offset
118. string corresponding to error n include lt time h gt size_t strftime char s size_t maxsize const char format const struct tm timeptr Formats date and time information from the structure timeptr into s according to the specified format format format is analogous to a printf format Each c is replaced as described below a A b B C d H I j m M p S U W W X X y Y abbreviated weekday name full weekday name abbreviated month name full month name local date and time representation day of the month 01 31 hour 24 hour clock 00 23 hour 12 hour clock 01 12 day of the year 001 366 month 01 12 minute 00 59 local equivalent of AM or PM second 00 59 week number of the year Sunday as first day of the week 00 53 weekday 0 6 Sunday is 0 week number of the year Monday as first day of the week 00 53 local date representation local time representation year without century 00 99 year with century 6 86 Chapter 6 Z time zone name if any Ordinary characters including the terminating 0 are copied into s No more than maxsize characters are placed into s Returns the number of characters 0 not included or zero if more than maxsize characters where produced strlen include lt string h gt size_t strlen const char cs Returns the length of the string in cs not counting the NULL character strncat incl
119. syntax The args are an interface to the C language See section 3 11 Inline Assembly for details asm_noflush Same as asm except that the peephole optimizer does not flush the code buffer and assumes register contents remain valid endasm args Switch back to the C language With the args variables can be passed to the C language See section 3 11 Inline Assembly for details autobita threshold Move chars long ints and struct unions which are smaller than or equal to the threshold to bitaddressable memory The declaration may not contain any memory modifiers The default threshold value is set to zero bytes Pointers arrays and function return values are not moved to bitaddressable memory Local variables are only moved to bitaddressable memory when declared static or compiled with the S option See also bita in section 3 2 1 9 autobitastruct threshold Move struct unions which contain at least one bitfield with length 1 to bitaddressable memory This only applies for structs unions which are smaller than or equal to the specified threshold The declaration may not contain any memory modifiers The default threshold value is set to 4 bytes Pointers arrays and function return values are not moved to bitaddressable memory Local structs unions are only moved to bitaddressable memory when declared static or compiled with the S option See also bita in section 3 2 1 9 automatic Default Use stack approach for non re
120. than 64K initialized data for name use huge or use the m option Declare explicitiy initialized variables in shuge or huge memory when the total size of those variables in a module exceeds 16K or 64K respectively An alternative is to omit the initializer and to initialize the variable at run time as far as needed cstartx asm clears variables without explicit initializer automatically d m option E 569 far huge not allowed in tiny memory model The far huge and shuge keywords are not possible and not allowed in the tuny memory model because all normal data is implicitly near E 570 allocation single data object exceeds 16K use shuge allocation single data object exceeds 64K use huge Variables greater than 16K or 64K must be declared shuge or huge respectively F 571 memory is illegal memory for pragma romdata near far huge only You can only use the near far huge and shuge keywords on romdata sections W 572 invalid option for this model option ignored The Ggroupname and Tsize options are only allowed in the medium large or huge memory model W 573 conversion of long address to short address This warning is issued when pointer conversion is needed for example when you assign a huge pointer to a near pointer W 575 c166 language extension keyword used as identifier A language extension keyword is a reserved word and reserved words cannot be used as an identifier F 577 xch
121. the C startup code When the Task Concept is followed all tasks should be linked with a library that contains among run time routines functions such as printf When the Flat Interrupt Concept is followed the C startup code and the library is linked in the locate stage and the link stage is skipped In this example we are using the Task Concept The C startup code is delivered in each run time library for the memory model of the library and in assembly source code because this file usually must be adapted to the target environment The library is delivered for all memory models supported In this case we are using the small model because this is the default memory model of c166 See the next chapter for detailed information on memory models The libraries are organized in two basic library sets one set for the C16x ST10 architecture subdirectory ext and one set for the XC16x Super10 architectures subdirectory ext2 These two basic library sets are additionally organized in two variants one standard variant and one variant with all silicon bug workarounds enabled The subdirectories for this last variant are followed by the character p subdirectories extp and ext2p All four library sets are also available for the User Stack Model All subdirectories for this extra variant are preceded with the character u It depends on the hardware environment you are using which library set must be used By default the compiler a
122. the different parts of the TASKING C166 ST10 toolchain 2 10 Chapter 2 control program cc166 linker 1166 locate stage absolute object module a out C source file C source file CC ccm Cc s invocation file C compiler C compiler cp166 ic gso c166 assembly source file Lem asm asm macro preprocessor error list file err m166 sif _ list file mp1 sif assembly file error list file mpe global storage optimizer ere Invocation file gso166 assembler a166 list file 1st error list file er1 relocatable object archiver module obj ar166 object library invocation file shee linker 1166 link stage print file 1n1 linked object module 1no invocation file map file map srec166 Motorola S Formatter IEEE Formatter ieee166 Intel Hex Formatter ihex166 Motorola S records IEEE 695 load module abs Intel Hex records CrossView Pro Debugger xfw166 C166 ST10 execution environment Figure 2 1 C166 ST10 development flow Overview 2 11 You can use the control program cc166 to build an absolute loadable file starting with an input file of any stage C source programs are compiled by the C
123. the error message c166 always generates the error number in the assembly output file exactly matching the place where the error occurred For example the following program causes a code generator error message bit b void err b 1 OK b 1 Not allowed test c 8 E 539 line 7 not allowed on bit type Chapter 5 The output file contains PUBLIC _err TEST_1_PR SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM _err PROC NEAR BSET b ERROR C166_ERROR_539 RET _err ENDP TEST_1 PR ENDS So when a compilation is not successful the generated output file is not accepted by the assembler thus preventing a corrupt application to be made see also the e option Warning messages do not result in an erroneous assembly output file They are meant to draw your attention to assumptions of the compiler for a not correct situation You can control warning messages with the w number option The last class of messages are the internal compiler errors The following format is used S number assertion failed please report These errors are caused by failed internal consistency checks and should never occur However if such a SYSTEM error appears please report the occurrence to TASKING using a Problem Report form Please include a small C program causing the error 5 2 RETURN VALUES c166 returns an exit status to the operating system environment for testing For example in a BATCH file
124. the following separator characters PC space e g set C166INC include project include Compiler Use 4 87 UNIX space e g setenv C166INC include project include 4 88 Chapter 4 4 5 PRAGMAS According to ANSI 3 8 6 a preprocessing directive of the form pragma pragma token list new line causes the compiler to behave in an implementation defined manner The compiler ignores pragmas which are not mentioned in the list below Pragmas give directions to the code generator of the compiler Besides the pragmas there are two other possibilities to steer the code generation process command line options and keywords e g near type variables in the C application itself The compiler acknowledges these three groups using the following rules Command line options can be overruled by keywords and pragmas Keywords can be overruled by pragmas Hence pragmas have the highest priority This approach makes it possible to set a default optimization level for a source module which can be overridden temporarily within the source by a pragma Most pragmas have a corresponding compiler option at the command line When no corresponding option is mentioned here you can use the z option for this purpose For example pragma nocustack can be specified at the command line by entering znocustack When the pragma text consists of multiple tokens they can be separated on the command line with dashes For exam
125. toascii int c Converts c to an ascii value strip highest bit This is a non ANSI function Returns the converted value 6 92 Chapter 6 7 tolower include lt ctype h gt int tolower int c Returns c converted to a lowercase character if it is an uppercase character otherwise c is returned toupper include lt ctype h gt int toupper int c Returns c converted to an uppercase character if it is a lowercase character otherwise c is returned towctrans include lt wctype h gt wint_t towctrans wint_t wc wctrans_t desc Returns the mapped value of we using the mapping described by desc For example the function tolower wc is the same as specifying towctrans wc wctrans tolower towlower include lt wctype h gt wint_t towlower wint_t we Returns we converted to a lowercase wide character if it is an uppercase wide character otherwise we is returned Libraries 6 93 towupper include lt wctype h gt wint_t towupper wint t we Returns we converted to an uppercase wide character if it is a lowercase wide character otherwise we is returned ungetc include lt stdio h gt int ungetc int c FILE fin Pushes at the most one character back onto the input buffer Returns EOF on error ungetwc include lt wchar h gt wint_t ungetwc wint_t c FILE stream Pushes at the most one wide character back onto the input stream Returns the wide
126. type argument E 545 maximum interrupt number is 127 Use an interrupt number less than 128 E 547 calling an interrupt routine use _int166 An interrupt function cannot be called directly you must use the intrinsic function _int166 E 549 argument number is not bitaddressable The intrinsic functions getbit putbit and _bfld require a bitaddressable argument See section 3 17 Intrinsic Functions for the syntax of these intrinsic functions E 550 assignment parameter return not allowed with bit structure Structure of bit is supported with the restriction that no other type than bit is member of this structure Structure of bit is not allowed as parameter or return value of a function See also section 3 4 3 The Bit Type F 551 too many sections gt number A module can contain 255 sections at the most E 552 memory_type is illegal memory for function near or huge only The specified storage type is not valid for this function The storage type of a function can be either near or huge A function can also have return type bit F 553 illegal memory model See the compiler usage for valid arguments of the M option F 554 illegal memory type specified See the description of the m option for the correct syntax 5 36 Chapter 5 555 invalid option option The option must have a valid argument See the description of the option for the correct syntax 556 illegal section qualifier in R optio
127. use a storage type for a structure with bit type members 866 pointer name is forced to bitaddressable pointer to bitaddressable is illegal A pointer to bitaddressable memory is not allowed 876 cannot initialize _atbit Q object initialize base object name instead Global bits declared with the _atbitQ attribute cannot be initialized Initialization should be done on the base object instead 877 cannot generate code for multiple architectures You specified more than one processor architecture to the x option for example x12 Specify only one processor architecture 878 obsolete option name replacement option x1 activated The silicon bug workaround controls c166sv1sp c166sv1sp2 and c166sv1sp are no longer used Specify the extend1 processor architecture x1 instead to activate all three silicon bug workarounds 879 obsolete option name ignored The specified option is no longer in use It may disappear in a future version of the compiler resulting in a command line syntax error 880 class object name is always aligned The object can never be located at an odd address Despite this the compiler sometimes generates code to access the object as if it were unaligned This will lead to an unneccessary increase of code size Therefore you should remove the _noalign qualifier when this warning is generated Whether or not the compiler generates unaligned proof code is undefined in this case Sample warnings a
128. when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoMACsu argl arg2 CoMACsu R12 R13 _CoMACu void _CoMACu unsigned int x unsigned int y Use the CoMACu instruction to add the multiplication result of two unsigned 16 bit values to the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoMACu argl arg2 CoMACu R12 R13 Language Implementation 3 111 _CoMAC_min void _CoMAC min int x int y Use the CoMAC instruction to subtract the multiplication result of two signed 16 bit values from the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Note that the MP flag influences the result it is highly recommended to keep the MP flag cleared Returns nothing _CoMAC_min argl arg2 CoMAC R12 R13 _CoMACsu_min void _CoMACsu_min int x unsigned int y Use the CoMACsu instruction to subtract the mulatiplication result of a signed 16 bit value with an unsigned 16 bit value from the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoMACsu_min argl arg2 CoMACsu R12 R13 _CoMACu_min void _CoMACu_min unsigned int x unsigned int y Use the CoMACu instruction to subtract the multiplication result of two unsigne
129. wide character a z iswprint include lt wctype h gt int iswprint wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is printable including spaces iswpunct include lt wctype h gt int iswpunct wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is a punctuation wide character gt gt 99 9p such as etc Libraries 6 49 iswspace include lt wctype h gt int iswspace wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is a white space wide character space tab vertical tab formfeed linefeed carriage return iswupper include lt wctype h gt int iswupper wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is an uppercase wide character A Z iswxdigit include lt wctype h gt int iswxdigit wint_t we Returns a non zero value when we is a hexadecimal digit 0 9 A F a f isxdigit include lt ctype h gt int isxdigit int c Returns a non zero value when c is a hexadecimal digit 0 9 A F a f labs include lt stdlib h gt long labs long n Returns the absolute value of the signed long argument 6 50 Chapter 6 7 Idexp include lt math h gt double ldexp double x int n Returns the result of x 2 ldiv include lt stdlib h gt ldiv_t ldiv long num long denom Both arguments are long integers The returned quotient and remainder are also long integers Returns a structure containing the quotient and remainder of num
130. worst case interrupt response time To avoid having to use the previous workaround the problem can be bypassed by an adaption in the interrupt frame code file intrpt c in the c subdirectory of the examples directory In this file the RETI instruction is preceded by a BFLDH PSW 0F0h 0FOH instruction when the compiler bypass option BI is used This will cause an interrupted multiplication or division to be correctly completed after RETI before a higher priority interrupt will be acknowledged CPU Functional Problems C 21 Problem S1 Byte Write to FLASH EPROM Infineon reference Problem S1 Use compiler option BB Use libraries lib u 166p 1lib This problem occurs on older steps of the FLASH EPROM version of the CPU With the BB option the compiler generates two NOP instructions after each instruction which does a byte write operation These instructions are ADDB ADDCB ANDB CPLB MOVB NEGB ORB SUBB SUBCB XORB The pragma fix_byte_write and nofix_byte_write can be used to switch this option on the fly in your source code To reduce the number of NOP instructions to be generated you can use the disassembler d166 to detect where erroneous sequences are generated for the CPU Gb See the description of the disassembler in the Utilities chapter of the C166 ST10 Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Manual for more information C 22 Appendix C fe ST_BUS 1 JMPS followed by PEC transfer STMicroele
131. 6 109 initialized variables 3 68 3 69 inline C library functions 4 66 inline assembly 3 73 installation licensing 1 9 Solaris 1 4 Windows 1 3 instruction reordering 4 55 instruction set extended D 6 integral promotion 3 54 internal memory 3 30 interrupt 3 76 3 78 flat interrupt concept 3 52 interrupt frame 3 77 intrinsic functions 3 107 _atomic 3 125 _bfld 3 119 _COoABS 3 107 _CoADD 3 108 _CoADD2 3 108 _CoASHR 3 108 _CoCMP 3 109 _CoLOAD 3 109 _CoLOAD2 3 109 _CoMAC 5 110 _CoMAC min 5 111 _CoMACsu 3 110 _CoMACsu_min 5 111 _CoMACu 3 110 _CoMACu_min 5 111 _CoMAX 3 112 _CoMIN 3 112 _CoMUL 3 112 _CoMUTLsu 5 115 _CoMULu 3 113 _CONEG 3 113 _CoNOP 3 114 _CORND 3 114 _CoSHL 3 114 _CoSHR 3 115 _CoSTORE 3 115 _CoSTOREMAH 3 115 Index _CoSTOREMAL 3 116 _CoSTOREMAS 3 116 _CoSTOREMSW 3 116 _CoSUB 3 117 _CoSUB2 3 117 _diswdt 3 123 _div32 3 124 _divu32 3 124 _einit 3 123 _getbit 3 120 _idle 3 121 _int166 5 120 _mkfp 3 127 _mkbp 3 128 _mksp 3 128 _mod32 3 125 _modu32 3 125 _mul32 3 124 _mulu32 3 124 _nop 3 121 _pag 3 120 _pof 3 126 _prior 3 122 _putbit 3 120 _pwrdn 3 122 _rol 3 117 _ror 3 118 _ seg 3 127 _sof 3 127 _srvwdt 3 122 _testclear 3 118 _testset 3 119 intrpt c 3 83 invocation compiler 4 6 control program 4 3 iram 3 26 iramdata 4 92 isalnum 6 44 isalpha 6 44 isascii 6 44 iscntrl 6 44
132. 66 I include message c UNIX c166 I include message c 3 Check if the environment variable C166INC exists If it does use the contents as a directory specifier for include files You can specify more than one directory in the environment variable C166INC by using a separator character Instead of using I as in the example above you can specify the same directory using C166INC 4 86 Chapter 4 PC set C166INC include c166 message c UNIX if using the Bourne shell sh C166INC include export C166INC c166 message c or if using the C shell csh setenv C166INC include c166 message c 4 When an include file is not found with the rules mentioned above the compiler tries the subdirectory include one directory higher than the directory containing the c166 binary For example PC c166 exe is installed in the directory C C166 BIN The directory searched for the include file is C C166 INCLUDE UNIX C166 is installed in the directory usr local c166 bin The directory searched for the include file is usr local c166 include The compiler determines run time which directory the binary is executed from to find this include directory A directory name specified with the I option or in C166INC may or may not be terminated with a directory separator because c166 inserts this separator if omitted When you specify more than one directory to the environment variable C166INC you have to use one of
133. 7 fscanf 6 37 fseek 0 38 fsetpos 0 38 fiell 6 39 fwrite 6 40 getc 6 40 getchar 6 41 gels 6 41 perror 6 69 printf 6 70 putc 6 72 putchar 6 73 puts 6 73 remove 6 75 rename 6 75 rewind 6 76 scanf 6 76 setbuf 6 79 setvbuf 6 80 sprintf 6 82 sscanf 6 83 tmpfile 6 91 tmpnam 6 91 ungetc 6 93 vfbrintf 6 94 vprintf 6 95 vsprintf 6 95 stdlib h 6 8 abort 6 23 abs 6 24 atexit 6 26 atof 6 26 atoi 6 26 atol 6 26 bsearch 6 27 calloc 6 27 div 6 30 exit 6 30 fcalloc 6 31 Sfree 6 32 fmalloc 6 33 frealloc 6 36 free 6 36 gelenv 0 41 hcalloc 6 42 hfree 6 43 hmalloc 6 43 brealloc 6 43 labs 6 49 ldiv 6 50 malloc 6 52 mblen 6 52 mbstowcs 6 54 mbtowc 6 55 ncalloc 6 67 nfree 6 68 nmalloc 6 68 qsort 6 74 rand 6 74 realloc 6 68 6 75 scalloc 6 76 sfree 6 80 smalloc 6 82 srand 6 82 srealloc 6 82 strtod 6 88 strtol 6 88 strtoul 6 89 westombs 6 103 wetomb 6 104 stdnames 3 61 strcat 6 83 strchr 6 83 stremp 6 84 strcoll 6 84 strcpy 6 84 strespn 6 84 strerror 6 85 strftime 6 85 string h 6 8 _fstrcat 6 10 _fsirchr 6 10 _fsircmp 6 11 _fsircpy 6 11 _fsircspn 6 11 _fsirlen 6 11 _fsirncat 6 12 _fsirncmp 6 12 _fsirncpy 0 12 _fsirpbrk 6 13 _fstrrchr 6 13 _fsirspn 6 13 _fsirstr 6 13 _fstrtok 6 14 _hstrcat 0 14 _hstrchr 6 14 _hstrcmp 6 14 _hstrcpy 6 15 _hstrcspn 0 15 _hstrlen 6 15 _hstrncat 6 15 _hstrncmp 6 16 _hs
134. 95 format e g Kontron Hitex Krohn amp Stiller Lauterbach etc Target Processors All C16x ST10 derivatives such as C167 ST10x172 This is the default All ST10 derivatives with MAC support is enabled with the xd option All C166S v1 0 derivatives support is enabled with the x1 option All XC16x Super10 derivatives support is enabled with the x2 option All enhanced Super10 derivatives support is enabled with the x22 option 2 2 GENERAL IMPLEMENTATION This section describes the different phases of the compiler and the target independent optimizations 2 2 1 COMPILER PHASES During the compilation of a C program a number of phases can be identified These phases are divided into two groups referred to as frontend and backend Overview 2 5 frontend The preprocessor phase File inclusion and macro substitution are done by the preprocessor before parsing of the C program starts The syntax of the macro preprocessor is independent of the C syntax but also described in the ANSI X3 159 1989 standard The scanner phase The scanner converts the preprocessor output to a stream of tokens The parser phase The tokens are fed to a parser for the C grammar The parser performs a syntactic and semantic analysis of the program and generates an intermediate representation of the program The frontend optimization phase This phase performs target processor independent optim
135. AREDRTLIB 6 5 sharing of string literals and floating point constants 2 8 shuge pointer 3 53 SIGABRT 6 81 SIGFPE 6 81 SIGILL 6 81 SIGINT 6 81 signal 6 81 signal h 6 8 raise 0 74 signal 6 81 signals 6 81 signed char 3 53 int 3 53 long 3 53 short 3 53 SIGSEGV 6 81 SIGTERM 6 81 sin 6 81 single precision 3 91 float base expression subroutines 3 91 float conversion subroutines 3 92 sinh 6 81 size 4 96 small model 3 23 smalloc 6 82 snd locator control 3 8 Index software installation Solaris 1 4 Windows 1 3 source 4 96 special function registers 3 60 _esfr 3 60 _esfrbit 3 60 _sfr 3 60 _sfrbit 3 60 _xsff 3 60 speed 4 96 sprintf 6 82 sqrt 6 82 srand 6 82 srealloc 6 82 srecl66 2 11 sscanf 6 83 SSKENABLE 7 6 SSKSEG 7 6 SSKSIZE 7 6 stack 3 28 3 63 7 9 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 7 stack size 7 8 stackparm 3 63 7 12 standard c 3 5 start obj 7 3 startup code 7 3 stat 6 83 static 4 91 static approach of function automatics 3 64 3 68 static initializations 3 68 static memory 4 74 stdarg h 6 8 va_arg 0 94 va_end 6 94 va_starl 6 94 stddef h 6 8 offsetof 6 68 stdio h 6 8 _close 6 10 _lseek 6 17 Index Index 19 _open 0 18 _read 6 18 _unlink 6 23 _write 0 23 clearerr 6 28 fclose 6 31 feof 6 31 ferror 6 31 Jflush 0 32 fgetc 0 32 fgetpos 0 32 fgets 0 33 fopen 0 34 Sprintf 6 35 fputc 0 35 puts 0 35 fread 6 36 freopen 0 3
136. ASKING offers a complete toolchain for the Infineon C166 and STMicroelectronics ST10 microcontroller families and their derivatives These derivatives can be based on C16x ST10x extended architectures 16M memory 24 bit addresses and XC16x Super10 extended architectures This manual uses C166 ST10 as the shorthand notation for these microcontroller families The toolchain contains a C compiler a C compiler a control program a macro preprocessor an assembler a linker locator a library manager a program builder a disassembler a debugger and output format utilities The c166 is not a general C compiler adapted for use with the C166 ST10 architecture but instead it is dedicated to the microcontroller architecture of the C166 ST10 architecture This means that you can access all special features of the C166 ST10 architecture in C 16K page architecture with full pointer support bit addressable memory extended special function registers I O ports interrupt support scalable vector tables local register banks and a number of built in intrinsic functions to utilize special C166 ST10 architecture instructions And yet no compromise is made to the ANSI standard It is a fast single pass optimizing compiler that generates extremely fast and compact code The c166 generates assembly source code using the Infineon assembly language specification and must be assembled with the TASKING C166 ST10 Cross Assembler This manual uses
137. BRARIES all TASKING M daLdVH Libraries 6 3 6 1 INTRODUCTION c166 comes with libraries per memory model and with header files containing the appropriate prototype of the library functions The library functions are also shipped in source code C or assembly Four sets of libraries are delivered to meet specific requirements for the various C16x ST10 XC16x Super10 microcontroller architectures These sets are located in separate directories ext The extended libraries are needed for the C16x ST10 and similar architectures These architectures feature the extended instruction set extended special function registers 24 bit addressing and extended PEC pointers Use these libraries in conjunction with the compiler option x or x1 extp The protected li braries provide a software workaround for CPU functional problems Use these libraries in conjunction with the compiler options x or x1 and B ext2 The extended 2 libraries are needed for the XC16x Super10 and similar architectures These architectures feature jump prediction scalable and relocatable interrupt vector table local register ba nks and instruction reordering Use these libraries in conjunction with the compiler option x2 ext2p The protected li braries provide a software workaround for CPU functional problems Use these libraries in conjunction with the compiler options x2 and B Another four sets
138. C rules x means that the rule is not supported by the TASKING C compiler R is a required rule A is an advisory rule 1 11 T2 13 14 17 19 20 R A A A R R R R R A R A A R A R R A R R The code shall conform to standard C without language extensions Other languages should only be used with an interface standard Inline assembly is only allowed in dedicated C functions Provision should be made for appropriate run time checking Only use characters and escape sequences defined by ISO C Character values shall be restricted to a subset of ISO 106460 1 Trigraphs shall not be used Multibyte characters and wide string literals shall not be used Comments shall not be nested Sections of code should not be commented out Identifiers shall not rely on significance of more than 31 characters The same identifier shall not be used in multiple name spaces Specific length typedefs should be used instead of the basic types Use unsigned char or signed char instead of plain char Floating point implementations should comply with a standard The bit representation of floating point numbers shall not be used typedef names shall not be reused Numeric constants should be suffixed to indicate type Octal constants other than zero shall not be used All object and function identifiers shall be declared
139. CUSTACK C166_US user stack DATA LDAT WORD GLBUSRSTACK CUSTACK C166_USO user stack DATA LDAT WORD GLBUSRSTACK CUSTACK C166_US1 init table DATA LDAT t WORD GLOBAL CINITROM C166_INIT PDAT s clear table DATA LDAT t WORD GLOBAL CINITROM C166_BSS PDAT s heap HDAT LDAT WORD_ PUBLIC CHEAP C166_HEAP vector table CODE CODE WORD PUBLIC C166_VECTAB C166_INT Table 3 11 Section names specials Language Implementation 3 35 You can only change the section attributes of non initialized data sections normal sections and romdata sections category I using the mem code listed in the table You can tell the compiler to use other class names combine types and align types instead of the defaults listed above by means of the following pragmas Each pragma has an equivalent command line option that can be used if the complete module must use the changed attributes pragma class mem name use name as class for section of area mem pragma combine mem ctype use ctype as combine type for section of area mem pragma align mem atype use atype as align type for section of area mem pragma default_attributes use default attributes as listed above atype is one of the following align types Byte alignment Word alignment Double word alignment Page alignment Segment alignment PEC addressable IRAM addressable TAP TTOH Ew ctype is one of the following combine types L priv
140. DE head asm IF NES MODEL TINY amp NES MODEL SMALL ASSUME DPP2 _ FP ENV near data addressed via DPP2 ENDI PUBLIC _ fptrap8 public declaration trapping routine for double precision see PUBLIC _ fptrap4 public declaration trapping routine for single precision sete PUBLIC _ FP_ENV public declaration floating point environment buffer PUBLIC __FPTRAPLOOP public declaration trap loop IF EQS MODEL TINY EQS MODEL MEDIUM EXTERN _longjmp NEAR ELSE EXTERN _longjmp FAR Language Implementation 3 103 ENDI __FPCODE SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM g F k Fe Fe He Fe ER ER ER ERE REE EE ERR EEE EE ERE EEE REE EER EE EER EERE EER ER ER ER ERERER EE floating point trap handler g Fe ke He He He He Fe He RK ERE RRR ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER He He He He ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ERE IF EQS MODEL TINY EQS MODEL MEDIUM __fptrap8 PROC NEAR ELSE __fptrap8 PROC FAR ENDI __fptrap4 entry floating point trapping routine for single precision operations There is no environment to return to when the longjump return address is not set in the floating point jump buffer mov R12 __FP_ENV if _FP_ENV return_address NULL IF NES MODEL TINY amp NES MODEL MEDIUM or R12 __FP_ENV 2 ENDI jmpr cc_Z __FPTRAPLOOP goto infinite loop _JMPRACACHE IF EQS MODEL TINY EQS MODEL
141. ES control in the etc directory installed with the product This way a166 finds the file reg def in that directory To select the same register file for the assembler as for the compiler it is recommended to supply the STDNAMES control on the command line of the assembler For example if your C code includes the file reg163 h you should supply the control STDNAMES reg163 def to the assembler on the command line All reg h files consist of a number of parts which are all included by default However if you do not need every part in your source file you can omit each part by defining the appropriate macro before you include this file These control macros are described in the reg h files REG163_NOPORT omit port I O registers REG163_NORS232 omit serial I O registers REG163_ NOTIMER omit timer registers REG163_ NOADINT omit additional peripheral REG163_ NOEXTINT omit fast external interrupt Language Implementation 3 61 REG165_NOCPU REG165_NOPEC REG165_ NOPORT REG165_ NORS232 REG165_ NOTIMER REG165_ NOADINT REG165_ NOEXTINT REG166_NOADC REG166 NOCAPCOM REG166_ NOCPU REG166_NOPEC REG166_ NOPORT REG166_NORS232 REG166_ NOTIMER REG167_NOADC REG167_NOCAPCOM REG167_NOCPU REG167_NOPEC REG167_NOPORT REG167_NORS232 omit cpu registers omit PEC registers omit port I O registers omit serial I O registers omit timer registers omit additional peripheral interrupt registers omit fast external i
142. Extensions for the XC16x Super10 Architectures 3 79 Switch Statement 00 0 eee ees 3 86 Register Use se eck an cada She eee Pek heres bet 3 87 Floating Point Interfacing 0 0 00 cee eee 3 88 Introduction Software Floating Point Usage 3 88 The IEEE 754 Format 0 00000 c eee eens 3 88 Storage in MEMOLY aoed eri a owe eee ews 3 90 Single Precision Usage 0 eee eee ee 3 91 Float Base Expression Subroutines 3 91 Float Conversion Subroutines 0 00 0005 3 92 Register Usage Single Precision 3 92 Double Precision Usage 0 c eee eee 3 93 Double Base Expression Subroutines 3 93 Double Conversion Subroutines 0 0405 3 94 Double Support Subroutines 0 0005 3 95 Register Usage Double Precision 4 3 96 Float Double Usage for Assembly Programmers 3 96 Floating Point Trapping 0 cee eee ee 3 97 Handling Floating Point Traps in a C Application 3 99 IEEE 754 Compliant Error Handling 3 106 Intrinsic Functions 4 0 eero e ep be eee be bebe ew bbe te 3 107 User Defined Intrinsics 0 0 00000 c eee ee 3 129 Implementing Other _CoXXX Intrinsics Using the _CoXXX Intrinsic Functions 0 0 0004 3 133 Code Memory Banking 0 00 c eee ee eee 3 135 C Code Checking MISRA C 2 eee ee 3 140 PEG SUppOlt ia tise iiie as gaa d
143. IC APPROACH OF FUNCTION AUTOMATICS Function automatics not parameters which can not be allocated to a register are present on the user stack Compared to static variables these stack variables have the following disadvantages Language Implementation 3 65 e Access to these variables is only possible via an indirect register plus offset addressing mode This addressing mode is supported in the following two instructions only 1 MOV Rn Rm d16 2 MOV Rm d16 Rn This means that all arithmetic operations add and cmp or subb and xor with a stack variable need an extra register move before the operation can be done With static memory variables a register move is not needed because the operations mentioned above allow the usage of the MEM operand e Heavy usage of instruction 1 is slowing down execution time because this instruction takes twice as much time as any other move instruction or arithmetic operation 200ns instead of 100ns at 40MHz Therefore code size and execution speed can be improved if the non register function automatics may be treated by the compiler as if they were static and it is possible to allocate these automatic variables in the fast internal RAM of the C166 ST10 using a CLASSES or ADDRESSES SECTIONS locator control Of course this is not possible with recursive functions Because function automatics do not have any interaction with other functions unlike parameters it is not
144. INSINNOUIANS SNAG CPU FUNCTIONAL PROBLEMS all TASKING M XIGNAddV CPU Functional Problems C 3 1_ INTRODUCTION Infineon Components and STMicroelectronics regularly publishe microcontroller errata sheets for reporting both functional problems and deviations from the electrical and timing specifications For some of these functional problems in the microcontroller itself the TASKING C166 compiler provides workarounds In fact these are software workarounds for hardware problems This appendix lists a summary of functional problems which can be bypassed by the compiler tool kit Please refer to the Infineon STMicroelectronics errata sheets for the CPU step you are using to verify if you need to use one of these bypasses C 4 Appendix C 2 CPU FUNCTIONAL PROBLEM BYPASSES BUS 18 JMPR at jump target address Infineon STMicroelectronics reference BUS 18 Use compiler option BH Use libraries lib u ext2p lib If a PEC transfer occurs immediately after a JMPR instruction the program counter can have a wrong value There are many other requirements before this actually happens among others the JMPR has to be reached by a jump instruction CPU 3 MOV B Rn Rm data16 as the last instruction in an extend sequence Infineon reference CPU 3 Use compiler option BE Use libraries lib u extp lib On older C167 derivatives the last instruction in an extend sequence w
145. Implementation the registers used for return values of functions are explained Note that RO is used as user stack pointer and must be used in the assembly function accordingly If fast parameter passing is used with this assembly function or functions called by this assembly function R12 to R15 can not be used as scratch registers Note that if you want to use one of the registers R6 to R9 you must save it on the user stack at entry and restore at exit because this register might contain a C register variable of another C function Registers RI R5 R10 and R11 are free In section 3 6 Function Parameters of the chapter Language Implementation is described how parameter passing is supported by c166 If you do not want parameter passing in registers e g existing assembly function expecting parameters on the user stack you must use the keyword stackparm as function qualifier in the full C prototype of the assembly language function The quickest and most reliable way to make an assembly language function which must conform to C for the C166 ST10 is to make the body of this function in C and compile this module If the assembly function must return something specify the return type in the assembler function using C syntax and let it return something If parameters are used force code generation for accessing these parameters with a dummy statement e g an assignment int stackparm assem char c int i return c i
146. M and the RAM sections have the class CINITERAM or CINITIRAM depending on the pragma eramdata iramdata e constant data for initialization of automatic aggregates and jump tables is allocated in far ROM c166 generates different code for accessing this data as far data which implies a minor draw back in code execution performance When you use the const keyword for normal data this data is placed in near ROM even with the Oe option To move jump tables separately from string and floating point constants to various locations you can use the following pragmas pragma switch_tabmem_far For the small memory model jump tables are placed in far ROM The location of string and floating point constants is still controlled by the Oe OE option as described above The ROM section where the jump tables are placed have class CFARROM The code generated for accessing the jump table in far ROM is slightly slower compared to the situation where jump tables reside in near ROM pragma switch_tabmem_near For the small memory model jump tables are placed in near ROM The location of string and floating point constants is still controlled by the Oe OE option as described above The ROM section where the jump tables are placed have class CNEARROM pragma switch_tabmem_default This is the default Use this pragma to return the control of the jump table locations back to the Oe OE command line option as described
147. MA019 002 00 00 Doc ver 5 19 C166 ST10 v8 8 C Cross Compiler User s Manual A publication of Altium BV Documentation Department Copyright 1991 2009 Altium BV All rights reserved Reproduction in whole or part is prohibited without the written consent of the copyright owner TASKING is a brand name of Altium Limited The following trademarks are acknowledged FLEXIm is a registered trademark of Macrovision Corporation Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola Inc MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation SUN is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of X Open Company Ltd All other trademarks are property of their respective owners Data subject to alteration without notice http www tasking com http www altium com The information in this document has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate and reliable However Altium assumes no liabilities for inaccuracies in this document Furthermore the delivery of this information does not convey to the recipient any license to use or copy the software or documentation except as provided in an executed license agreement covering the software and documentation Altium reserves the right to change specifications embodied in this document without prior notice TABLE OF CONTENTS all TASKING M SLNALNOD Table of Conte
148. NBF causes no buffering If buf is not NULL it will be used as a buffer otherwise a buffer will be allocated size determines the buffer size Returns zero if successful or a non zero value for an error d gt See also setbuf sfree include lt stdlib h gt void sfree void _shuge p Deallocates the space pointed to by p p Must point to space earlier allocated by a call to scallocQ smallocQ or sreallocQ Otherwise the behavior is undefined Returns nothing Libraries 6 81 signal include lt signal h gt void signal int sig void handler int int Determines how subsequent signals will be handled If handler is SIG_DFL the default behavior is used if handler is SIG_IGN the signal is ignored otherwise the function pointed to by handler will be called with the argument of the type of signal Valid signals are SIGABRT abnormal termination e g from abort SIGFPE arithmetic error e g zero divide or overflow SIGILL illegal function image e g illegal instruction SIGINT interactive attention e g interrupt SIGSEGV illegal storage access e g access outside memory limits SIGTERM termination request sent to this program When a signal sig subsequenly occurs the signal is restored to its default behavior then the signal handler function is called as if by handler sig If the handler returns the execution will resume where it was when the signal occurred Returns th
149. O to the register bank definition W 886 illegal register bank definition regdef The illegal register bank definition is ignored See the r option for the correct syntax W 887 option xc is deprecated implied by default The x option is always on by default 5 48 7 Chapter 5 W 888 struct union member cannot have an explicit memory specifier ignored An individual struct union member cannot be allocated in a specific memory space It is only possible to allocate a complete struct union in a particular memory space For the example below the warning will be generated struct s _huge int member The correct way to add the memory specifier is struct s int member _huge struct s st_huge struct s in _huge memory _near struct s st_near struct s in _near memory 892 pragma indirect _ access address expected An address was expected 893 pragma indirect access invalid address address An invalid address has been specified 894 pragma indirect _ access first address must be lower than last address When an address range is specified the first address must be lower than the last address 895 pragma indirect access not a near address Oxbexnumber The specified address cannot be near e g pragma indirect_access near 0x1234 when translated in a segmented memory model this is not a valid near address because DPPO is never used to address a near memory space LI
150. OD_12_SB internal ram IR DATA LDAT IRAM PUBLIC CIRAM MOD_14_IR data ADDRES SABLE 1 See also section 3 2 5 Constant Romdata Section Allocation for small model only 2 CNEARROM when tiny small model is used Table 3 9 Section names non initialized data normal and romdata When using the medium or large model near data xnear data or system data always remain a member of the default data group or system data group So for these memory areas it is not possible to change all section attributes II Initialized Ramdata Sections For initialized data the section name is generated as follows module IR mem module ID_ mem module ER mem module ED mem where module is the module name in uppercase without suffix of the c file mem is a memory abbreviation code as used by non initialized ramdata sections SB IR BI BA NB FB HB or XB Language Implementation 3 33 You can NOT change the section attributes of this category c166 uses the following table for its defaults near data Description type align combine class example Mm Mt type type section MI Ms name near iramdata DATA LDAT t WORD PUBLIC CINITROM MOD_IR_NB ROM copy PDAT s near iramdata DATA LDAT WORD PUBLIC CINITIRAM MOD_ID_NB RAM space near eramdata DATA LDAT t WORD PUBLIC CINITROM MOD_ER_NB ROM copy PDAT s near eramdata DATA LDAT WO
151. OM drive 2 Ifthe installation program does not start automatically browse to your CD ROM drive and run the program setup exe The TASKING Setup dialog box appears Select a product and click on the Install button Follow the instructions that appear on your screen 3 4 You can find your serial number on the invoice delivery note or picking slip delivered with the product 5 License the software product as explained in section 1 4 Licensing TASKING Products 1 4 7 Chapter 1 1 2 2 INSTALLATION FOR SOLARIS 1 Login as a user Be sure you have read write and execute permissions in the installation directory Otherwise login as root or use the su command If you are a first time user decide where you want to install the product By default it will be installed in usr local Insert the TASKING CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and mount the CD ROM on a directory for example cdrom Make sure to use an ISO 9660 file system with Rock Ridge extensions enabled See the UNIX manual pages about mount for details Go to the directory on which the CD ROM is mounted cd cdrom Run the installation script sh install Follow the instructions that appear on your screen First a question appears about where to install the software The default answer is usr local On some hosts the installation script asks if you want to install SW000098 the Flexible License Manager FLEXIm If you do not already h
152. OM option overrules the pragmas reorder noreorder in the source So OM always disables instruction reordering no matter the pragma settings in your source With Om active default you can control the instruction reordering with the pragmas reorder noreorder If none of these pragmas are present in your source the default is reorder d Pragmas reorder and noreorder in section 4 5 Pragmas 4 56 Chapter 4 On ON Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable NOP removal by peephole optimizer E On ON Default On Description With On you enable NOP removal by peephole optimizer With ON you disable NOP removal by peephole optimizer Compiler Use 4 57 Oo 00 Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Code order rearranging in flow optimization Oo OO Default Oo Description With Oo you enable code rearranging in flow optimization Try to move sub expressions to get faster code Some debuggers may have difficulties with such options With OO you disable code rearranging 4 58 Chapter 4 Op OP Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select O
153. RD PUBLIC CINITERAM MOD_ED_NB RAM space Table 3 10 Section names initialized romdata Example File mod c contains the following initialized romdata pragma eramdata int i 1 default near data pragma iramdata _far int j 2 Generated assembly compiled with Ms MOD_ER_NB SECTION PDAT WORD PUBLIC CINITROM MOD_ER_NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE DW Olh MOD_ER_NB ENDS MOD_ED NB SECTION LDAT WORD PUBLIC CINITERAM MOD_ED NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE i LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC i MOD_ED_NB ENDS 3 34 Chapter 3 MOD_IR_FB SECTION PDAT WORD PUBLIC CINITROM MOD_IR_ FB ENTRY LABEL BYTE DW 02h MOD_IR_FB ENDS MOD_ID FB SECTION PDAT WORD PUBLIC CINITIRAM MOD_ID FB ENTRY LABEL BYTE Jj LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC j MOD_ID FB ENDS III Specials The following special section names exist C166_INIT init table for initialized RAM C166_BSS clear table for non initialized RAM C166_US user stack C166_USO user stack for local register bank 0 C166_US1 user stack for local register bank 1 C166_INT scalable interrupt vector table C166 HEAP heap section for memory allocation linker or locator generated INTVECT interrupt vector table locator generated You can NOT change the section attributes of this category c166 uses the following table for its defaults Description type align combine class fixed Mm Mt type type section MI Ms name user stack DATA LDAT WORD GLBUSRSTACK
154. ROM only allocation int j 100 2 bytes in ROM char q WXYZ 5 bytes in ROM for WXYZ 2 bytes in ROM for p C166 treats romdata variables as if they were declared with the const storage type qualifier 3 9 NON INITIALIZED VARIABLES In some cases there is a need to keep variables unchanged even if power is turned off In these systems some of the RAM is implemented in EEPROM or in a battery powered memory device In a simulator environment clearing non initialized variables might not be wanted too To avoid the clearing of non initialized variables at startup one of the following things should be performed 1 Define allocate these variables in a special C module and compile this module using the Ob option c166 will omit these data sections when building the C166_BSS section Q From EDE from the Projects menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Allocation of Variables Disable the check box Perform clearing of non initialized static public variables 2 Define allocate these variables between pragma noclear and pragma clear c166 will omit these data sections when building the C166_BSS section amp The last pragma no clear before or in a function applies to all static global variables in or outside a function 3 70 7 3 4 amp amp 6 Chapter 3 Use inline assembly to allocate the special variables in a special data s
155. Results of a Build Once the files have been processed you can see which commands have been executed and inspect generated messages by the build process in the Build tab of the Output window This window is normally open but if it is closed you can open it by selecting the Output menu item in the Window menu Compiling a Single File 1 Select the window document containing the file you want to compile or assemble 2 Click on the Execute Compile command button The following button is the execute Compile button which is located in the toolbar If you selected the file hello c this results in the compiled and assembled file hello obj 2 24 Chapter 2 Rebuild your Entire Application If you want to compile assemble and link locate all files of your project from scratch regardless of their date time stamp you can perform a rebuild e Click on the Execute Rebuild command button The following button is the execute Rebuild button which is located in the toolbar 2 10 HOW TO BUILD YOUR APPLICATION ON THE 1 2 COMMAND LINE If you are not using EDE you can build your entire application on the command line The easiest way is to use the control program cc166 In a text editor write the file hello c with the following contents include lt stdio h gt void main void printf Hello World n Build the file getstart abs ccl66 g ieee o getstart abs hello c The control
156. SDAT non paged anywhere Table 3 4 Small memory data section types LDAT and PDAT section types are not allowed in segmented data mode The only section type allowed in a DGROUP is the DATA type not HDAT Language Implementation 3 13 3 2 1 3 MEDIUM MEMORY MODEL The compiler assumes that the CSP register contains the initial value of 0 which allows code access in the first 64K segment The four DPP registers do not contain the system startup values The DPP registers are used to access the 16M of data in 16K pages Because the paging principle is used with 14 bit address arithmetic data objects e g arrays cannot be greater than 16K one page unless the _huge or _shuge keyword is used The _huge keyword tells the compiler to generate 24 bit address arithmetic The _shuge keyword tells the compiler to generate 16 bit address arithmetic Because paging is used the processor must run in segmented mode Exceptional access to code beyond 64K is possible declaring a huge function However it is not allowed for such a huge function to call any standard C or run time library function or any other near function in the first segment In section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models some details are present about efficiency in large data models Map example 256K huge data shuge data normal data near data normal data 64K xnear aata code o Figure 3 3 Medium
157. Stack Model 3 30 Chapter 3 7 3 2 3 SECTION ALLOCATION Unlike some other microcontrollers the C166 ST10 microcontroller does not have different memory spaces with the same address This means that a non automatic object can be referred to solely by its starting address because the address represents a unique memory location There is also no difference in assembly code accessing internal RAM external RAM internal ROM or external ROM within the same page segment The processor however distinguishes memory access in execution speed Code access to internal ROM is faster than access to external ROM Data access to internal RAM is faster than access to external RAM So a piece of assembly code executes faster if the code is allocated in internal ROM instead of external ROM And the same piece of code gets an even higher execution speed if the data structures accessed are allocated in internal RAM instead of external RAM In the C166 ST10 compiler the code generator does not have to know if internal or external RAM is accessed because the same code can be generated Execution speed is in fact a matter of allocating sections in internal memory instead of external memory The allocation of sections is done by the locator stage of 1166 and can be manipulated by specifying a memory range for each class of sections c166 allows you to control the class align type and combine type of a section with a command line option e g R
158. With Ox you enable extra inlining of C library functions It is only worthwhile to inline C library functions which are very small and frequently used Therefore only the following C library functions are inlined in small and tiny memory model Inlining C library functions is not conform the ANSI C standard Extra inlining will be disabled when compiling with inlining allowed see option Ai AI Remember that you cannot take the address of an inline function and you cannot define one of these functions yourself when Ox is active The next C library functions are inlined for tiny and small memory model strcpyQ strlenQ strchrO strempQ strcat memset memcpy With OX you disable extra inlining of the C library functions mentioned above Compiler Use 4 67 O Option o file Arguments An output filename The filename may not start immediately after the option There must be a tab or space in between Default Module name with src suffix Description Use file as output filename instead of the module name with src suffix Special care must be taken when using this option the first o option found acts on the first file to compile the second o option acts on the second file to compile etc Example When specified c166 filel c file2 c o file3 srce o file2 src two files will be created file3 src for the compiled file filel c and file2 src for the compiled file file2 c 4 68 Chapter 4 P
159. YTE _cntrl_reg LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC _cntrl_reg TEST_1_NB ENDS TEST 2 NB SECTION LDAT WORD PUBLIC CNEAR TEST 2 NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE i LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC i TEST 2 NB ENDS 3 2 4 CODE MEMORY FRAGMENTATION By default the compiler uses one section per module that contains the code You can change this behavior with the following pragmas pragma fragment pragma fragment resume pragma fragment continue The pragma fragment causes the compiler to generate each single function in its own section The compiler will continue to do so until it encounters either pragma fragment resume or pragma fragment continue In case of pragma fragment resume the compiler will resume code generation in the last active section with the same attributes before pragma fragment In case of pragma fragment continue the compiler will start a new continuous code These pragmas are especially useful in combination with the smart linking feature of the linker locator When you use smart linking the linker will only link sections that are referenced Thus if each function has its own section only functions that are actually called referenced are linked rather than all functions in an obj file at once 3 38 Chapter 3 7 Example void funcl void Code section 1 pragma fragment void func2 void Code section 2 void func3 void Code section 3 pragma fragment resume void func4 void
160. __cuf44r unsigned long to float conversion R5R4 2 R4R5 Table 3 17 Float conversion subroutines AN 1 Return value on the user stack 2 R5R4 means that the most significant word is stored in RS There is no negation subroutine Its functionality can be achieved by BMOVN R4 15 R4 15 3 16 4 3 REGISTER USAGE SINGLE PRECISION The only registers destroyed by the single precision subroutines are R1 R5 and R10 R11 Language Implementation 3 16 5 DOUBLE PRECISION USAGE Double precision numbers are stored in memory The floating point library passes operands and return values on the user stack 3 16 5 1 DOUBLE BASE EXPRESSION SUBROUTINES Operands return value The first operand is stored in IEEE 754 format on the user stack and referred to by R10 R10 0 R10 2 R10 4 R10 6 seeeeeeeeeeemmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmMMMM mmmmmmmmmmMmMMMMMM mmmmmmmmMmMmMMmMMMMMM s sign e exponent m mantissa The second operand on the user stack is referred to by R11 R11 0 R11 2 R11 4 R11 6 seeeeeeeeeeemmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmMmMMM mmmmmmmmmMmMMMMMMM mmmmmmmmMmMmMMMMMMM s sign e exponent m mantissa The result is stored in the user stack area referred to by R10 R10 0 R10 2 R10 4 R10 6 s sign e exponent m mantissa
161. a jumping mechanism specifying the return address on the user stack The advantage of this approach is that the system stack is not used for the function return address The price paid for this feature is a run time execution speed performance penalty The special libraries needed to support this feature are included in the C and C compiler packages There are two valid reasons to use this option and libraries e RTOS When using a RTOS kernel it is often not allowed to use the system stack area in fact change SP because this area is reserved for the kernel Therefore the P option must be used when using RTOS e Heavy recursion When the system stack area is getting too small and it is not possible to implement a circular system stack approach using SOV SUN exception handlers the P option can be used In this case the compiler uses the user stack instead of the system stack You must link the application with the user stack model libraries Using P does not mean that you have to use a RTOS You can run the application as a standalone application without any kernel The calling convention is explained in more detail in the next chapters The push and pop instructions are only allowed during hardware task switches Nevertheless with the C compiler option Ou it is possible to use the user stack instead of the system stack for hardware task switches See the Ou option in section 4 3 Detailed Description of the Compiler opti
162. a function 5 22 Chapter 5 139 operator cannot have aggregate type The type name in a cast must be a scalar not a struct union ora pointer and also the operand of a cast must be a scalar The following are examples of this error static union ui int a ui ui union ui 9 cannot cast to union ff int ui cannot cast a union to something else 140 type cannot be applied to a register bit bitfield object or builtin inline function For example the amp operator address cannot be used on registers and bit fields So func amp r6 and func amp bitf a are invalid 141 operator requires modifiable lvalue The operand of the 4 or operator and the left operand of an assignment or compound assignment lvalue must be modifiable The following is an example of this error const int i 1 i 3 error const cannot be modified 143 too many initializers There may be no more initializers than there are objects The following is an example of this error static int a l 1 2 error only one object can be initialized 144 enumerator name value out of range An enum constant exceeded the limit for an int The following is an example of this warning enum A INT MAX B warning B does not fit in an int anymore 145 requires enclosing curly braces A complex initializer needs enclosing curly braces For example int a 2 is not valid but in
163. a group C166_DGROUP DPP3 SYSTEM SFR access bit addressable access iram access and system access The threshold value is user definable via the T option The default value is 256 for non initialized static public RAM data The major advantage of this approach is that better performance is achieved with existing C source code However addresses of these variables are still treated far gt huge or shuge 4 bytes for usage with default pointers The introduction of the _near keyword Near forces allocation in the default data group It also allows better pointer arithmetic because a pointer to near 2 bytes instead of 4 bytes is supported And last but not least near public external references are supported assuming DPP2 is used with an external near variable Of course a near address can be converted to a far huge or shuge address The introduction of the _system keyword System forces allocation in the system data group The system data group C166_SGROUP is always located in the system page page 3 It also allows better pointer arithmetic because a pointer to system 2 bytes instead of 4 bytes is supported Public external references are supported assuming DPP3 is used with an external system variable Of course a system address can be converted to a far huge or shuge address Language Implementation 3 21 4 6 The introduction of the _xnear keyword The _xnear keyword forces data to be allo
164. a166 as the shorthand notation for TASKING C166 ST10 Cross Assembler The object file generated by a166 can be linked with other objects and libraries using the TASKING 1166 linker locator This manual uses 1166 as the shorthand notation for TASKING 1166 linker locator With the link stage of 1166 you can link objects and libraries to one object You can locate assembler objects linked objects and libraries to a complete application by using the locate stage of 1166 Chapter 2 The C166 ST10 toolchain also accepts C source files C source files or sources using C language features must be preprocessed by cp166 The output generated by cp166 is C166 ST10 C which can be translated with the C compiler c166 AN The C compiler is not part of the C compiler package You can order it separately from TASKING The C compiler package includes the C compiler as well With the TASKING cc166 control program you can invoke the various components of the C166 ST10 toolchain with one call This manual uses cc166 as the shorthand notation for TASKING cc166 control program You can debug the software written in C C and or assembly with the TASKING CrossView Pro high level language debugger This manual uses XVW166 as the shorthand notation for TASKING CrossView Pro high level language debugger A list of supported platforms and emulators is available from TASKING You can also use other debugging environments supporting the IEEE 6
165. all char variables unsigned check box E u Description Treat character type variables as unsigned character variables By default char is the same as specifying signed char With u char is the same as unsigned char Example With the following command char is treated as unsigned char c166 u test c 4 80 V Option V Description Display version information Example c166 V TASKING C166 ST10 C compiler Copyright years Altium BV vx yrz Build nnn Serial 00000000 Chapter 4 Compiler Use 4 81 W Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics Enable one of the options Display all warnings Suppress all warnings or Suppress only certain warnings and enter the numbers separated by commas of the warnings you want to suppress E winun wstrict Arguments Optionally the warning number to suppress Description w suppress all warning messages wnum only suppresses the given warning wstrict suppresses extensive warnings 183 196 and 216 Example To suppress warning 135 enter c166 filel c w135 4 82 s X Option Chapter 4 From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the Application entry and select Processor From the Processor box select a processor or select User Defined If you selected User Defined expand the Processor entry select User Defined Processor
166. allocation within a C function The compiler tries to keep as much local variables as possible in registers Constant value propagation A reference to a variable with a known contents is replaced by those contents Common subexpression elimination The compiler has the ability to detect repeated uses of the same sub expression Such a common expression may be temporarily saved to avoid recomputation This method is called common subexpression elimination abbreviated CSE Dead code elimination Unreachable code can be removed from the intermediate code without affecting the program However the compiler generates a warning message because the unreachable code may be the result of a coding error Sharing of string literals and floating point constants The ANSI X3 159 1989 standard permits string literals to be put in ROM memory Strings in ROM cannot be modified so the compiler overlays identical strings within the same module and let them share the same space thus saving ROM space Likewise identical floating point constants are overlaid and allocated only once Common Tail Merging Common pieces of code at the end of case labels and if else constructions are replaced by a jump to single instance of the shared code This will reduce code size Overview 2 3 PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT FLOW If you want to build a C 166 application you need to invoke the following programs The C compiler c166 which generates an
167. ame is generated as follows module_number_mem where module is the module name in uppercase without suffix of the c file number is a unique number mem is a memory abbreviation code as shown in the next table You may change the section attributes of this category c166 uses the following table for its defaults e g compiling mod c Description mem type align combine class example Mm Mt type type section name MI Ms bits BI BIT BIT BIT PUBLIC CBITS MOD_1_BI strings floating CO DATA LDAT WORD PUBLIC CROM MOD_2_CO point constants bitwords BA DATA LDAT WORD PUBLIC CBITWORDS MOD_3_BA 3 32 Chapter 3 Description mem type align combine class example Mm Mt type type section name MI Ms near data NB DATA LDAT WORD PUBLIC CNEAR MOD_4_NB xnear data XN DATA WORD PUBLIC CUSTACK MOD_15_XN far data FB DATA PDAT WORD PUBLIC CFAR MOD_5_FB huge data HB HDAT HDAT WORD PUBLIC CHUGE MOD_6_HB shuge data XB SDAT SDAT WORD PUBLIC CSHUGE MOD_7_XB functions PR CODE CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM MOD_8_PR near romdata NC DATA LDAT WORD PUBLIC CNEAR MOD_9_NC xnear romdata XR DATA WORD PUBLIC CUSTACK MOD_16_XR far romdata FC DATA PDAT WORD PUBLIC CFARROM MOD_10_FC huge romdata HC HDAT HDAT WORD PUBLIC CHUGEROM MOD_11_HC shuge romdata XC SDAT SDAT WORD PUBLIC CSHUGEROM MOD_12_XC system data SB DATA DATA WORD PUBLIC CSYSTEM M
168. and make your changes E x 1 2 22 Arguments Optional features d ST10 with support for the MAC co processor 1 C166S v1 0 architecture 2 XC16x Super10 architecture 22 Enhanced Super10 architecture Description The x option selects the processor architecture X xd x22 default selects the standard C166 extended architecture as used by the Infineon C16x and STMicroelectronics ST10 Selects the standard ST10 extended architecture with MAC co processor support such as the ST10x272 Enables support for the C166S v1 0 architecture Enables support for the XC16x Super10 architecture including support for the MAC co processor Furthermore this option automatically enables instruction reordering Enables support for enhanced Super10 such as the Super10M345 This includes support for the MAC co processor with extra CoMAC instructions like CoSHL with rounding A third local register bank is allowed Furthermore this option automatically enables instruction reordering If this is not wanted use pragma noreorder to switch this feature off Or use the znoreorder command line option Compiler Use Example To use an Infineon XC167 enter c166 x2 file c Gb Pragma reorder in section 4 5 Pragmas 4 83 4 84 Chapter 4 7 Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option to the Additional options field
169. ar is invalid suboption See the description of the x option for the correct syntax 5 38 Chapter 5 579 offset must be a constant value between 0 and 15 The bit offset used in _atbit must be a constant value between 0 and 15 the bit position in an integer 580 REGDEF is too small for register arguments parameter of name use stackparm The number of registers is too small for parameter passing Pass the arguments over the user stack You can use the stackparm keyword for this purpose 582 REGDEF RO R3S is minimum registerbank If you specify a number of GPRs to the r option or pragma regdef it must have a value in the range 6 16 inclusive 583 Fchar is invalid suboption See the description of the F option for the correct syntax 585 duplicate function qualifier name number ignored Only one function qualifier is allowed The number within parentheses indicates which of the qualifiers is ignored 0 being the first occurrence 586 duplicate function qualifier name Only one function qualifier is allowed The duplicate qualifier is ignored 587 number illegal interrupt bank number min to max ignored An interrupt number must be in the range 0 to 127 or 1 A register bank number must be in the range 1 to 255 588 name not allowed with name or name3 ignored This is an illegal function qualifier combination Functon qualifier namel is ignored 589 interrupt function must have vo
170. argument list this function expects a pointer to the list Returns the number of wide characters transmitted or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred wertomb include lt wchar h gt size_t wcrtomb char s wchar_t wc mbstate _t ps Determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multi byte character that corresponds to the wide character given by we including any shift sequences It stores the multi byte character representation in the array pointed to by s if s is not a null pointer At most MB _CUR_MAX characters are stored If we is a null wide character a null byte is stored preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state the resulting state described is the initial conversion state Returns the number of bytes or size_t 1 if the value of we does not correspond to a valid wide character Libraries 6 97 wescat include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wcscat wchar_t sl const wchar_t s2 Concatenates a copy of wide string s2 to string s1 including the trailing null wide character The initial wide character of s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1 Returns sl weschr include lt wchar h gt wchar_t weschr const wchar t s wchar t c Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of wide character c in the wide string s If not found NULL is returned wcescmp include lt wchar h gt int wcscmp const wchar_t sl const wchar
171. ata pointed by src to shuge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcpy include lt string h gt void memcpy void s const void ct size t n Copies n characters from ct to s No care is taken if the two objects overlap Returns s memmove include lt string h gt void memmove void s const void ct size t n Copies n characters from ct to s Overlapping objects will be handled correctly Returns s Libraries 6 67 memset include lt string h gt void memset void s int c size tn Fills the first n bytes of s with character c Returns s mktime include lt time h gt time t mktime struct tm tp Converts the local time in the structure tp into calendar time Returns the calendar time in seconds or 1 if it cannot be represented modf include lt math h gt double modf double x double ip Splits x into integral and fractional parts each with the same sign as x It stores the integral part in ip Returns the fractional part ncealloc include lt stdlib h gt void near ncalloc size_t nobj size_t size Near variant of calloc Q See section 7 3 Heap Size 6 68 Chapter 6 7 nfree include lt stdlib h gt void nfree void near p Deallocates the space pointed to by p p Must point to space earlier A allocated by a call to ncallocQ nmallocO or nrea
172. ate Local P Public C Common G Global S Sysstack U Usrstack A address Absolute section AT constant address decimal octal or hexadecimal number 3 36 Chapter 3 7 Examples 1 The C module is called test c The example illustrates how to allocate one array in a special section with the class SLOWRAM and the rest of the data in data section with default attributes The generated code is listed below C pragma class nb SLOWRAM int array 1000 pragma default_attributes int j Generated code TEST_1 NB SECTION LDAT WORD PUBLIC SLOWRAM TEST_1 NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE _array LABEL WORD DS 2000 PUBLIC _array TEST_1 NB ENDS TEST 2 NB SECTION LDAT WORD PUBLIC CNEAR TEST 2 NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC _j TEST 2 NB ENDS 2 The C module is called test c The example illustrates how to allocate one C variable on a fixed memory location address 8000H and the rest of the data in a data section with default attributes As described in the TASKING C166 ST10 Cross Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Manual AT is considered as an additional align type and implies the default combine type PRIVATE C pragma combine nb A32768 volatile int entrl_reg e g an I O register of peripheral chip pragma default_attributes int i Language Implementation 3 37 Generated code TEST_1 NB SECTION LDAT WORD AT 08000h CNEAR TEST _1 NB ENTRY LABEL B
173. ate control AD LINEAR page 8 Example I Using locate control SND DPPO 10 DPP1 12 DPP2 7 AN normal data sections can contain both RAM data and ROM data 3 10 Chapter 3 7 Map example I Map example II 256K 256K far data far data huge data huge data shuge data shuge data code page 10 DPP2 page 9 normal data DPP1 code page 8 DPPO code 64K 64K page 3 DPP3 page 3 normal data DPP3 page 2 normal data DPP2 page 1 DPP1 code page 0 code DPPO 0 o Map example Ill 256K far data huge data shuge data page 12 normal data DPP1 code page 10 normal data DPPO code page 7 normal data DPP2 code 64K page 3 normal data DPP3 code 0 Figure 3 2 Small memory map examples Language Implementation Item Usage Comments CPU segmented code gt 64K allows code anywhere in 256K 16M normal data lt 64K 64Kb of fast accessible user data using direct MEM addressing mode Except for map III SND control the size of a single user data object is not limited to 16K 16 bit address arithmetic Also contains ROM data far data allowed optional supports far data paged access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single far object is limited to 16K Far data access is less fast than normal data access huge data allowed optional supports huge data access anywhere
174. ator shall be followed by macro parameter The operator must be followed by a macro argument 81 operator shall not occur at beginning or end of a macro The token concatenation operator is used to paste together adjacent preprocessor tokens so it cannot be used at the beginning or end of a macro body 86 escape character truncated to 8 bit value The value of a hexadicimal escape sequence a backslash followed by a x and a number must fit in 8 bits storage The number of bits per character may not be greater than 8 The following is an example of this warning char c xabc error 87 concatenated string too long The resulting string was longer than the limit of 1500 characters 88 name redeclared with different linkage The specified identifier was already declared This warning is issued when you try to redeclare an object with a different basic storage class and both objects are not declared extern or static The following is an example of this warning int i int i error E 64 and warning 89 illegal bitfield declarator A bit field may only be declared as an integer not as a pointer or a function for example So struct int a 1 s is not allowed 90 error message The message is the descriptive text supplied in a error preprocessor directive 5 16 7 W Chapter 5 91 no prototype for function name Each function should have a valid function pr
175. ave FLEXIm on your system you must install it otherwise the product will not work on those hosts See section 1 4 Licensing TASKING Products If the script detects that the software has been installed before the following messages appear on the screen xxx WARNING SWXXXXXX XXXX XXxXX already installed Do you want to REINSTALL y n Answering n no to this question causes installation to abort and the following message being displayed gt Installation stopped on user request lt Software Installation 1 5 Answering y yes to this question causes installation to continue And the final message will be Installation of SWxxxxxx XXXX XXXX completed 5 If you purchased a protected TASKING product license the software product as explained in section 1 4 Licensing TASKING Products 1 3 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Now you have installed the software you can configure both the Embedded Development Environment and the command line environment for Windows and Solaris 1 3 1 CONFIGURING THE EMBEDDED DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT After installation the Embedded Development Environment is automatically configured with default search paths to find the executables include files and libraries In most cases you can use these settings To change the default settings follow the next steps 1 Double click on the EDE icon on your desktop to start the Embedded Development Environment EDE 2 From the Project menu
176. before use 21 22 23 24 2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 R A A R R R A A R R R R R R R A R R R A A R Appendix A Identifiers shall not hide identifiers in an outer scope Declarations should be at function scope where possible All declarations at file scope should be static where possible Identifiers shall not have both internal and external linkage Identifiers with external linkage shall have exactly one definition Multiple declarations for objects or functions shall be compatible External objects should not be declared in more than one file The register storage class specifier should not be used The use of a tag shall agree with its declaration All automatics shall be initialized before being used Braces shall be used in the initialization of arrays and structures Only the first or all enumeration constants may be initialized The right hand operand of amp amp or shall not contain side effects The operands of a logical amp amp or shall be primary expressions Assignment operators shall not be used in Boolean expressions Logical operators should not be confused with bitwise Operators Bitwise operations shall not be performed on signed integers A shift count shall be between 0 and the operand width minus 1 The unary m
177. ble generation of MOV B Rn Rm data16 instructions The generation of this instruction is not disabled in some of the intrinsic functions since the source operand always refers to internal RAM here This a bypass for the CPU1R006 functional problem as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems u Default Assume hardware environment is present where there is no need to protect the execution of multiply instructions against interrupts Emit inline code MUL MULV instead of a run time library call You must use the non protected version of the libraries Lib ext 1ib U This option emits code to protect multiply operations against interrupts The protection will be generated inline using ATOMIC instructions Use the protected version of the libraries lib extp 1ib This is a bypass for CPU problems CPU 11 and problem 17 Zc166svidiv Do not generate unprotected division instructions This is a bypass for the CR105893 functional problem Zno_c166svidiv Default Allow generation of unprotected division instructions Zc166sviext Do not jump from extend sequences This is a bypass for the CR107092 functional problem Zno_c166sviext Default Jump from extend sequences Zc166sv1jbc Do not use JBC and JNBS instructions unless the first operand is a GPR This is a bypass for the CR105981 functional problem Zno_Zc166sv1jbc Default Always use JBC and JNBS instructions Zc166svitrap Insert a NOP before a TRAP instructi
178. by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing Libraries 6 65 memcpshw include lt string h gt void memcpshw void huge dest void shuge src size t n Copies n words from shuge data pointed by src to huge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcpsnb include lt string h gt void memcpsnb void near dest void shuge src size t n Copies n bytes from shuge data pointed by src to near data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for shuge data but not for near data 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpsnw include lt string h gt void memcpsnw void near dest void shuge src size t n Copies n words from shuge data pointed by src to near data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for shuge data but not for near data 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing 6 66 7 Chapter 6 memcpssb include lt string h gt void memcpssb void shuge dest void shuge src size t n Copies n bytes from shuge data pointed by src to shuge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpssw include lt string h gt void memcpssw void shuge dest void shuge src size t n Copies n words from shuge d
179. cINB NEARRAM changes the class of non initialized near data to NEARRAM for this module The disadvantage of this method is that the changed attributes are used for the complete C module However using pragmas c166 allows more flexibility of storage specification within a C module In this approach it is possible to declare for example only a few C variables of a module to be allocated in a special section which must be PEC addressable and the rest in normal data sections Or only one function of the module in internal ROM and the rest in external ROM Language Implementation 3 31 Naming convention c166 uses a naming convention for the generated sections In general the following modifications are applied to a filename whitespace and dots are converted to underscores filenames are converted to uppercase ifa filename starts with a digit the first digit is replaced by an underscore Everything after and including the last dot is stripped from the filename Thus the filename long file name c will result in the following string to be used as a basis for the section name in the text below referred to as module LONG FILE NAME The length of a filename is unlimited Furthermore the section naming is divided into three categories as described below I Non initialized Data Sections Normal Sections Romdata Sections For non initialized data sections normal sections and romdata sections the section n
180. cated in the data group C166_XGROUP Variables in the xnear memory space have the same properties as near variables The C166_XGROUP contains variables in the xnear data space and the user stack The size of xnear data and the user stack size cannot exceed 16Kb Objects in the xnear data space are accessed through DPP1 Of course an xnear address can be converted to a far huge or shuge address C supports so called tentative declarations which means that a declaration such as int i remains tentative during the module until defining occurrence is given e g via int i 5 If such does not happen it is for example allowed to declare this variable to be external at the end of the module Because this programming style is not very common probably only needed for generated C source the compiler option Ot is available to assign defining occurrence immediately to every tentative declaration allowing more data to be optimized This option is default on using the medium large huge model lazy programmers often forget the static attribute of public non initialized variables which are only used in one module If the tentative property described above is really used in a C program a double definition error will occur In this case the option must be turned off OT for this module or the module must be edited of course Using OT results in more code and slower execution C166_DGROUP sectio
181. cation syntax of the C166 compiler is 166 option file The input file must have the extension c or i Options are preceded by a minus sign Options cannot be combined after a single After you have successfully compiled your C sources the compiler has generated assembly files with the extension src the default for a166 AN When you use a UNIX shell Bourne shell C shell arguments containing special characters such as Y and must be enclosed with or escaped The option in the C shell becomes or A summary of the options is given below A more detailed description is given in the next section Dmacro def R cl co al mem new S Tsize Option Description Display invocation syntax Afflag Enable disable specific language extensions Biflag Control CPU problem bypasses Define preprocessor macro E m c i p x Preprocess only F flag Control floating point Ggroupname Use groupname to group near data sections Mm MI or Mh only Hfile Include file before starting compilation Idirectory Look in directory for include files M t s m l h Select memory model tiny small medium large or huge Ofiag Control optimization P d Use user stack model stack frame calling convention to be used with special stack frame C library if d is not specified Change class name combine type or align type of
182. cessor as a prefix for a number of so called atomic instructions thus uninterruptable Far huge shuge data access produces extra code and results into slow execution Therefore accessing far huge shuge data must be an exception within the application The majority of the execution time of the application should be dealing with normal data otherwise it is better to use the large model allowing more efficient usage of far huge shuge data Far data is allocated in PDAT sections telling the assembler linker locator that a paged section must be checked to be in page is needed which can be anywhere in memory Huge data is allocated in HDAT sections specifying that a non paged no checking for 16K is needed which can be anywhere in memory Shuge data is allocated in SDAT sections which have the same properties as HDAT sections The difference is that address calculations on shuge data is done in 16 bit rather than in 32 bit as with huge data This implies that no shuge object can exceed 64K The following scheme is used for the data section types Section NON SEGMENTED DATA SEGMENTED DATA type tiny small medium large huge meaning location meaning location DATA paged lt 16K 1st segment lt 64K paged 16K anywhere LDAT linear lt 64K tiny 1st segment lt 64K small method I II or Ill PDAT paged lt 16K anywhere HDAT non paged anywhere non paged anywhere
183. character pushed back or WEOF on error unlink include lt unistd h gt int unlink const char name Removes the named file so that a subsequent attempt to open it fails This function calls _unlink Returns zero if file is successfully removed or a non zero value if the attempt fails 6 94 Chapter 6 7 va_arg include lt stdarg h gt va_arg va_list ap type Returns the value of the next argument in the variable argument list It s return type has the type of the given argument type A next call to this macro will return the value of the next argument va_end include lt stdarg h gt va_end va_list ap This macro must be called after the arguments have been processed It should be called before the function using the macro va_start is terminated ANSI specification va_start include lt stdarg h gt va_start va_list ap lastarg This macro initializes ap After this call each call to va_argQ will return the value of the next argument In our implementation va_list cannot contain any bit type variables Also the given argument lastarg must be the last non bit type argument in the list ufprintf include lt stdio h gt int vfprintf FILE stream const char format va_list arg Is equivalent to vprintf but writes to the given stream d gt See also vprintf0 and _write0 Libraries 6 95 vprintf include lt stdio h gt int vprintf const char for
184. checking to your application db 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Select a MISRA C configuration Select a predefined configuration for conformance with the required rules in the MISRA C guidelines It is also possible to have a project team work with a MISRA C configuration common to the whole project In this case the MISRA C configuration can be read from an external settings file 4 Optional In the MISRA C Rules entry specify the individual rules From the command line MISRA C can be enabled by the following compiler option misracn n where 7 specifies the rule s which must be checked See Appendix A MISRA C for the supported and unsupported MISRA C rules 3 142 Chapter 3 7 3 20 PEC SUPPORT c166 supports the initialization of the PEC source and destination pointers using a int cast in C The following example shows how to allocate a PEC addressable section for a buffer in the first 64K segment include lt reg166 h gt if MODEL 1 _MODEL m pragma align fb c declare PECADDRESSABLE data section for far data pragma class fb firstsegment assign a special class name to this section 7 char _far buffer 100 explicitly _far otherwise allocated in default data group pragma default_attributes restore default section attributes for far
185. code Enable automatic C register variable allocation unless overruled by the rnr option If you do not want a certain automatic to be allocated in a register e g setjmp longjmp pair used you can declare this variable to be volatile and yet still use the Or option With OR you disable automatic C register variable allocation Compiler Use 4 61 Os OS Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Use smart approach for switch statement do not force jump table E Os OS Default OS Description With Os you force the compiler to generate jump tables for switch statements With OS the compiler chooses the best switch method possible jump chain or jump table So with OS a jump table can still be generated Example Compile with OS generate jump chain Compile with Os generate jump table int i void main void switch i case 1 i 0 case 2 i 1 case 3 i 2 default i 3 d gt Section 3 14 Switch Statement Pragmas switch_force_table and switch_smart in section 4 5 Pragmas 4 62 Chapter 4 7 Ot OT Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Allocation of Variables Select an item from the Tentative declarations box E Ot OT Defau
186. comes or The control program recognizes the following argument types e Arguments starting with a character are options Some options are interpreted by cc166 itself the remaining options are passed to those programs in the toolchain that accept the option e Arguments which are known by cc166 as a control are passed to those programs in the toolchain that accept the control e Arguments with a cc cxx or cpp suffix are interpreted as C source programs and are passed to the C compiler e Arguments with a c suffix are interpreted as C source programs and are passed to the compiler e Arguments with a asm suffix are interpreted as assembly source files which are preprocessed and passed to the assembler e Arguments with a src suffix are interpreted as preprocessed assembly source files They are directly passed to the assembler e Arguments with a 1ib suffix are interpreted as library file and passed to the link stage of 1166 when the cf option is not specified When the cf is specified the libraries are passed to the locate stage e Arguments with a ili suffix are interpreted as linker invocation files and are passed to the link stage of 1166 with a leading sign e Arguments with a ilo suffix are interpreted as locator invocation files and are passed to the locate stage of 1166 with a leading sign 4 4 Chapter 4 e Arguments with a out suffix are interpretes as input files
187. compiler option xd x2 or x22 The CoSHL instruction has a maximum value for count Check your CPU manual for the CoSHL behaviour for large arguments Returns nothing _CoSHL 2 CoSHL 02h Language Implementation 3 115 _CoSHR void _CoSHR unsigned int count Use the CoSHR instruction to logical shift right the contents of the MAC accumulator count times Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 The CoSHR instruction has a maximum value for count Check your CPU manual for the CoSHR behaviour for large arguments Returns nothing _CoSHR 2 CoSHR 02h _CoSTORE long _CoSTORE void Use the CoSTORE instruction to retrieve the 32 bit value stored in the MAC accumulator MAH and MAL Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns 32 bit value from MAH and MAL x _CoSTORE CoSTORE R13 MAH CoSTORE R12 MAL _CoSTOREMAH int _CoSTOREMAH void Use the CoSTORE instruction to retrieve the 16 bit value stored in MAH Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns 16 bit value from MAH x _COSTOREMAH CoSTORE R12 MAH 3 116 Chapter 3 7 _CoSTOREMAL int _CoSTOREMAL void Use the CoSTORE instruction to retrieve the 16 bit value stored in MAL Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the comp
188. cs 5 3 5 1 INTRODUCTION c166 has three classes of messages user errors warnings and internal compiler errors Some user error messages carry extra information which is displayed by the compiler after the normal message The messages with extra information are marked with T in the list below and never appear without a previous error message and error number The number of the information message is not important and therefore this number is not displayed A user error can also be fatal marked as F in the list below which means that the compiler aborts compilation immediately after displaying the error message and may generate a not complete output file The error numbers and warning numbers are divided in two groups The frontend part of the compiler uses numbers in the range 0 to 499 whereas the backend code generator part of the compiler uses numbers in the range 500 and higher Note that most error messages and warning messages are produced by the frontend If a non fatal user error occurs during compilation c166 displays the C source line that contains the error the error number and the error message on the screen If the error is generated by the code generator the C source line displayed always is the last line of the current C function because code generation is started when the end of the function is reached by the front end However in this case c166 displays the line number causing the error before
189. ct Memory Model Select the Medium or Large memory model Expand the C Compiler entry and select Allocation of Variables Enter a size in the Threshold for automatic near data allocation field E Tsize or T size size2 Arguments The maximum threshold size in bytes size Or the threshold size for initialized variables size2 Default T256 Description With this option you can specify a maximum size threshold for allocating data in default data sections This is useful when you want to limit the size of the default data group You can use this option in the medium and large model only Initialized variables have an infinite threshold by default Unless a threshold is specified by a second argument to the T option they are always allocated in the default far data sections Example To allocate values of maximum 128 bytes long in default far data sections enter c166 T128 Mm test c Gb Section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge Compiler Use t Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Output Enable the Display module summary check box a Description With this option the C compiler produces totals a module summary on stdout and writes section information in an output file Example c166 MODULE Code s t test c SUMMARY ize bytes Constant size bytes Near data size bytes Far data s
190. ct Options dialog in EDE but cannot be selected grayed out During compilation of the code violations of the enabled MISRA C rules are indicated with error messages and the build process is halted For example E 209 MISRA C rule 9 violation comments shall not be nested You can change the level of error messages from errors to warnings on the required MISRA C rules and the advisory MISRA C rules with the following C compiler command line options misrac required warnings misrac advisory warnings Language Implementation 3 141 B Note that not all MISRA C violations will be reported when other errors are detected in the input source For instance when there is a syntax error all semantic checks will be skipped including some of the MISRA C checks Also note that some checks cannot be performed when the optimizations are switched off Quality Assurance report To ensure compliance to the MISRA C rules throughout the entire project the TASKING C166 ST10 Linker Locator can generate a MISRA C Quality Assurance report This report lists the various modules in the project with the respective MISRA C settings at the time of compilation You can use this in your company s quality assurance system to provide proof that company rules for best practice programming have been applied in the particular project If the MISRA C error level is set to warnings then the MISRA C rules are marked as checked Apply MISRA C code
191. ct menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Optimization of interrupt frame code for C interrupt functions E Oh OH Default Oh Description With Oh you enable optimization of interrupt frame code for C interrupt functions With Oh you disable optimization of interrupt frame code for C interrupt functions d Section 3 12 Interrupt in chapter Language Implementation 4 52 Chapter 4 Oj OJ Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Peephole optimizer remove redundant code E oj 0J Default Oj Description With Oj you enable peephole optimization Remove redundant code With OJ you disable peephole optimization lb Optimization option NOP removal On Compiler Use 4 53 Ok OK Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Trace contents of registers for reuse without reloading G Ok OK Default Ok Description With Ok you trace the contents of registers and try to reuse the registers without reloading With OK you disable register contents tracing Example Compil
192. cter Returns the converted character Libraries 6 23 _tzset include lt time h gt int _tzset const char s Converts the widely used time zone format string pointed to by s to tzone format That string takes the form ESTOSEDT where the number in the middle counts the hours West of UTC Returns one if successful or zero on error _unlink include lt stdio h gt int _unlink const char name Low level file remove function unlink is used by the function remove _urite include lt stdio h gt size_t _write int fd char buffer size t count Low level block ouput function It writes a block of characters to the given stream This function interfaces to CrossView Pro s I O Simulation feature Returns the number of characters correctly written abort include lt stdlib h gt void abort void Terminates the program abnormally Returns nothing 6 24 Chapter 6 abs include lt stdlib h gt int abs int n Returns the absolute value of the signed int argument access include lt unistd h gt int access const char name int mode Use the file system simulation feature of CrossView Pro to check the permissions of a file on the host mode specifies the type of access and is a bit pattern constructed by a logical OR of the following values R OK Checks read permission W_OK Checks write permission X OK Checks execute search permission F OK Checks to see if the file ex
193. ction with a static prototype misses its definition W 213 invalid string character constant in non active part of source This part of the source is skipped 214 second occurence of pragma asm or asm noflush 215 pragma endasm without a pragma asm W 216 suggest parentheses around assignment used as truth value In the example below W 216 will be generated because of a suspicious assignment within an if condition int func int a int b intc if a b return c return a W 225 dereferencing void pointer A void pointer cannot be dereferenced The following is an example of this warning volatile void p void f void D return W 227 MISRA C rule number violation rule F 228 MISRA C rule number violation rule A specified MISRA C rule is violated 5 34 Chapter 5 e Backend W 501 initializer was truncated Some most significant bits are non zero Due to a cast the most significant bits are stripped off F 504 allocation of data type exceeds limitK memory memory A memory overflow occurred Use a larger memory model or specify a larger storage type data type can be one of data automatic data or code When memory is program then try to split the module into separate ones on function basis It is usually sufficient to split the module into two separate ones each having about the half of the program code of the original module Program code of a single functio
194. ctory C target examples Filename pe v Look in same directory for external workspace Workspace Type J Auto syne workspace Browse WK Cancel Help In the the Filename field enter a name for your project space for example MyProjects Click the Browse button to select a directory first and enter a filename Check the directory and filename and click OK to create the psp file in the directory shown in the dialog A project space information file with the name MyProjects psp is created and the Project Properties dialog box appears with the project space selected 2 18 OVERVIEW Chapter 2 Project Properties lt Default Settings gt g MyProjects 0 Projects Add a new project to the project space 4 In the Project Properties dialog click on the Add new project to project space button see previous figure The Add New Project to Project Space dialog appears Add New Project to Project Space getstart getstart pit M E Auto spre makere Overview 2 19 5 Give your project a name for example getstart getstart pjt a directory name to hold your project files is optional and click OK A project file with the name getstart pjt is created in the directory getstart which is also created The Project Properties dialog box appears with the project selected Project Properties x lt Default Settings gt b EJ MyProjects 1 Pro
195. ctronics reference ST_BUS 1 Use compiler option BJ Use libraries lib u Jextp lib When a JMPS instruction is followed by a PEC transfer the generated PEC source address is false This results in an incorrect PEC transfer The compiler prevents the JMPS instruction from interfering with the PEC transfers by inserting an ATOMIC 2 instruction before a JMPS instruction This bypass option can only be used in combination with the extended instuction set Further more all JMPS instructions in the interrupt vector table are replaced by CALLS instructions The compiler will generate an ADD SP 04h instruction in the interrupt frame to delete the return address generated by the CALLS instruction from the system stack The assembler contains the CHECKSTBUS1 control to check for this CPU problem AN The instruction to delete the return address from the system stack is part of the interrupt frame and will NOT be generated if pragma noframe was used USER STACK MODEL all TASKING M XIGNAddV User Stack Model D 3 1_ INTRODUCTION This appendix describes the special coding methods used in the libraries and C166 ST10 C compiler to support a special stack frame This appendix describes a user stack model approach which is used in a special version of the libraries If you use the P option of c166 the compiler does not emit the regular CALL RET instructions when calling a C function but emits code using
196. d Check that a prototype for each function is present before the actual call 14 inserted An expression statement needs a semicolon For example after i in int i i 15 missing filename after o option The o option must be followed by an output filename 16 bad numerical constant A constant must conform to its syntax For example 08 violates the octal digit syntax Also a constant may not be too large to be represented in the type to which it was assigned For example int i 0x1234567890 is too large to fit in an integer 17 string too long This error occurs if the maximum string size 1500 is reached Reduce the size of the string 18 illegal character Oxhexnumber The character with the hexadecimal ASCII value Oxbexnumber is not allowed here For example the character with hexadecimal value 0x23 to be used as a preprocessor command may not be preceded by non white space characters The following is an example of this error 5 8 E Chapter 5 char s S error 19 newline character in constant The newline character can appear in a character constant or string constant only when it is preceded by a backslash To break a string that is on two lines in the source file do one of the following e End the first line with the line continuation character a backslash A e Close the string on the first line with a double quotation mark and open the string on the next line with another
197. d otherwise compiler pre calculated offsets are affected Keep these restrictions in mind when writing your own bank switch function The bank switch function is a run time library function and not a C function The compiler emits a special class reflecting the bank number for the code section of a banked function e g class BANK1 You can use these class names with the locator OVERLAY control 3 138 Chapter 3 The bank switch function depends on the hardware implementation of the code banking mechanism There are many possible hardware implementations for code memory banking e g paged segmented etc this makes it impossible to write a uniform bank switch function which can be appended to the run time library functions Therefore a bank switch function for simulating code banking on directly accessible memory is delivered in the library This allows to test your application on an evaluation board without having the real hardware implementation available Finally you can use the skeleton of the delivered assembly bank switch function to write your own bank switch function supporting your hardware implementation The delivered simulation routine assumes the following situation The different code banks are located in physical memory but they are treated as if they are located in virtual c q banked memory The code banking is simulated by copying the page the banked code is located in to a reserved page where the code is executed
198. d 16 bit values from the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoMACu_min argl arg2 CoMACu R12 R13 3 112 Chapter 3 7 _CoMAX void _CoMAX long x Use the CoMAX instruction to change the MAC accumulator s contents if its value is lower than the argument s value Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoMAX argl CoMAX R12 R13 CoMIN void _CoMIN long x Use the CoMIN instruction to change the MAC accumulator s contents if its value is higher than the argument s value Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoMIN argl CoMIN R12 R13 _CoMUL void _CoMUL int x int y Use the CoMUL instruction to store the multiplication result of two signed 16 bit values in the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Note that the MP flag influences the result it is highly recommended to keep the MP flag cleared Returns nothing _CoMUL argl arg2 CoMUL R12 R13 Language Implementation 3 113 _CoMULsu void _CoMULsu int x unsigned int y Use the CoMULsu instruction to store the multiplication result of a signed 16 bit value with an unsigned 16 bit value in the MAC
199. d for far pointer comparison instead of long 32 bit arithmetic Only the page offset is compared Far pointers do not cross page boundaries and if the objects pointing to are not members of the same aggregate or union object the result is undefined When far pointers are compared to NULL 32 bit arithmetic is needed 32 bit arithmetic is used for far pointer comparison Default Inlining of a selected group C library functions is allowed This option works together with the extra inlining optimization option Ox Note It is not possible to take the address of an inline function which is not conform to the ANSI C standard Disable inlining of C library functions to conform to strict ANSI C mode Default The keywords _atbit bank bit bitword esfr esfrbit far huge interrupt iram near sfr sfrbit stackparm system and using are recognized as C language extensions See chapter 3 Language Implementation for the explanation of these language extensions Disable all keywords which are an extension of the C language Default 500 significant characters are allowed in an identifier instead of the minimum ANSI C translation limit of 31 significant characters Note more significant characters are truncated without any notice Conform to the minimum ANSI C translation limit of 31 significant characters This makes it possible to translate your code with any ANSI C conforming C compiler Note more significant characters are trunca
200. d segment offset of the far function being called is determined run time the same mechanism as described in section 2 4 can be used again to make the inter segment jump The next assembly listing displays the code the C compiler generates for an indirect far function call when extended instructions are available The far function called indirectly is in the function pointer array named _fp Rx contains the index value Rseg and Rsof are registers used by the C compiler for temporary results User Stack Model min code state 7 size times mov Rsof SOF __RETURN_LABEL 4 2 mov R0 Rsof 2 2 mov Rseg SEG __RETURN_LABEL 4 2 mov R0 Rseg 2 2 mov Rsof Rx _fp 4 4 mov Rseg Rx _fp 02H 4 4 atomic 3 2 2 push Rseg 2 2 push Rsof 2 2 rets 2 4 __RETURN_LABEL sa 28 26 It is obvious that the code needed to return from a far function is always the same because the function does not know whether it is called directly or indirectly See section 2 4 for the code the C compiler generates to return from a far function when extended instructions are available 3 MIXING USER STACK AND NON USER STACK FUNCTIONS With the _usm and _nousm function qualifiers the compiler is instructed to generate a user stack model calling convention regardless of the usage of the compiler option option P see section 3 2 2 User Stack Model Appendix D D 10 TAGOW MOVLS ASN INDEX all TASKING M XAGNI I
201. d to turn this optimization off If aC function is a non leaf function i e calling another C function four registers R6 R9 are available to support C register variables However if the C function is a leaf function not occupied registers of the parameter register area R12 R15 can be used for automatic registers too These registers do not have to be saved at entry and restored at exit Thus leaf functions allow up to eight registers to be used for register automatics The code generator of c166 uses a saved by callee strategy This means that a function which needs one or more registers for register variables must save the contents of these registers and restore before returning to the caller The major advantage of this approach is that only registers which are really used by the function are saved If the function does not have any register variable the registers of the caller function remain valid without being saved The code generator prefers to assign the register character type automatics to R6 or R7 using RL6 RL7 and the other types to the rest in the order of their declaration Language Implementation 3 67 A declaration like being a non leaf function void f register int i register char c register long l would have been allocated by the code generator in the following registers i gt R9 c gt RL6 l gt R7 R8 If would have been a leaf function the register au
202. data size huge data mode size shuge allowed data allowed tiny linear no no lt 64K lt 64K no n a small linear no yes lt 64K gt 64K yes n a medium paged yes yes gt 64K lt 64K yes yes large paged yes yes gt 64K gt 64K yes yes huge paged yes yes gt 64K gt 64K yes yes n a not applicable Table 3 1 Memory models The memory models can be described as follows 3 2 1 1 TINY MEMORY MODEL This memory model is the only model where the processor does not run in segmented mode limiting the sum of code and data space to 64K The DPP registers always contain their startup values thus allowing linear 64K access of data This results in relatively high code density and execution speed On interrupt the C166 ST10 does not have to save the CS register and an extra port Port 4 is available because address lines A16 A23 are not used The usage of the _far _huge and _shuge keywords is not allowed The tiny memory model is meant for very small even single chip applications Language Implementation Map example 256K 64K normal data code 0 Figure 3 1 Tiny memory map example Item Usage Comments CPU non segmented only model which runs non segmented code lt 64K limited to first segment of 64K normal data lt 64K limited to first segment of 64K Thus code normal data lt 64K far data not allowed huge data not allowed shuge data not allow
203. de also indirect addressing and bitaddr DIV Rw or DIVL DIVLU DIVU or MUL MULU D Writes into ESFR addresses FOOCh and FOOEh instead of MDH FEOCh and MDL FEOEh cause the same problem Workaround There are two possible workarounds 1 Insert a NOP instruction or another instruction not writing into MDL MDH between an instruction writing into MDL MDH and a DIV MUL instruction 2 Do not allow interruption of DIV MUL by using ATOMIC Kfm_BRO0O3 Pipeline conflict after COSTORE STMicroelectronics reference Kfm_BR0O3 Use compiler option BN Use libraries lib u Jextp lib After a COSTORE instruction with any destiniation E SFR the E SFR cannot be read C 18 Appendix C 7 LONDON 1 Breakpoint before JMPI CAL Infineon STMicroelectronics reference LONDONI1 Use compiler option BL Use libraries lib u ext2p lib Description JMPI When the program hits a breakpoint right before a JMPI instruction the first instruction injected in the pipeline will not be processed by the core This leads to a deny of all interrupts and OCE injection requests The problem may also occur when single stepping right before a JMPI instruction CALLI CALLI instruction is not working properly in some cases if it is followed by an injected interrupt This results in causing a fault in the stack pointer management CPU Functional Problems C 19 LONDON 1751 Write to core SFR while DIV L U executes I
204. defined floating point number Table 3 21 Trap Codes Language Implementation 3 99 3 16 8 HANDLING FLOATING POINT TRAPS IN A C APPLICATION This section explains how program execution can be continued after a floating point trap And how floating point trap codes are passed from the floating point trap handler to a C application Only the floating point libraries which perform floating point trapping contain a floating point trap stub This floating point trap stub loops infinitely which is very helpful when you want to find a bug in your application But when it is expected or allowed or even wanted that floating point operations generate results that are out of range then program execution must continue after entering the floating point trap handler It is not possible to simply return from the floating point trap handler because the floating point accumulator s contain a value which is out of range In the same floating point operation or else in a next floating point operation there will be another call to the floating point trap handler because the value in the floating point accumulator s remain out of range This results in a succession of floating point traps It is impossible to assign a value to the floating point accumulator s which is in range and then continue program execution If you try to assign a value to the floating point accumulators the result will always be undefined Interpretation of the
205. do not have the _using keyword use the same register bank and therefore they should have the same interrupt level Different interrupt levels can be used but in this case pragma regdef is needed to instruct the compiler to use non overlapping register sets With pragma regdef you can define the register set that the compiler uses for code generation The pragma affects all functions after the pragma until pragma regdef is used again to define another register set When pragma regdef is used without an argument or with argument 0 the REGDEF assembler directives used for interrupt functions will be omitted even when the _using qualifier is used In this case the compiler does not generate code to switch to another global register bank You can use the r command line option to name the register bank of a module With an optional flag the register bank can be declared common When a register bank definition is supplied with the r option this register set is used until the next pragma regdef in the source When the r option is used without any arguments the REGDEF directive for this module will be omitted This does not affect the REGDEF directives originating from the _using qualifier Interrupt functions that do not have the _using qualifier use the module s REGDEF Since this REGDEF is omitted no code will be generated in the interrupt frame to switch register banks See the description of the r option for more detai
206. does not run in segmented mode A linear 16 bit 64K data area is achieved The far huge and _shuge keywords are not possible and not allowed small model In this model all normal data is implicitly near Address arithmetic is performed on 16 bit addresses linear address space assumed Therefore objects may be greater than 16K unless the SND locator control is used which introduces gaps in the address space of normal data Besides 64K of normal data including ROM data far data is supported Far data may be anywhere in memory not assumed to be in the linear data area You can reference far data using a 24 bit address Address arithmetic is performed on 14 bit page offset only Therefore individual data items e g arrays cannot exceed 16K page and cannot cross page boundaries if declared _ far If you use far objects greater than 16K you must declare them _huge or _shuge Huge data may be anywhere in memory and you can also reference it using a 24 bit address However address arithmetic is done using the complete address 24 bit Shuge data may also be anywhere in memory and you can also reference it using a 24 bit address However address arithmetic is done using a 16 bit address All function calls are assumed to be _huge maybe in another code segment of 64K However an intra segment call is supported via a _near function the keyword _near must be present in the function prototype In fact you could declare and define
207. e TASKING Cross Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Manual for more information about the 1166 linker locator controls Language Implementation 3 4 DATA TYPES All ANSI C types are supported In addition to these types the _sfr _sfrbit esfr esfrbit bit xsfr and _bitword types are added Object size and ranges Data Type Size bytes Range _ bit 1 bit Oori _Sfrbit 1 bit Oor1 _esfrbit 1 bit Oor1 signed char 1 128 to 127 unsigned char 1 0 to 255U _sfr 2 0 to 65535U _esfr 2 0 to 65535U _xsfr 2 0 to 65535U signed short 2 32768 to 32767 unsigned short 2 0 to 65535U _bitword 2 0 to 65535U signed int 2 32768 to 32767 unsigned int 2 0 to 65535U signed long 4 2147483648 to 2147483647 unsigned long 4 0 to 4294967295UL float 4 1 176E 38 to 3 402E 38 double 8 2 225E 308 to 1 797E 308 long double 8 2 225E 308 to 1 797E 308 _near pointer 2 16 bits 64K when using Mt Ms 14 bits 16K when using Mm Ml default data group _xnear pointer 14 bits 16K when using Mm MI Not allowed in non segmented memory models _far pointer 14 bits 16K in any page 16M _huge pointer 24 bits 16M _shuge pointer 24 bits 16M but arithmetic is done 16 bit wide Table 3 12 Data types 3 53 3 54 Chapter 3 166 generates instructions using 8 bit character arithm
208. e h huge Default Ms Description Select the memory model to be used Example c166 M1 test c d Section 3 2 1 Memory Models 4 36 Chapter 4 Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option to the Additional options field E mmem size or mmem size threshold Arguments A memory space with a memory size mem can be one of mem Description Default size limit bytes BI bits 2048 bits co strings floating none point BA bitwords 256 NB near data none FB far data none XB shuge data none HB huge data none PR functions 65536 SB system data 16384 IR internal ramdata 2048 Table 4 5 Memory spaces A threshold value The default is no threshold Description Specify the memory size limits to be used by the compiler for checking static memory allocations of the module being processed If the t option is used the size allocated by the module is reported when c166 completes compilation Compiler Use 4 37 When a section is equal or larger than the threshold size the compiler will switch to a new selection with the identical attributes and class for subsequent allocations The threshold size is memory dependent A size of zero means no threshold and this is the default Specifying a threshold size is particularly useful when compiling very big modules or when th
209. e the _cached keyword has to be used on these interrupt functions The following code fragment gives an example of the use of the _cached function qualifier void _interrupt 0x10 _localbank 1 _cached ISR void return AN The _cached function qualifier will basically overrule the i command line option causing none of the code to be located inside the interrupt vector table Language Implementation 3 83 Examples 1 The C module is called intrpt c present in the examples c directory The example illustrates how to tell the compiler to omit the interrupt frame code The C source and the generated code large is listed below pragma global bit b interrupt handler sets a global bitvariable pragma public pragma noframe minimal interrupt frame even no GPR s needed so pragma regdef 0 omit regdef definition interrupt 0x30 void pragma asm NOP you can make your own entry code here pragma endasm b 1 pragma asm NOP you can make your own exit code here pragma endasm INTRPT 1 BI SECTION BIT BIT PUBLIC CBITS INTRPT 1 BI ENTRY LABEL BIT _b DBIT GLOBAL _b INTRPT 1 BI ENDS INTRPT_2 PR SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM f PROC TASK INTRPT_TASK INTNO INTRPT_INUM 030h NOP you can make your own entry code here BSET _b NOP you can make your own exit code here BCLR IEN RETI ENDP INTRPT_2_PR ENDS 2
210. e file system simulation feature of CrossView Pro to stat a file on the host platform Returns zero if successful 1 on error strcat include lt string h gt char strcat char s const char ct Concatenates string ct to string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s strchr include lt string h gt char strchr const char cs int c Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of character c in the string cs If not found NULL is returned 6 84 7 Chapter 6 strcmp include lt string h gt int strcemp const char cs const char ct Compares string cs to string ct Returns lt Oifes lt ct 0 ifes ct gt 0 ifcs gt ct strcoll include lt string h gt int strcoll const char cs const char ct Compares string cs to string ct The comparison is based on strings interpreted as appropriate to the program s locale Returns lt Oifes lt ct 0 ifes ct gt 0 ifcs gt ct sircpy include lt string h gt char strcpy char s const char ct Copies string ct into the string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s strcspn include lt string h gt size_t strcspn const char cs const char ct Returns the length of the prefix in string cs consisting of characters not in string ct Libraries 6 85 strerror include lt string h gt char strerror size tn Returns strftime pointer to implementation defined
211. e function returns the value clock_t 1 Libraries close include lt unistd h gt int close int fd File close function The given file descriptor should be properly closed This function calls _close Returns zero if successful 1 on error cos include lt math h gt double cos double x Returns the cosine of x cosh include lt math h gt double cosh double x Returns the hyperbolic cosine of x ctime include lt time h gt char ctime const time _t tp Converts the calender time tp into local time in string form This function is the same as asctime localtime tp Returns the local time in string form 6 29 6 30 Chapter 6 difftime include lt time h gt double difftime time_t time2 time_t timel Computes the difference between calendar times Returns the result of time2 timel in seconds div include lt stdlib h gt div_t div int num int denom Both arguments are integers The returned quotient and remainder are also integers Returns a structure containing the quotient and remainder of num divided by denom exit include lt stdlib h gt void exit int status Terminates the program normally Acts as if main returns with status as the return value Returns zero on successful termination exp include lt math h gt double exp double x Returns the result of the exponential function e Libraries 6 31 fab
212. e previous value of handler for the specific signal or SIG_ERR if an error occurs sin include lt math h gt double sin double x Returns the sine of x sinh include lt math h gt double sinh double x Returns the hyperbolic sine of x 6 82 Chapter 6 7 smalloc include lt stdlib h gt void _shuge smalloc size t size Shuge variant of mallocQ See section 7 3 Heap Size sprintf include lt stdio h gt int sprintf char s const char format Performs a formatted write to a string d gt See also printfQ sqrt include lt math h gt double sqrt double x Returns the square root of x Vx where x gt 0 srand include lt stdlib h gt void srand unsigned int seed This function uses seed as the start of a new sequence of pseudo random numbers to be returned by subsequent calls to srandQ When srand is called with the same seed value the sequence of pseudo random numbers generated by randQ will be repeated Returns pseudo random numbers srealloc include lt stdlib h gt void _shuge srealloc void _shuge p size_t size Shuge variant of reallocQ See section 7 3 Heap Size Libraries 6 83 sscanf include lt stdio h gt int sscanf char s const char format Performs a formatted read from a string db See also scanf Stat include lt unistd h gt int stat const char name struct stat buf Use th
213. e registers used by the C compiler for temporary results min code state size times mov Rsof SOF __RETURN_LABEL 4 2 mov RO Rsof 2 2 mov Rseg SEG __RETURN_LABEL 4 2 mov R0 Rseg 2 2 jmps SEG _f SOF f 4 4 __RETURN_LABEL 2 gt 16 12 The next assembly listing displays the code the C compiler generates for a far function to return to its caller D 8 Appendix D min code state P size times mov Rseg R0 2 2 mov Rsof R0 2 2 atomic 3 2 2 push Rseg 2 2 push Rsof 2 2 rets 2 4 12 14 2 5 INDIRECT INTER SEGMENT FUNCTION CALL AND RETURN An indirect inter segment function call indirect far function call is normally performed with a run time library function and the far function called indirect returns with a RETS instruction The segment number and segment offset are passed to this run time library function to perform the inter segment call but it uses the system stack which is not allowed in this implementation of the library Also now the segment number and segment offset of the return label must be stored on the user stack before an indirect inter segment jump can be performed to the far function The far function being invoked returns to its caller by getting the return label from the user stack and then performing an indirect inter segment jump to the return label The far function being invoked is determined run time So an indirect inter segment jump is needed When segment number an
214. e with OK 00 Compile with Ok 00 register contents tracing one register is reused int a c void f register int b a 22 if b c 22 4 54 Chapter 4 OI OL Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Generate fast loops increases code size E ol 0L Default OL Description With Ol you enable fast loops Duplicate the loop condition Evaluate the loop condition one time outside the loop just before entering the loop and at the bottom of the loop This saves one unconditional jump and gives less code inside a loop With OL you disable fast loops The smallest code is generated for loops Example Compile with OL 00 Compile with 01 00 compiler duplicates the loop condition the unconditional jump is removed int i void main void for i lt 10 i do_something Compiler Use 4 55 Om 0M Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable the Instruction reordering check box Om OM Default Om Description With Om you enable instruction reordering for ext2 targets With OM you disable instruction reordering for ext2 targets The
215. e_union 4 97 predefined macros in C 3 62 _C166 3 62 _CPUTYPE 3 62 _DOUBLE_FP 3 62 _MODEL 3 62 _SINGLE_FP 3 62 _USMLIB 3 62 undefine 4 78 predefined symbols 7 6 preprocessor symbols 7 5 preserve_mulip 4 95 printf 6 70 private 3 36 program development 2 9 project 2 13 add new files 2 19 create 2 18 project file 2 13 project space 2 13 create 2 17 project space file 2 13 public 3 51 4 95 pubtoglb 3 52 putc 6 72 putchar 6 73 puts 6 73 putwc 6 73 putwchar 6 73 Q qsort 6 74 quality assurence report 3 141 raise 6 74 RAM data 3 19 rand 6 74 rd_mol5_16x 6 109 rd_modata_16x 6 109 read 6 74 realloc 6 68 6 75 reg def 3 60 reg h 6 7 regdef 4 95 register bank 4 71 register coloring 2 8 register definition file 3 60 register keyword 3 66 register usage 3 87 register variables 3 66 3 67 registers number of 4 71 remove 6 75 rename 6 75 reorder 4 95 restore_attributes 4 92 resume_align32 4 89 return values 5 4 rewind 6 76 romdata 3 38 4 93 RTLIBRARY 6 5 S SAB C167 D 6 save_attributes 4 92 savemac 4 96 scalloc 6 76 scanf 6 76 scanner 2 5 SDAT 3 12 section allocation 3 30 3 48 code memory fragmentation 3 37 constant romdata 3 38 4 48 Index 18 7 send_mo_16x 6 110 setbuf 6 79 setjmp 6 79 setjmp h 6 7 longjmp 6 51 setjmp 0 79 setlocale 6 79 setvbuf 6 80 sfr 3 53 sfrbit 3 53 sfree 6 80 SHAREDCLIB 6 5 SH
216. ection NOT used by other C variables Make a separate assembly module containing the allocation of these variables in a special data section It is not possible to remove the clearing code from the startup file because other C modules and the C libraries depend on it too Variables in bit addressable RAM are cleared by default and not effected by any of the above mentioned methods However you can disable this automatic clearing from EDE from the Projects menu select Project Options Expand the Application entry and select Startup Disable the check box Clear bit addressable RAM at startup Because variables in bit addressable memory are cleared by the startup code the compiler does not allocate structs with bit fields only into bit addressable memory automatically You can tell the compiler that a struct must be located in bit addressable memory by using the _bita memory qualifier See the _bita keyword in section 3 2 1 9 system _tram and _bita 3 10 STRINGS In this section the word string means the separate occurrence of a string in a C program So variables initialized with strings are just initialized character arrays and are not considered as strings See section 3 8 Initialized Variables for more information on this topic Strings have static storage The ANSI X3 159 1989 standard permits string literals to be put in ROM Because there is no difference in accessing ROM or RAM c166 allocates stri
217. ed Table 3 2 Tiny memory model 3 8 Chapter 3 E 3 2 1 2 SMALL MEMORY MODEL The small memory model is the most used memory model It allows you to have a total code size up to 16M up to 64K of fast accessible normal user data in three different memory configurations and the possibility to access far huge data if more than 64K of data is needed The compiler does not assume the CSP register to contain something valid Each call results in a far inter segment code access unless the _near keyword is used explicitly in the function prototype We therefore recommend using the _near keyword with static functions when using the small or large model since static functions are always in the same code section as their caller functions This model allows code access in all segments up to 16M The small memory model supports 64K of normal user data via fixed DPP values specified at locate time This results in high code density and execution speed Note that the ROM data of an application e g strings floating point constants jump tables etc must also be allocated in this area of 64K of normal user data There are three memory configurations possible for this 64K of normal user data I default The four DPP registers are assumed to contain their system startup value 0 3 providing one linear data area of 64K in the first segment 0 OFFFFh II Addresses Linear DPP3 contains page number 3 all
218. ed int seg Inline code is generated by the C compiler to make a huge pointer from a segment offset sof and segment number seg The arguments sof and seg are expected to be in a valid range Returns a huge pointer hp _mkhp sof_fp seg fp MOV R5 R14 MOV _hp R4 MOV _hp 2 R5 _mksp void _shuge mksp unsigned int sof unsigned int seg Inline code is generated by the C compiler to make a shuge pointer from a segment offset sof and segment number seg The arguments sof and seg are expected to be in a valid range Returns an shuge pointer Example The file builtin c in the c subdirectory of the examples directory is a C source file demonstrating the c166 intrinsic functions Compile the file using the s option to inspect generated code Language Implementation 3 129 3 17 1 USER DEFINED INTRINSICS It is possible to create user defined intrinsics To do this you have to create a file called icall h the compiler tries to find this file in the same way as normal include files include icall h are searched See section 4 4 Include Files In this file you can specify the prototypes of the user defined intrinsics An intrinsic function can be defined by using the _intrinsic keyword for example _intrinsic float intrinsic _func int long The intrinsic keyword will only be recognized within this specific header file It is not allowed to use preprocessor directives within this file If this
219. el to execute with the CPU segmentation enabled and to prevent the startup code to clear the bit addressable area which contains monitor data It also starts the application with interrupts enabled and provides CrossView Pro with information about the configuration when the C167 is used Default enabled Must be set when one of the following processoris used 165 UTAH 165Utah 167CS 40 167CS40 SDA6000 sda6000 Set the CPU symbol to the appropriate value mentioned between brackets If none of these derivatives is used then _CPU does not need to be set Must be enabled set to 1 to support the user stack model Default disabled See section 3 2 2 User Stack Model for more details 7 6 Chapter 7 CALLINIT Can be set to a function to be called before main This function may not have any return value and may not have any arguments This function can be used for example to initialize the serial port before main is called This is useful for building benchmark programs without making any modifications to the original source CALLEINIT Can be set to a function to be called before the EINIT instruction is executed but after register initialization Like the CALLINIT function it may not have a return value or any arguments CALL_USER Can be set to an include file containing the _main label entry SSKENABLE If set intializes the system stack for XC16x Super10 architectures using a modifiable SYSSTACK system __SSKSIZE Dete
220. ell A Symbols El ins Line 11 Cok 1 Figure 2 3 EDE desktop 2 16 Chapter 2 7 2 6 USING THE SAMPLE PROJECTS When you start EDE for the first time see section 2 5 Start EDE EDE opens with a ready defined project space that contains several sample projects Each project has its own subdirectory in the examples directory Each directory contains a file readme txt with information about the example The default project is called demo pjt and contains a CrossView Pro debugger example Select a sample project To select a project from the list of projects in a project space 1 In the Project Window right click on the project you want to open A menu appears 2 Select Set as Current Project The selected project opens 3 Read the file readme txt for more information about the selected sample project Building a sample project To build the currently active sample project e Click on the Execute Make command button Once the files have been processed you can inspect the generated messages in the Build tab of the Output window Overview 2 7 CREATE A NEW PROJECT SPACE WITH A PROJECT Creating a project space is in fact nothing more than creating a project space file psp in an existing or new directory Create a new project space 1 2 From the File menu select New Project Space The Create a New Project Space dialog appears Create a New Project Space x Current Dire
221. em 7 CPU 2 Interrupted multiply and divide instructions Infineon reference CPU 18 Problem 7 and CPU 2 Use compiler option BM Use libraries lib u 166p 1lib lib u Jextp lib lib u Jext2p lib This solution should be used where failures occur for interrupts during the MUL MULU DIV DIVU DIVL and DIVLU instructions For C166 derivatives the compiler option BM emits code using run time library calls for the multiply and divide operations In these run time library calls the operations are protected against interrupts so that the problems cannot occur For ext and ext2 derivatives multiply and divide operations are protected inline using ATOMIC instructions In some cases an additional NOP might be generated after the multiply or divide instruction When you want to use the inline protection you should use both the compiler options x i and BM BM is a workaround for many MUL DIV problems Besides CPU 18 it fixes problem 7 problem 13 problem 17 CPU 2 and CPU 11 When using the BM option you should also link libraries in which the multiply and divide operations are protected C 8 Appendix C 7 CPU 1R006 CPU hangup with MOV B Rn Rm data16 Infineon reference CPU1R006 Use compiler option BO Use libraries lib u Jextp lib The opcode MOV B Rn Rm data16 can cause the CPU to hang The problem is encountered under the following conditions e Rm data16 is used to address t
222. en if it has a higher priority Furthermore the program flow after the ISR can be broken Only the RETI instruction is affected by this bug This is because this instruction is specially managed The instruction following the RETI is internally marked as not interruptable This means that no interrupt will be served by the CPU between the RETI and its following instruction This bug is the consequence of an error in how this special treatment is implemented in the logic specifically in the generation of the not interruptable indication This workaround marks the instruction following the RETI as not interruptable emulating what the hardware was supposed to do CR108400 Broken program flow after not taken JMPR JMPA instruction Infineon reference CR108400 Use compiler option BZcpu_jmpra_cache Use libraries A workaround is not default enabled in the libraries Rebuild the libraries manually for C files use compiler option BZcpu_jmpra_cache for src files use assembler control CHECKCPUJMPRACACHE for asm files use m166 control DEF FIX_JMPRA_CACHE C 16 Appendix C This bug can occur in two situations 1 If the instruction sequentially following a conditional JMPR and or JMPA is the target instruction of another previously executed JB JNB JNBS JMPR or JMPA the program flow can be corrupted when the JMPR JMPA is not taken 2 If a not taken JMPR and or JMPA is inside a loop or a sequence that is executed m
223. enclosed in parentheses Don t use undefined identifiers in pre processing directives A macro definition shall contain at most one or operator All uses of the pragma directive shall be documented defined shall only be used in one of the two standard forms Pointer arithmetic should not be used No more than 2 levels of pointer indirection should be used No relational operators between pointers to different objects Non constant pointers to functions shall not be used Functions assigned to the same pointer shall be of identical type Automatic address may not be assigned to a longer lived object The null pointer shall not be de referenced All struct union members shall be fully specified Overlapping variable storage shall not be used Unions shall not be used to access the sub parts of larger types Bit fields shall have type unsigned int or signed int 112 113 114 115 x 116 x 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Appendix A Bit fields of type signed int shall be at least 2 bits long All struct union members shall be named Reserved and standard library names shall not be redefined Standard library function names shall not be reused Production libraries shall comply with the MISRA C restrictions The validity of library function parameters shall be checked Dynamic heap memory all
224. ense file in step 2 See the FLEXIm PDF manual delivered with SW000098 which is present on each TASKING product CD for more information Software Installation 1 13 1 4 4 MODIFYING THE LICENSE FILE LOCATION db The default location of the license file for Windows is c flexlm license dat For Solaris this is usr local flexlm licenses license dat If you want to use another name or directory for the license file each user must define the environment variable LM_LICENSE_FILE If you have more than one product using the FLEXIm license manager you can specify multiple license files to the LM_LICENSE_FILE environment variable by separating each pathname path with a on Solaris Example Windows set LM_LICENSE_FILE c flexlm license dat c license txt Example Solaris setenv LM_LICENSE_FILE usr local flexlm licenses license dat myprod license txt If the license file is not available on these hosts you must set LM_LICENSE_FILE to port host where host is the host name of the system which runs the FLEXIm license manager and port is the TCP IP port number on which the license manager listens To obtain the port number look in the license file at Host for a line starting with SERVER The fourth field on this line specifies the TCP IP port number on which the license server listens For example setenv LM LICENSE FILE 7594 elliot See the FLEXIm PDF manual delivered with SW000098 which is p
225. ents a command name an option or a complete command line which you can enter For example command option filename This line could be written in plain English as execute the command command with the optional options option and with the file filename Illustrations The following illustrations are used in this manual AN This is a note It gives you extra information A This is a warning Read the information carefully Manual Purpose and Structure Q This illustration indicates actions you can perform with the mouse ga This illustration indicates keyboard input db This illustration can be read as See also It contains a reference to another command option or section XV e MANUAL STRUCTURE Manual Purpose and Structure SOFTWARE INSTALLATION all TASKING M daLdVH Software Installation 1 3 1 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter guides you through the procedures to install the software on a Windows system or on a Solaris host The software for Windows has two faces a graphical interface Embedded Development Environment and a command line interface The Solaris software only has a command line interface After the installation it is explained how to configure the software and how to install the license information that is needed to actually use the software 1 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 1 2 1 INSTALLATION FOR WINDOWS 1 Insert the TASKING CD ROM into the CD R
226. er in the range 1 to 255 This function qualifier uses the same syntax rules as the other function qualifiers _interrupt number and _stackparm A function qualifier is allowed in both the function prototype for the caller and the function body itself int _bank 1 func_bl char long prototype int _bank 2 func_b2 int parm function body You can also use a function qualifier when you declare function pointers The following line of C code declares a table called fptable of 6 function pointers all containing addresses of functions which are located in bank 3 and expecting their parameters 2 int types via the user stack and returning a long long _stackparm _bank 3 fptable 6 int int Although banked interrupt functions are allowed you should not use them because they are not called as a banked function from the interrupt vector It is recommended to make a non banked interrupt function and call a banked function from that interrupt function The default situation assumes that a function is in a non banked portion of memory in fact _bank 0 Valid bank numbers are 1 to 255 3 136 Chapter 3 When calling a banked function from either non banked memory or from a function having a different bank number a call to a run time library function is emitted by the C compiler instead of a regular function call This run time library function switches the code memory banks and calls the appropr
227. ere are too many initiialized variables in a single module Example mPR 0 4000 is suitable for compiling modules with more than 64Kb code without getting too many sections Likewise mFB 0 4000 allows more than 16Kb of initialized far data in a single module by switching to a new section after approximately 4Kb However it will result in numbered sections with different names so it might be necessary to adapt the linker locator invocation when locator controls refer to a particular section by name 4 38 Chapter 4 misrac Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C Select a MISRA C configuration Optionally in the MISRA C Rules entry specify the individual rules misrac77 7 Arguments The MISRA C rules to be checked Description With this option the MISRA C rules to be checked can be specified Refer to Appendix A MISRA C for a list of supported and unsupported MISRA C rules Example c166 misrac9 test c Will generate an error in case test c contains nested comments Compiler Use 4 39 misrac advisory warnings misrac required warnings Option amp From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C Select Generate warnings instead of errors for required rules and or Generate warnings instead of errors for advisory rules EEs misrac advisory warnings mi
228. erent byte This workaround does not cover writing to a GPR through PEC DPEC 2 To protect against PEC DPECB also include a ATOMIC 1 before all jump bit instructions Because the compiler does not expect a GPR modification through a memory or indirect addressing mode nor through a PEC DPEC transfer it uses workaround 1 CPU Functional Problems C 11 CR105893 Interrupted division corrupted by division in ISR interrupt service routine Infineon reference CR105893 Use compiler option BZc166svidiv Use libraries lib u Jextp lib In the first states of a division several internal control signals are set that are used in later states of the division If a division is interrupted and in the interrupt service routine ISR another division is executed it overrides the old internal values After the return the interrupted division proceeds with the probably wrong internal states of the last division The affected internal signals are dividend_sign divisisor_sign and mdl_0 The first two bits represent the operand signs Bit 15 md1_0 is set if MDL is OxFFFF Workaround Do not interrupt divisions for example by using an ATOMIC sequence CR105981 JBC and JNBS with op1 a DPRAM operand bit addressable do not work B Infineon reference CR105981 Use compiler option BZc166sv1jbc Use libraries lib u extp lib The DPRAM address corresponding to op1 is written back with wrong data This happens
229. erform macro expansion nomacro Do not perform macro expansion noframe Do not emit the interrupt frame code for C interrupt functions See the section 3 12 Interrupt for details preserve_mulip Make the MULIP bit available for use inside interrupt handlers by saving restoring PSW in interrupt function prologue epilogue respectively public Default Public C variables have task scope See section 3 3 Task Scope for details global Public C variables have application scope See section 3 3 Task Scope for details regdef regdef See r option and section 3 12 Interrupt for details reorder Enable instruction reordering for the XC16x Super10 architecture x2 option noreorder Disable instruction reordering for the XC16x Super10 architecture 4 96 Chapter 4 savemac Save MAC SFRs in an interruptframe You must use this pragma together with the xd x2 or x22 option AN This pragma will not save anything if used together with the noframe pragma nosavemac Do not save MAC SFRs in an interrupt frame You must use this pragma together with the xd x2 or x22 option autosavemac Save MAC registers in an interrupt frame only when needed You must use this pragma together with the xd x2 or x22 option If you use this pragma in conjuction with pragma noframe nothing will be saved source Same as s option Enable mixing C source with assembly code nosource Default Disable generation of C so
230. error number scanf stops immediately Therefore the default formatter installed in the C library is the SMALL version Libraries 6 79 setbuf include lt stdio h gt void setbuf FILE stream char buf Buffering is turned off for the stream if buf is NULL Otherwise setbuf is equivalent to void setvbuf stream buf IOFBF BUFSIZ Returns nothing d gt See also setvbuf setjmp include lt setjmp h gt int setjmp jmp buf env Saves the current environment for a subsequent call to Llongjmp Returns the value 0 after a direct call to setimpQ Calling the function longjmpQ using the saved env restores the current environment and jumps to this place with a non zero return value Gs See also longjmpQ setlocale include lt locale h gt char setlocale int category const char locale Selects the appropriate portion of the program s locale as specified by the category and locale arguments Returns the string associated with the specified category for the new locale if the selection can be honored null pointer if the selection cannot be honored 6 80 Chapter 6 7 setubuf include lt stdio h gt int setvbuf FILE stream char buf int mode size t size Controls buffering for the stream this function must be called before reading or writing mode can have the following values _IOFBF causes full buffering _IOLBF causes line buffering of text files _IO
231. es C 14 Appendix C t CR108309 MDL access immediately after a DIV causes wrong PSW values Infineon reference CR108309 Use compiler option BZinsert_div_mdl Use libraries A workaround is not default enabled in the libraries Rebuild the libraries manually for C files use compiler option BZinsert_div_mdl for src files use assembler control CHECKC166SV1DIVMDL for asm files use m166 control DEF FIX _EXT1MDL If the MDL register is accessed immediately after a DIV instruction the PSW flags are set incorrectly The problem only appears with DIVs instructions when they are immediately followed by one instruction that reads MDL from type MOVs mem reg ADDs SUBs ORsS XORS mem reg ADDs SUBs ORS XORS reg mem ADDs SUBs ORsS XORS reg mem CMPs reg mem CMPs reg datal6 The V flag can be wrongly calculated for signed divisions the V flag is only set if the most significant bit of the result is set that is if the result is negative Workaround Insert a NOP instruction after DIV instructions DIVL RO NOP MOV R1 MDL CPU Functional Problems C 15 CR108342 Lost interrupt while executing RETI instruction Infineon reference CR108342 Use compiler option BZcpu_reti_int Use libraries no solution in libraries required The bug occurs when two interrupts are trying to get into the CPU while a RETI instruction is being executed In this case it can happen that one interrupt is lost the first one ev
232. et Garena ts 3 142 Portable C Gode T ee ahh EN Ae Res 3 144 How to Program Smart with C166 0 4 3 144 Vil VIII 7 Table of Contents COMPILER USE 4 1 4 1 Control Program lt cchi4eeRe s Sas 4 3 4 2 GCOMpilers os i000 bike SB Miss foretell ae out nel Ol 4 6 4 3 Detailed Description of the Compiler options 4 10 4 4 Include Filesi senario oie siecle aha Shes a E aod aan BAM E 4 85 4 5 Praginas hie ha hot esate 7M ak a ean E ENAT 4 88 4 6 AUIAS 5 accuse ean eo Cale Mek ORES WEBER OAR ONG 4 98 4 7 Compiler Limits i04 244 f ok oe ee iS 4 100 COMPILER DIAGNOSTICS 5 1 5 1 INtrOGUCHON 23 cee te E DEA E A EEN N 5 3 5 2 ea Values OEE N E NOE EOE E E 5 4 5 3 Errors and Warnings sda a nN ER EAE A 5 6 LIBRARIES 6 1 6 1 aro O ea a E AAA E AE tatoos 6 3 6 2 Small Medium and Large I O Formatters 6 5 6 3 Single Precision Floating Point 4 6 6 6 4 CAN SUPOT css hc iasten il ey a a T tn iit 6 6 6 5 Header Files tess oS ales Sec Rh ed 6 7 6 6 C Library Interface Description 0 4 6 10 6 7 CAN Library Interface Description 6 108 6 8 Creating your own C Library 0000 0 eee 6 111 RUN TIME ENVIRONMENT 7 1 7 1 Starup Code rrara hee keke a e eaa 7 3 7 2 Sta Ck Sizee A ease eae ee it eat AE ae 7 8 ha Heap Size eri eae e a a A A E aa A 7 10 7 4 Assembly Language Interfacing 7 12 Table of Contents
233. etic when it is correct to evaluate a character expression this way This results in a higher code density compared with integer arithmetic Section 3 4 2 Character Arithmetic provides detailed information The C166 ST10 convention is used storing variables with the least significant part at low memory address Float and double are implemented using IEEE single and double precision formats See section 3 16 Floating Point Interfacing in this chapter for more details 3 4 1 ANSI C TYPE CONVERSIONS According to the ANSI C X3 159 1989 standard a character a short integer an integer bit field either signed or unsigned or an object of enumeration type may be used in an expression wherever an integer may be used If a signed int can represent all the values of the original type then the value is converted to signed int otherwise the value will be converted to unsigned int This process is called integral promotion Integral promotion is also performed on function pointers and function parameters of integral types using the old style declaration To avoid problems with implicit type conversions you are advised to use function prototypes Many operators cause conversions and yield result types in a similar way The effect is to bring operands into a common type which is also the type of the result This pattern is called the usual arithmetic conversions Integral promotions are performed on both operands then if either operand
234. even if the jump is not taken Note that these instructions work properly for GPR operands and SFR operands C 12 Appendix C 7 Workaround Do not use JBC and JNBS instructions unless the first operand is a GPR CR105619 Phantom interrupt occurs if Software Trap is cancelled Infineon reference CR105619 Use compiler option BZc166svitrap Use libraries lib u Jextp lib The last regularly executed interrupt is injected again if a software trap is canceled and at the same time a real interrupt occurs A sequence where this problem occurs is the following BMOV R13 1 0FD10h 1 TRAP 010h Due to the previous operation the TRAP is canceled and at the same time a real interrupt occurs As a result of this the last previously executed interrupt is injected and then the real interrupt is injected too if its priority is high enough Conditions for canceling a software TRAP are e previous instruction changes SP explicitly e previous instruction changes PSW implicit or explicitly e OCDS hardware triggers are generated on the TRAP instruction AN Note that instructions modifying the PSW are almost all the instructions arithmetic logical instructions MOVs For a detailed list of instructions modifying PSW refer to the User Manual Workaround Do not cancel a software trap by inserting a NOP before a TRAP instruction CPU Functional Problems C 13 CR107092 Extended sequences not proper
235. extension information found in the IEEE 695 file Kontron debuggers supports all high level language debug information generated by c166 Kontron debuggers support debugging of TASKING a166 assembly files at the source code level You can use the Kontron LINE166 utility before preprocessing source with TASKING m166 or assembling with a166 The LINE166 utility has the following command line syntax LINE166 inputfile outputfile where inputfile is the file you would normally process with the TASKING macro preprocessor or assembler and ouiputfile is the instrumented output file This output file is the file you must use for preprocessing assembly The input and output filename must differ Debug Environment B 5 Batch file when TASKING m166 used To Or echo off rem RELINE1 BAT linel66 l asm 1 a66 if errorlevel 1 goto end ml66 1 a66 if errorlevel 1 goto end del 1 a66 al66 1 srce debug if errorlevel 1 goto end del 1 src send Batch file when m166 not used echo off rem RELINE2 BAT linel66 l asm 1 a66 if errorlevel 1 goto end al66 1 a66 debug if errorlevel 1 goto end del 1 a66 send use these batch files simply enter either relinel asmfile reline2 asmfile oN use asmfile without a file extension B 6 7 Appendix B 3 HITEX HITOP TELEMON 80C167 When using the Hitex telemon 80C167 execution environment the following operation remarks exist e The following resources
236. for details Default Do not place two NOP instructions after each instruction which does a byte write This option is equivalent to the pragma nofix_byte_write Place two NOP instructions after each instruction which does a byte write These instructions are ADDB ADDCB ANDB CPLB MOVB NEGB ORB SUBB SUBCB XORB This is a bypass for CPU problem S1 as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems This option is equivalent to the pragma fix_byte_write Compiler Use 4 17 mie Default Assume hardware environment is present where there is no need to protect the execution of divide instructions against interrupts Emit inline code DIV instead of a run time library call This option emits code to protect signed divide operations against interrupts The protection will be generated inline using ATOMIC instructions This is a bypass for the CPU problem 13 as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems Use the protected version of the library Lib u extp lib or lib u ext2p lib Default Never extend EXTEND sequence with one instruction EXTEND sequences are extended with one instruction when addressing mode Rn Rm data16 is the last instruction of the EXTEND sequence This is a bypass for the CPU 3 problem as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems Default Do not prevent the generation of MOVB Rn mem instructions Disable the generation of MOVB Rn mem instructions when even cons
237. frexp 6 37 Index Index 11 frontend compiler phase 2 5 optimization 2 5 2 6 fscanf 6 37 fseek 6 38 fsetpos 6 38 fss h 6 7 fstat 6 38 ftell 6 39 function inline C 3 44 function automatics 3 64 function call D 4 direct inter segment D 7 direct intra segment D 4 indirect inter segment D 8 indirect intra segment D 5 user stack function D 9 function parameters 3 63 function qualifier _nousm 5 28 _usm 3 28 function return D 4 functional problems C 3 functions built in 3 107 intrinsic 3 107 fwide 6 39 fwrintf 6 39 fwrite 6 40 fwscanf 6 40 G general purpose registers 3 87 getc 6 40 getchar 6 41 getcwd 6 41 getenv 6 41 gets 6 41 getwc 6 42 getwchar 6 42 global 3 51 4 95 global storage optimizer 4 31 global_dead_store_elim 4 93 gmtime 6 42 group name 4 29 gso166 2 11 hcalloc 6 42 HDAT 3 12 header files 6 7 heap 7 10 heap size 7 10 hfree 6 43 Hitex HiTOP telemon 80C167 B 6 hmalloc 6 43 host ID determining 1 14 host name determining 1 14 how to program smart with c166 3 144 hrealloc 6 43 huge 3 21 huge model 3 24 huge pointer 3 53 hypot 6 43 hypotf 6 43 hypotl 6 44 identifier 4 13 IEEE 754 error handling 3 106 floating point format 3 88 ieee166 2 9 ihex166 2 11 include files 4 85 default directory 4 86 setting search directories 1 5 1 6 indirect_access 4 94 Index 12 7 init_can_16x
238. from In fact the code bank number is treated as a page number So a code bank is limited to the size of one page 16Kb One page is reserved for execution of banked code This page cannot be used for other code or data because it contains the currently active code page All the code banks are overlaid in this physical code page with the locator OVERLAY control The following listing shows the assembly code for simulating code banking The number of code banks is restricted to the number of pages which are available for code banking The physical page the code banks are overlaid in and executed from is defined by the equate CODE_PAGE The default value of CODE_PAGE is page 15 The following locator control can be used OVERLAY BANK4 BANK5 RANGEP 15 This control instructs the locator to overlay the classes BANK4 and BANKS in page 15 Remember that when using our simulation code the code from bank 4 must be located in page 4 and the code from bank 5 must be located in page 5 You can use the regular CLASSES control to achieve this See the description of the OVERLAY locator control in the assembler manual for a detailed example Language Implementation 3 139 The actual bank switch is performed by __pgbk In the simulation approach the code bank number passed via RL3 corresponds to the page number where the banked function is present This page must be activated which means copied to the physical page defined by
239. g a SYSSTACK section of the required size and using the SSKDEF 7 directive option The locator can relocate this section Use the preprocessor macros SSKENABLE _ SSKSEG and __SSKSIZE to determine the correct system stack amp From EDE you can set the system stack size in the Stack and Heap page of the Linker Locator entry in the Project Project Options dialog If P is used the system stack is not used at all See section 3 2 2 User Stack Model for details The user stack is the so called C stack c166 uses RO as User Stack Pointer and the R0 R0 addressing modes perform push pop sequences If data paging is used medium and large memory model the user stack is limited to 16K one page In these models c166 uses DPP1 as user stack page number The locator combines the user stack areas of each task to one global user stack area with cumulated size A context switch inherits the user stack pointer RO value in the new register bank and DPP1 remains unchanged c166 estimates the needed user stack size for each C module by adding the stack sizes of each function to each other This amount of bytes is allocated in the data section called C166_US see section 3 2 3 Section Allocation However in most cases this is too big because not all functions are active simultaneously In other cases the size will be too small e g when recursive functions are present note that qsort is implemented as a recursive functio
240. gister function automatics Support recursion Compiler Use 4 91 Static Use static memory for non register function automatics Same as S option See section 3 6 1 Static Approach of Function Automatics align mem alype Same as Ral option Use atype as align type for section of area mem class mem name Same as Rcl option Use name as class for section of area mem combine mem ctype Same as Rco option Use ctype as combine type for section of area mem cse suspend cse resume When the CSE optimization is switched on Oc then a sequence of pragma cse suspend pragma cse resume has the effect that expressions in between are not part of the CSE optimization The pragmas have function scope and do not have any effect unless the CSE optimization is switched on The CSE optimization for expressions can be switch off in a single function by placing pragma cse suspend at the start of the functon body custack Default Generate a C166_US section estimating the stack usage of a module nocustack Suppress the user stack estimation clear Default Same as OB option Perform clearing of non initialized static public variables See section 3 9 Non Initialized Variables for more information 4 92 Chapter 4 noclear Same as Ob option No clearing of non initialized static public variables See section 3 9 Non Initialized Variables for more information default_attributes Defaul
241. gisters codegen temporary results C return values R6 R9 C register variables and saved register parameters R12 R15 Fast C parameter passing and C register variables Table 3 14 General purpose registers c166 uses the following registers for C function return types Return type Register s bit PSW 6 USRO char RL4 short int R4 long R4 R5 R4 low word R5 high word float R4 R5 double user stack and R4 structure user stack and R4 pointer to stack block near pointer R4 far pointer R4 R5 R4 page offset R5 page number huge pointer R4 R5 R4 segment offset R5 segment number shuge pointer R4 R5 R4 segment offset R5 segment number Table 3 15 Register usage for function return types 3 88 Chapter 3 3 16 FLOATING POINT INTERFACING 3 16 1 INTRODUCTION SOFTWARE FLOATING POINT USAGE Section 3 16 describes the usage of floating point numbers This includes storage format trap handling and usage in assembly programs 3 16 2 THE IEEE 754 FORMAT Floating point numbers are stored in IEEE 754 format This manual explains its format only briefly For a more detailed version you are referred to the IEEE 754 standard published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc Basic single precision format The basic single precision format is like this seeeeeeeemmmmmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmMmMMM s sign e expone
242. gle or double quotes are to be used inside a quoted argument we have to go by the following rules a If the embedded quotes are only single or double quotes use the opposite quote around the argument Thus if a argument should contain a double quote surround the argument with single quotes b If both types of quotes are used we have to split the argument in such a way that each embedded quote is surrounded by the opposite type of quote 4 28 Chapter 4 Example This has a single quote embedded or This has a double quote embedded or This has a double quote and a single quote embedded 4 Some operating systems impose limits on the length of lines within a text file To circumvent this limitation it is possible to use continuation lines These lines end with a backslash and newline In a quoted argument continuation lines will be appended without stripping any whitespace on the next line For non quoted arguments all whitespace on the next line will be stripped Example This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line control filel mode type file2 type gt control filel mode type file2 type 5 Itis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file mycmds contains the following lines err test c The command line can now be cl166 f mycmds Compiler Use 4 29 G Option From the Project menu
243. har h gt size_t wcsrtombs char dst const wchar t src size t len mbstate t ps Converts a sequence of wide characters from the array indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multi byte characters that begins in the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps This function then stores these multi byte characters into the array pointed to by dst stopping if a multi byte character would exceed the limit of len total bytes or when a wide character is reached that does not correspond to a valid multi byte character or if a null character is stored Returns the number of bytes modified not including a terminating null character if any or size_t 1 if a wide character is encountered that does not correspond to a valid multi byte character Libraries 6 101 wesspn include lt wchar h gt size_t wcesspn const wchar_t sl const wchar t s2 Returns the length of the maximum initial segment of wide string s1 which consists entirely of wide characters from wide string s2 wcsstr include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wcsstr const wchar_t sl const wchar_t s2 Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of wide string s2 in the wide string s1 Returns NULL if not found westod include lt wchar h gt double wcstod const wchar_t nptr wchar_t endptr Converts the initial portion of the wide string pointed to by nptr to double Initial white spaces are skipped A pointer t
244. hat does not call any other function is called a leaf function If a function is a leaf function and the C code does not calculate the address of a parameter via the amp operator the parameters of this function do not have to be saved Thus the parameters of such a function are left in the input registers A lot of C library functions such as strlenQ strepyQ etc meet these requirements Non leaf functions must save the parameter registers on the user stack at function entry as if they were pushed by the caller However the code generator tries to use the register copies of these parameters as long as possible If automatic registers are available these registers are used instead of the user stack If a parameter does not fit anymore in the parameter registers or the parameter is a float double or a structure union not a pointer it is passed via the more conventional user stack All next parameters are passed via the stack to maintain correct stack offsets even if one of these next parameters would fit in the register area The following examples small model clarify this item Example 1 void funcl long 11 int i long 12 char p R12 R13 R14 stack stack not R15 better void funcl long 11 int i char p long 12 R12 R13 R14 R15 stack Example 2 void func2 double d double p int i stack stack stack better void func2 double p int i double d R12 R13 stack 3 6 1 STAT
245. he code buffer and assumes register contents remain valid pragma endasm Switch back to the C language You should realize that using these pragmas results into non portable and hard to simulate code Therefore usage of these pragmas should be minimal C Variable Interface for Pragma asm The pragma asm and endasm synopsis of the pragmas is as follows pragma asm pseudo_reg varname pseudo_reg varnamel pragma endasm varname pseudo_reg varname pseudo_reg The arguments of the pragmas are varname name of a C variable of type char or int signed or unsigned pseudo_reg a pseudo register name with the synopsis w b inum w word register RO R15 b byte register RLO 7 RHO 7 i indirect address register RO R3 some addressing modes only support these registers 3 73 3 74 Chapter 3 num a user defined number of the pseudo register This number is not related to the register that is substituted by the compiler The number must be in the range 0 15 When no w b or i is given a word register is used Examples 1 word register pseudo w2 word register pseudo b3 byte register pseudo i4 word register pseudo When a pseudo_reg is listed without assignment of a varname the compiler will reserve a scratch register When in the pragma endasm a pseudo_reg is listed that is not listed in the pragma asm it will also be reserved as a scratch register Example pragma asm wl varl b2 var2
246. he nop instruction the peephole is flushed Code generation for _nopQ is exactly the same as the following inline assembly pragma asm nop inline nop instruction pragma endasm Returns nothing value P0 read from port PO MOV R12 P0 _nop delay for one cycle NOP P1 value write to port Pl MOV P1 R12 3 122 7 Chapter 3 _prior unsigned int _prior unsigned int value Use PRIOR instruction to prioritize value Returns number of single bit shifts required to normalize value so that its MSB is set to one register int value extern int leading zeros leading zeros _prior value PRIOR R4 R12 MOV _leading_zeros R4 _pwrdn void _pwrdn void Use PWRDN instruction to enter the power down mode In this mode all peripherals and the CPU are powered down until an external reset occurs Returns nothing if standby mode MOV R4 _ standby _mode JMPR cc_Z _13 _pwrdn CPU is powered down until an external interrupt occurs PWRDN _13 _srvwdt void _srvwdt void Use SRVWDT instruction to service the watchdog timer Returns nothing Language Implementation 3 123 _srvwdt service watchdog before it overflows SRVWDT _diswat void _diswdt void Use DISWDT instruction to disable the watchdog timer Returns nothing _diswdt disable watchdog timer DISWDT _einit void _einit void Use EINIT instruction to end the initiali
247. he source operand e Rm data16 points to the program memory e ahold cycle has to be generated by the ir_ready signal at the beginning of the operand fetch cycle Since the compiler is unaware of the actual location the source operand Rm datal6 refers to the generation of this addressing mode is completely surpressed CPU 21 Incorrect result of BFLDL BFLDH after a write to internal RAM Infineon STMicroelectronics reference CPU 21 Use compiler option BK Use libraries lib u Jextp lib The result of a BFLDL BFLDH instruction may be incorrect after a write to internal RAM This only happens under very specific circumstances CPU Functional Problems C 9 CPU_MOVB_JB Jump bit wrongly executed after byte manipulation instructions Infineon reference CPU_MOVB JB Use compiler option BZmovbjb Use libraries lib u Jextp lib When a JB JNB JBC JNBS on a GPR follows an instruction that performs a byte write operation MOVB ADDB ADDBC ANDB XORB ORB NEGB CPLB SUBB SUBCB on the same GPR but on the byte that is not been used by the JB JNB JBC JNBS i e the byte where the bit used by the jump is not located the program flow gets corrupted That means the jump may be wrongly taken or not taken A side effect of this bug is that further program branches may also lead to illegal instruction fetches fetches are performed from wrong addresses Example 1 Assume Rx 0 is 0 x any GPR 0 7 MOVB RxH an
248. hed return i warning Compiler Diagnostics 5 29 W 184 empty pragma name in z option ignored After the z option you must specify an existing pragma See the description of the z option for details I 185 prototype synthesized at line number in name This is an informational message containing the source file position where an old style prototype was synthesized This message is preceded by error E 146 W 147 W 148 W 150 E 154 W 182 or E 203 E 186 array of type bit is not allowed An array cannot contain bit type variables E 187 illegal structure definition A structure can only be defined initialized if its members are known So struct unknown s 0 is not allowed E 188 structure containing bit type fields is forced into bitaddressable area This error occurs when you use a bitaddressable storage type for a structure containing bit type members E 189 pointer is forced to bitaddressable pointer to bitaddressable is illegal A pointer to bitaddressable memory is not allowed W 190 long float changed to float In ANSI C floating point constants are treated having type double unless the constant has the suffix f If you have specified an option to use float constants a long floating point constant such as 123 12 1 is changed to a float E 191 recursive struct union definition A struct or union cannot contain itself The following example generates this error struct s struct
249. hen pragma noframe is entered before the interrupt function Since local register banks are not memory mapped the compiler can not copy the user stack pointer RO to the new register bank Therefore each local register bank will have its own user stack area C166 USO will be used together with register bank 1 C166 _US1 will be used together with register bank 2 3 80 Chapter 3 The compiler estimates the size of each seperate stack based upon the code inside interrupt functions only User stack space occupied by functions which are called from the interrupt function are not taken into account The estimated user stack size can be adjusted using a new function qualifier _stacksize num Where num specifies the user stack adjustment in bytes A positive number increases the compiler estimates by num bytes a negative value decreases it If the sum of the compiler estimation and the stack adjustment is negative a warning will be generated and the value will be truncated The value of num must be even The _stacksize qualifier can only be used in combination with the local register banks for example _localbank 0 is NOT allowed and interrupt functions User stack size estimations will not be performed if pragma nocustack was used Of course it is still possible to adjust the size of the generated user stack sections at locate time using the SECSIZE control The complete definition of an interrupt function could look li
250. huge _ sstrcpy char shuge s const char shuge ct Copies shuge string ct into the shuge string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s _sstrcspn include lt string h gt size_t _sstrcespn const char shuge cs const char shuge ct Returns the length of the prefix in shuge string cs consisting of characters not in the shuge string ct 6 20 Chapter 6 7 _sstrlen include lt string h gt size t _sstrlen const char shuge cs Returns the length of the shuge string in cs not counting the NULL character _sstrncat include lt string h gt char shuge _sstrncat char shuge s const char shuge ct size tn Concatenates shuge string ct to shuge string s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character Returns s _sstrncmp include lt string h gt int _sstrncmp const char shuge cs const char shuge ct size tn Compares at most n bytes of shuge string cs to shuge string ct Returns lt Oifes lt ct 0 ifes ct gt O0ifes gt ct Libraries 6 21 _sstrncpy include lt string h gt char shuge _sstrncpy char shuge s const char shuge ct size tn Copies shuge string ct onto the shuge string s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character if the string is smaller than n characters Returns s _Sstrpbrk include lt string h gt char shuge _sstrpbrk const char shuge cs const char shuge ct Returns
251. i3 var3 4 EXTERN XVAL WORD BVAL BYTE YVAL WORD MOV 4 wl fill temporary register MOV XVAL 4 save in some memory location MOV BVAL b2 save in some memory location MOV i3 2 small instruction Rn data4 MOV wl YVAL get some memory location pragma endasm retval wl se Ne Ne The compiler will take care that the requested registers are free to be used and that their original content is saved and restored if needed When the compiler is not capable of allocating registers for the listed pseudos an error message will be issued The number of pseudos that can be allocated for inline assembly depend on the complexity and size of the C code part of the function Defining inline assembly functions can be done by using the pragma asm interface in an inline C function Gb See section 3 17 1 User Defined Intrinsics in this chapter Language Implementation 3 75 Example _inline int swap_add int a int b int rv pragma asm l a 2 b 3 MOV 3 1 MOV 1 2 MOV 2 3 ADD 3 1 pragma endasm rv 3 return rv Known restriction The pragma asm may cause an inline assembly to be optimized away by the c166 flow optimizations For example void example void goto the_end pragma asm entry assembly statements here will not be emitted by c166 because it is considered not reachable even when the assembly starts with a label pragma endasm the_end
252. ial stack frame Manual Purpose and Structure XIII RELATED PUBLICATIONS The C Programming Language second edition by B Kernighan and D Ritchie 1988 Prentice Hall ANSI X3 159 1989 standard ANSI C166 ST10 Cross Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Manual TASKING MA019 000 00 00 C166 ST10 C Compiler User s Manual TASKING MA019 012 00 00 C166 ST10 CrossView Pro Debugger User s Manual TASKING MA019 041 00 00 C16x User s Manuals Infineon Technologies ST10 User s Manuals STMicroelectronics ST10 Family Programming Manual STMicroelectronics XC16x Super10 User s Manuals Infineon Technologies STMicroelectronics XIV Manual Purpose and Structure e CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL The notation used to describe the format of call lines is given below Items shown inside curly braces enclose a list from which you must choose an item Items shown inside square brackets enclose items that are optional The vertical bar separates items in a list It can be read as OR italics Items shown in italic letters mean that you have to substitute the item If italic items are inside square brackets they are optional For example filename means type the name of your file in place of the word filename An ellipsis indicates that you can repeat the preceding item zero or more times screen font Represents input examples and screen output examples bold font Repres
253. iate banked function indirectly The code memory bank number and the inter segment address of the banked function are passed to the run time library bank switch function called __banksw The general purpose registers R3 R4 and R5 are used for passing these parameters The code memory bank number of the banked function is passed in register RL3 The current code bank number must also be passed to __banksw because it might be needed to restore the code bank of the caller Therefore the current code bank number is passed in register RH3 When RH3 is set to zero the code bank does not need to be restored after the banked function returns The contents of register R3 need to be saved on the user stack by the calling function because saving it in the code bank switch function would cause a conflict with pre calculated offsets for C function parameters and automatics The inter segment address of the banked function is passed in registers R4 and R5 Code memory banking is only supported for inter segment function calls memory models small and large Therefore the near keyword is not allowed with a banked function The following C listing displays a call to a banked function which is located in code bank 1 and called by a non banked function The code generated by the compiler is displayed below int _bank 1 func_bl char long int x char p long 1 void main void x func_bl p 1 Language Implementation 3 137
254. ible to interrupt them with an interrupt function which also uses the memory management functions If reentrancy is needed with memory management functions you should use the Task Concept where each interrupt can have its own memory management In the tiny and small model the default memory allocation routines use the C166_NHEAP section which has the section type LDAT allowing a total heap size up to 64K Because paging is not used except for the small SND variant a linear 16 bit pointer is returned the maximum amount of memory asked for is not limited to a page 16K In the medium and large model the C166_FHEAP section is used by the default memory allocation routines This section has the section type HDAT allowing a total heap size greater then 64K However in these models paging is used a far pointer is returned This means that you cannot allocate dynamically a single buffer greater than one page 16K Of course you can allocate the whole heap in pieces of approximately 16K In these models you should use memory allocation with great care because the paging approach may introduce fragmentation of the heap For example if you allocate two times 9K of memory the second request does not fit in the same page as the first 9K So 9K will be allocated in the next page introducing a gap of approximately 7K which only will be used for requests fitting in 7K In the huge memory model the C166_FHEAP section is used
255. ic registers R12 R15 Very often the parameter computation can be done directly in the appropriate register In practice the bulk 80 90 of the calls pass four or fewer word sized parameters A special keyword _stackparm is introduced as a function qualifier like _interrupt to tell the code generator to pass all parameters via the user stack This keyword is very convenient for interfacing with existing assembly functions or when register usage must be minimized e g r6 is used for a small C interrupt function calling another C function void _stackparm assembly function char type long size Register parameter passing is NOT done if one of the following conditions is true e the dot arguments of a function having a variable argument list ANSI notation of prototype declaration using three dots e g void f char 7 e the called function has a prototype with the stackparm function qualifier e the register parameters are already full or one of the parameters cannot be passed in a register explained below in more detail If a variable argument list function e g printf is called without a valid prototype include lt stdio h gt run time errors occur due to parameter transfer mismatches If a function prototype is used with a function call but NOT with the function body or vice versa run time errors may occur due to parameter type mismatches 3 63 3 64 Chapter 3 A function t
256. id result and void parameter list A function declared with interrupt n may not accept any arguments and may not return anything 590 bank function qualifier allowed in small large huge model only code gt 64K The bank n function qualifier cannot be used in the tiny and medium memory models It is only allowed in the small large or huge memory model See also section 3 18 Code Memory Banking Compiler Diagnostics 5 39 E 591 conflict in name attribute The attributes of the current function qualifier declaration and the previous function qualifier declaration are not the same E 592 different name number The function prototype of an interrupt service routine must have the same vector number and using numbers as in the function definition The same applies to the bank number of a banked function W 593 function qualifier used with non function A function qualifier can only be used on functions E 595 bank function qualifier not allowed with near function Code memory banking is only useful in the small large and huge memory model code gt 64Kb W 596 pragma switch_force_table Os ignored jump table would exceed 16K The jump table does not fit in 16K E 597 indirect near call to function functionQ from huge function is not allowed near call to run time library function functionQ from huge function is not allowed A huge function may not call any standard C or run time library function or any other
257. iewing results 2 23 build an application 2 24 command line 2 24 control program 2 24 EDE 2 23 makefile 2 29 separale programs 2 26 built in functions 3 107 builtin c 3 128 C inline functions 3 44 language extensions 3 3 C function return types 3 87 C library 6 4 creating your own 6 111 interface description 6 10 C startup code 7 3 C166 stack 7 9 c166 h 3 144 6 7 C166INC 4 34 4 85 cached interrupts 3 82 CALL USER 7 6 Index CALLEINIT 7 6 CALLINIT 7 6 calloc 6 27 CAN 6 6 CAN library interface description 6 108 can_ext h 6 7 check_busoff_16x 6 108 check_mo_16x 6 108 check_mo15_16x 6 108 def_mo_16x 6 108 init_can_16x 6 109 Id_modata_16x 6 109 rd_mo15_16x 6 109 rd_modata_16x 6 109 send_mo_16x 6 110 canr_16x h 6 7 casting pointer to long 4 59 4 62 cc166 2 11 4 3 ceil 6 28 character arithmetic 3 57 4 12 chdir 6 28 check_busoff_16x 6 108 check_mo_16x 6 108 check_mo15_ 16x 6 108 class 3 30 4 91 class name 4 69 clear 4 91 clearerr 6 28 clearing variables 4 45 CLIBRARY 6 5 clock 6 28 close 6 29 code checking 3 140 code density 4 49 code memory banking 3 135 code memory fragmentation 3 37 code rearranging 4 57 combine 4 91 combine type 3 30 3 35 4 69 command file 4 27 Index command line options detailed compiler options 4 10 overview compiler options 4 6 overview control program options 4 4 command line
258. ile in a different directory see section 1 4 4 Modifying the License File Location If you already have a license file add the license key information to the existing license file If the license file already contains any SERVER lines make sure that the number of SERVER lines and their contents match otherwise you must use another license file See section 1 4 4 Modifying the License File Location for additional information Point to a license file on the server db Set the environment variable LM_LICENSE_FILE to port h ost where host and port come from the SERVER line in the license file On Windows you can use the License Administrator to do this for you In the License Administrator follow the steps to Point to a FLEXIm License Server to get your licenses If you already have installed FLEXIm v8 4 or higher for example as part of another product you can skip this step and continue with step 4 Otherwise install SW000098 the Flexible License Manager FLEXIm on the license server where you want to use the license manager If FLEXIm has already been installed as part of a non TASKING product you have to make sure that the bin directory of the FLEXIm product contains a copy of the Tasking daemon This file is present on every product CD that includes FLEXIm in directory licensing On the license server also add the license key to the license file Follow the same instructions as with Add a license key to a local lic
259. ile_union Default Treat unions conform their definition 4 98 4 6 ALIAS Chapter 4 By default the compiler assumes that each pointer may point to any object created in the program so when any pointer is dereferenced all register contents are assumed to be invalid afterwards When it is known that aliasing problems do not occur in the written C source alias checking may be relaxed use the Oa option or pragma alias Note that the option Oc must be on to use this option Relaxing alias checking may reduce code size Example 1 int i void func char p char c char d if i p amp c else p amp d c 2 d 3 p 4 i c may write to c or d gt aliasing object c or d p might have changed the value of c so c may not be used from register contents but MUST be read from memory gt alias checking MUST be ON in this case Compiler Use 4 99 Example 2 int i void func char p char c char d c 2 d 3 p 4 cannot write to c or d but to some other object i c p cannot have changed the value of c so c may be used from register contents gt alias checking may be OFF in this case Example 3 int array 2 main array 0 1 array 1 1 array 0 array 0 array 1 an interrupt might have changed the value
260. iler option xd x2 or x22 Returns 16 bit value from MAL x _COSTOREMAL CoSTORE R12 MAL _CoSTOREMAS int _CoSTOREMAS void Use the CoSTORE instruction to retrieve the 16 bit value stored in MAS Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns 16 bit value from MAS x _COSTOREMAS CoSTORE R12 MAS _CoSTOREMSW int _CoSTOREMSW void Use the CoSTORE instruction to retrieve the 16 bit value stored in MSW Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns 16 bit value from MSW x _COSTOREMSW CoSTORE R12 MSW Language Implementation 3 117 _CoSUB void _CoSUB long x Use the CoSUB instruction to subtract a 32 bit value from the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoSUB argl CoSUB R12 R13 _CoSUB2 void _CoSUB2 long x Use the CoSUB2 instruction to subtract a 32 bit value multiplied by two from the MAC accumulator Only available when the MAC instruction set is enabled with the compiler option xd x2 or x22 Returns nothing _CoSUB2 argl CoSUB2 R12 R13 _rol unsigned int _rol unsigned int operand unsigned int count Use the ROL instruction to rotate left operand count times Returns the result sj _rol ri 4 MOV R5 R9 ROL R5 04h MOV
261. iles before source field separated by semicolons E Bite Arguments The name of an include file Description Include file before compiling the C source This is the same as specifying include file at the first line of your C source Example c166 Hstdio h test c db Compiler Use 4 33 Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Select a scaling factor in the Interrupt vector scale box Note that this item is only available for XC16x Super10 architectures ext2 E iscale Arguments Specify scaling of the interrupt vector table Description The XC16x Super10 architectures ext2 allows a scalable interrupt vector table This option can be used to specify the scaling factor Scale Factor Size 0 x1 4 bytes vector no scaling 1 x2 8 bytes vector x4 16 bytes vector x8 32 bytes vector Table 4 4 Scaling factor Depending on the size of an interrupt vector table entry the compiler will try to place as much code from an interrupt function inside the vector table as possible AN This option can only be used in conjunction with the x2 option Example c166 x2 i3 test c Selects the XC16x Super10 architectures ext2 and specifies that each interrupt vector table entry is 32 bytes in size 4 34 Chapter 4 Option From the Project menu select Directories Add one o
262. ill use a DPP translation instead of the page or segment number supplied with the extend instruction EXTxx This problem occurs only when the last instruction of this extend instruction uses the addressing mode Rn Rm datal6 When you use the BE compiler option the compiler will lengthen the extend sequence with one instruction when it generates an instruction using this addressing mode CPU Functional Problems CPU 11 Interrupted multiply Infineon reference CPU 11 Use compiler option BU Use libraries lib u 166p lib lib u Jextp lib lib u Jext2p lib This solution should be used where failures occur for interrupts during the MUL and MULU instructions For C166 derivatives the compiler option BU emits code using run time library calls for the multiply operations In these run time library calls the operations are protected against interrupts so that the problem cannot occur For ext and ext2 derivatives multiply operations are protected inline using ATOMIC instructions In some cases an additional NOP might be generated after the multiply instruction When you want to use the inline protection you should use both the compiler options x i and BU When using the BU option you should also link libraries in which the divide operations are protected The libraries in the directories Lib 166p lib extp and lib ext2p also have the divide protected against interrupts but can be used safely to bypass
263. imited this can result in larger code When the register set is too small the compiler may not be able to generate code at all In this case assertion errors can be expected This is a known restriction and the register set should be increased prior to reporting the assertion error Examples rmybank This option declares a register bank with name mybank Unless otherwise specified with pragma regdef the register bank will consist of RO R15 r r0 r3 r5 r10 r15 This option causes all functions non interrupt and interrupt to use the registers from the given set Compiler Use 4 73 db pragma regdef r0 rl void _interrupt 0x10 _using SOMEBANK ISRO void pragma regdef r0 r2 void _interrupt 0x11 _using SOMEBANK ISR1 void pragma regdef r0 r3 pragma regdef void _interrupt 0x12 _using OTHERBANK ISR2 void The functions ISRO and ISR1 will use register bank SOMEBANK Function ISRO will only use registers RO and R1 Function ISR1 will only use registers RO and R2 The compiler will combine the used register sets and generates the following REGDEF directive SOMEBANK REGDEF RO R2 Function ISR2 will only use the registers RO and R3 Since pragma regdef without arguments is used the compiler will not generate a REGDEF directive nor will code be generated to perform a context switch rcomnbank c RO R1 R2 R5 This option declares a common register bank with the na
264. in the same source file Check your source file that each if ifdef or ifndef has a corresponding endif 5 no source modules You must specify at least one source file to compile 6 cannot create file The output file or temporary file could not be created Check if you have sufficient disk space and if you have write permissions in the specified directory 7 cannot open file Check if the file you specified really exists Maybe you misspelled the name or the file is in another directory 8 attempt to overwrite input file file The output file must have a different name than the input file Compiler Diagnostics 5 7 E 9 unterminated constant character or string This error can occur when you specify a string without a closing double quote or when you specify a character constant without a closing single quote This error message is often preceded by one or more E 19 error messages 11 file stack overflow This error occurs if the maximum nesting depth 50 of file inclusion is reached Check for include files that contain other include files Try to split the nested files into simpler files 12 memory allocation error All free space has been used Free up some memory by removing any resident programs divid the file into several smaller source files break expressions into smaller subexpressions or put in more memory 13 prototype after forward call or old style declaration ignore
265. int bitfield only at least five case labels are present total number of gaps between the case labels when sorted does not exceed the number of case labels It is obvious especially with large switch statements that the jump table approach executes faster than the jump chain approach If speed is needed e g an interrupt function it might be acceptable to use a jump table even if the number of gaps between the sorted case labels exceeds the number of case labels itself Therefore the second and third requirement can be overruled by using pragma switch force table and restored using pragma switch smart which is the default situation The command line equivalents are Os switch_force_table and OS default switch_smart The location of jump tables in the small memory model can be controlled by using pragma switch _tabmem_far which places jump tables in class CFARROM pragma switch _tabmem_near which places jump tables in class gt CNEARROM pragma switch _tabmem_ default which places jump tables on the default location which is controlled by the Oe OE command line option This is the default Language Implementation 3 87 d gt See section 3 2 5 Constant Romdata Section Allocation for details 3 15 REGISTER USAGE c166 uses the general purpose registers GPRs of the C166 ST10 as follows Register Usage RO User Stack Pointer USP R1 R5 R10 R11 General re
266. int bf9 9 bit offset 00 08 int bf7 73 bit offset 09 15 no padding needed The latter example does not need alignment nor padding The size of the structure is 2 bytes Note that an unnamed bit field with size 0 aligns to the next word boundary as is the case with non packed struct unions Language Implementation 3 49 3 3 TASK SCOPE c166 supports both the Task Concept and the Flat Interrupt Concept These two concepts are explained in the chapter Software Concept of the TASKING Cross Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Manual We strongly recommend reading this section first When the Task Concept is strictly followed the entry point of each task is an interrupt function either activated by hardware interrupt or by software TRAP instruction Each task has only one entry point and no code and data is shared This implies that reentrancy of code does not exist See section 3 12 Interrupt in this chapter for more details about interrupt functions In C the outermost level of scope is a public non static variable Via the extern keyword this variable can be accessed in other C modules This scope level in C is treated by c166 as the task scope public in the Task Concept This means that all public extern variables are not known outside the task This allows each task to have its own I O channels and administration e g print heap area e g malloc floating point
267. integer Initial white spaces are skipped Then a value is read using the given base When base is zero the base is taken as defined for integer constants I e numbers starting with an 0 are taken octal numbers starting with Ox or 0X are taken hexadecimal Other numbers are taken decimal When endp is not a NULL pointer after this function is called endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion Returns the read value sirxfrm include lt string h gt size t strxfrm char ct const char cs size tn Transforms the string pointed to by cs and places the resulting string into the array pointed to by ct No more than n characters are placed into the resulting string pointed to by ct including the terminating null character Returns the length of the transformed string swprintf include lt wchar h gt int swprintf const wchar_t s size t n const wchar_t format Is equivalent to fwprintf except that the output is written to an array of wide characters argument s No more than n wide characters are written including a terminating null wide character Returns the number of wide characters written in the array not counting the terminating null wide character or a negative value if an encoding error occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be written 6 90 Chapter 6 7 swscanf include lt wchar h gt int swscanf const wchar_t s const wchar_t fo
268. inting will also stop f double e E double g G double n int the number of characters written so far is written into the argument This should be a pointer to an integer in default memory No value is printed 6 72 Chapter 6 Character Printed as p pointer printed as a hexadecimal number prefixed with lt near gt lt far gt or lt huge gt For the different pointer types the following formats are used lt near gt 0000 lt far gt PPPP 0000 lt huge gt SS 0000 where o is offset P is page s is segment No argument is converted a is printed Table 6 1 Printf conversion characters The p conversion character can be used to print pointers In the tiny and small memory models pointers will be printed as near pointers by default In the medium and large memory models pointers will be printed as far pointers by default By specifying one of the length modifiers h T or T a pointer will always be printed as near far or huge respectively Because of the large overhead of the printfQ function on small programs three different versions of the formatter _doprint c are delivered The LARGE version is able to print everything as specified above The MEDIUM version has no floating point formatting When a floating point conversion character is found errno is filled with the correct error number printf stops immediately The SMALL version does not print floa
269. inus shall not be applied to an unsigned expression sizeof should not be used on expressions with side effects The implementation of integer division should be documented The comma operator shall only be used in a for condition MISRA C 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 R A R R A A A R A R R R A R R R R A R R A R R A Don t use implicit conversions which may result in information loss Redundant explicit casts should not be used Type casting from any type to or from pointers shall not be used The value of an expression shall be evaluation order independent No dependence should be placed on operator precedence rules Mixed arithmetic should use explicit casting Tests of a non Boolean value against 0 should be made explicit F P variables shall not be tested for exact equality or inequality Constant unsigned integer expressions should not wrap around There shall be no unreachable code All non null statements shall have a side effect A null statement shall only occur on a line by itself Labels should not be used The goto statement shall not be used The continue statement shall not be used The break statement shall not be used except in a switch An if or loop body shall always be e
270. ion d n exception When there is a floating point operation after this if statement and it generates a floating point trap Then the program execution also continues in the else part of this if statement because the environment buffer was saved to it Figure 3 6 Example floating point trap handling C listing 3 102 Chapter 3 The floating point trap handler described by the assembly listing in figure 3 7 is archived in the floating point libraries Scase Sgenonly g Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe Fe ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER EKER ER EKER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER ER 7 7 MODULE trap asm APPLICATION Floating point library 80166 ek r DESCRIPTION Floating point trap handler which uses longjmp to TR return to a previous saved environment or loops infinite when no environment is save to return to r INPUT Register R1 contains the trap code ok r Trap code Rl old R1 IEEE Description ar EIOVFL 3 Integer overflow 7 EFOVFL 4 4 Float overflow ak EFUNFL 5 8 Float underflow ak EFDIVZ yi 2 Float division by zero EFUND EFINVOP 9 1 Float invalid operation Hee ECONV 10 32 Conversion error 7 ESTKUN T1 Floating point stack underflow 7 ESTKOV 12 Floating point stack overflow EFINEXCT 16 iad ANALIST Guus Jansman r Copyright 1991 2002 Altium BV ok DEES SSIES ISS SSSI ISSCC K E K E ISIS IIS A E R KE SEI III E A INCLU
271. ion Interrupt functions cannot return anything and must have a void argument type list The function type qualifier interrupt takes one interrupt number 1 0 127 as argument void _interrupt interrupt number isr void For example void _interrupt 0x22 timer void The interrupt number 1 is reserved for a so called symbolic interrupt This means that c166 does not assign an interrupt number to this C function The interrupt function can be bound to any interrupt number in the locate stage of 1166 by the INTERRUPT control Language Implementation 3 77 Interrupt Frame c166 generates an interrupt frame inheriting the user stack pointer from the previous task switching context to a new register bank saving DPP registers and MDC MDH and MDL registers When the Oh command line option is set default the compiler optimizes the interrupt frame so that it only contains the parts needed to save resources used by the interrupt function You can also tell the compiler to omit the whole interrupt frame via the following pragma pragma noframe This allows you to make your own interrupt frame When you use pragma noframe a register bank is always allocated so that it is possible to refer to it in your own interrupt frame If you want to suppress the register bank allocation use pragma regdef 0 With the _using push function qualifier you can tell the compiler to use PUSH POP instructions to save GPR
272. irectories in which the macro preprocessor m166 looks for include files PATH With this variable you specify the directory in which the executables reside This allows you to call the executables when you are not in the bin directory Usually your system already uses the PATH variable for other purposes To keep these settings you need to add rather than replace the path Use a semicolon to separate pathnames TASKING_LIC_WAIT If you set this variable the tool will wait for a license to become available if all licenses are taken If you have not set this variable the tool aborts with an error message Only useful with floating licenses TMPDIR With this variable you specify the location where programs can create temporary files Usually your system already uses this variable In this case you do not need to change it Table 1 1 Environment variables The following examples show how to set an environment variable using the C166INC variable as an example dE See also section 4 4 Include Files in chapter Compiler Use 1 8 Chapter 1 Example Windows XP 2000 1 Right click on the My Computer icon on your desktop and select Properties The System Properties dialog appears 2 Select the Advanced tab and click on the Environment Variables button The Environment Variables dialog appears 3 In the System variables field click on the New button The New System Variable dialog appears 4
273. issing pragma endasm You cannot specify a pragma asm or asm_noflush when inline assembly is already active You have to use pragma endasn first 612 missing pragma asm The pragma endasm was found while inline assembly was not active Remove the pragma or insert a pragma asm 613 missing in inline assembly pragma Check the syntax of the pragma asm endasm was expected See section 3 11 Inline Assembly for the correct syntax 614 missing in inline assembly pragma Check the syntax of the pragma asm endasm was expected 615 illegal character character in inline assembly pragma Check the syntax of the pragma asm endasm A or was expected Compiler Diagnostics 5 41 E 616 illegal pseudo register in inline assembly pragma A pseudo register name has the following synopsis w b inum See section 3 11 Inline Assembly for more information E 617 pseudo register number already defined A pseudo register cannot be defined twice Use another name or number E 618 illegal variable name in inline assembly pragma The variable name specified after a pragma asm endasnm is not a valid identifier E 619 name undefined in inline assembly pragma A C variable with the name you specified to a pragma asm endasm does not exist Check if you specified the correct variable name E 620 pseudo register number undefined The pseudo register must first be defined after a pragma asm E 621
274. ister for each PEC channel The upper eight bits of this register are used as the segement number for SCRPx The lower eight bits are used as the segment number for DSTPx This allows PEC transfers between any kind of memory or register not necessarily in segment zero So if you want to use any kind of segment you should not use the PECADDRESSABLE sections The following example shows how to initialize a Super10 PEC buffer include lt regsuperl0bo h gt _shuge int buffer 1000 PECSEGO amp OxFFOO PECSEGO seg buffer DSTPO sof buffer 3 144 7 Chapter 3 3 21 PORTABLE C CODE 6 If you are developing C code for the C166 ST10 using c166 you might want to test the code on the host you are working on using a C compiler for that host Therefore the include file c166 h is delivered with the compiler which must be included in your C programs This header file checks if the predefined macro _C166 is defined c166 only If not all C166 ST10 language extensions read keywords are redefined to ANSI C equivalents Furthermore an adapted prototype of each C166 ST10 intrinsic function is present because these functions are not known by another ANSI compiler If you use these functions you should write them in C performing the same job as the C166 ST10 processor and link these functions with your application for simulation purposes If you want to isolate all functions using c166 language extensions in
275. ists Returns zero if successful 1 on error acos include lt math h gt double acos double x Returns the arccosine cos7 x of x in the range 0 7 xe 1 1 asctime include lt time h gt char asctime const struct tm tp Converts the time in the structure tp into a string of the form Mon Jan 21 16 15 14 1993 n 0 Returns the time in string form Libraries 6 25 asin include lt math h gt double asin double x Returns the arcsine sin 1 x of x in the range 2 2 1 2 xe 1 1 assert include lt assert h gt assert expr When compiled with NDEBUG this is an empty macro When compiled without NDEBUG defined it checks if expr is true or false If it is false then a line like Assertion failed expression file filename line num is printed Returns nothing atan include lt math h gt double atan double x Returns the arctangent tan x of x in the range 7 2 4 2 x 1 1 atan2 include lt math h gt double atan2 double y double x Returns the result of tan 1 y x in the range 1 7 6 26 Chapter 6 atexit include lt stdlib h gt int atexit void fcn void Registers the function fcn to be called when the program terminates normally Returns zero if program terminates normally non zero if the registration cannot be made atof include lt stdlib h gt double atof const char s Converts the
276. izations by transforming the intermediate code The next section discusses frontend optimizations backend The backend optimization phase Performs target processor specific optimizations Very often this means another transformation of the intermediate code and actions like register allocation techniques for variables expression evaluation and the best usage of the addressing modes Chapter 3 Language Implementation discusses this item in more detail The code generator phase This phase converts the intermediate code to an internal instruction code representing the C166 ST10 assembly instructions 2 6 Chapter 2 7 The peephole optimizer phase This phase uses pattern matching techniques to perform peephole optimizations on the internal code e g deleting obsolete moves It also performs pipeline optimizations replacing NOP instructions with other instructions which do not interfere with the pipeline effects of the processor Another task of the peephole optimizer is to convert JMPR instructions to JMPA instructions or to reverse the condition of conditional bit jump instructions if the destination label is not within the REL range 128 to 127 words Finally the peephole optimizer translates the internal instruction code into assembly code for a166 The generated assembly does not contain any macros The data flow analysis DFA peephole optimizer phase This phase uses data flow analysis DFA to perform optimization
277. ize bytes Huge data size bytes Shuge data size bytes System data size bytes Internal ram data size bytes Bit si ze bits Bit addressable size bytes User stack size bytes Register bank size GPR s processed 13 lines at 1331 lines min total tokens 34 symbols 226 m NODDPTPACDCATONDAD 4 77 4 78 Chapter 4 U Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing Undefine one or more predefined macros by disabling the corresponding check box E Uname Arguments The name macro you want to undefine Description With this option you can undefine an earlier defined macro name as with undef This option is for example useful to undefine predefined macros The following predefined ANSI C standard macros cannot be undefined _ FILE current source filename _ LINE__ current source line number int type _ TIME hh mm ss _ DATE Mmn dd yyyy _STDC__ level of ANSI standard This macro is set to 1 when the option to disable language extensions A is effective Whenever language extensions are excepted _ STDC _ is set to 0 zero Example To undefine the predefined macro _C166 enter c166 U_C166 test c d Section 3 5 Predefined Macros Compiler Use 4 79 Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language Enable the Treat
278. ject 0 Files ek ear Add existing files Scan existing files Add new files to the project Now you can add all the files you want to be part of your project 6 Click on the Add new file to project button The Add New File to Project dialog appears Add New File to Project JM Greate new window Browse ox Caneel Her _ 2 20 Chapter 2 7 7 Enter a new filename for example hello c and click OK A new empty file is created and added to the project Repeat steps 6 and 7 if you want to add more files 8 Click OK The new project is now open EDE loads the new file s in the editor in separate document windows EDE automatically creates a makefile for the project in this case getstart mak This file contains the rules to build your application EDE updates the makefile every time you modify your project Edit your files 9 As an example type the following C source in the hello c document window include lt stdio h gt void main void printf Hello World n 10 Click on the Save the changed file lt Ctrl S gt button LI EDE saves the file Overview 2 21 2 8 SET OPTIONS FOR THE TOOLS IN THE TOOLCHAIN The next step in the process of building your application is to select a target processor and specify the options for the different parts of the toolchain such as the C compiler assembler linker and debugger Select a target processo
279. ke this Define an interrupt function using local register bank 1 assuming the hardware automatically selects local bank 1 upon interrupt Increase the compiler estimated user stack size by 40 bytes The user stack will be allocated in section C166 USO void _interrupt 0x10 _localbank 1 _stacksize 40 ISR void return Another feature of the ext2 architectures is the scalable interrupt vector table The compiler uses this feature by trying to inline as much code as possible inside the interrupt vector table Small interrupt functions can be located inside the vector table completely This will improve interrupt latency The size of an entry in the interrrupt vector table can be supplied to the compiler by the command line option Language Implementation 3 81 inum Where num can be one of the following No scaling 4 bytes entry 2x the normal size 8 bytes entry 4x the normal size 16 bytes entry 8x the normal size 32 bytes entry WNr Oo When either option is supplied to the compiler it will try to reorder and move code from the interrupt frame to the interrupt vector table Where possible the context switch will be done just before the JMPS instruction which jumps to the ISR By doing this the execution time of the JMPS instruction will be hidden by the context switch the compiler will put all sections that have to be inlined in a special section called C166_INT with cla
280. l MISRA C checks misracn Generate warnings for advisory MISRA C rules misrac advisory warnings 4 9 4 10 Chapter 4 Description Options Generate warnings for required MISRA C rules Display module summary and write section information in output file Suppress one or all warning messages Suppress warning messages 183 196 and 216 misrac required warnings t w number wstrict Table 4 3 Compiler options functional 4 3 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPILER OPTIONS Option letters are listed below Each option except o see description of the o option is applied to every source file If the same option is used more than once the first most left occurrence is used The placement of command line options is of no importance except for the I and o options For those options having a file argument o and f the filename may not start immediately after the option There must be a tab or space in between All other option arguments must start immediately after the option Source files are processed in the same order as they appear on the command line left to right With options that can be set from within EDE you will find a mouse icon that describes the corresponding action Compiler Use Option Description Display an explanation of options at stdout Example c166 4 12 Chapter 4 A Option From the Project men
281. le lists the file types used by the C166 ST10 toolchain Extension Description Source files CC CXX Cpp C source file input for the C compiler compiled to ic ccm C source file containing intrinsics input for the C compiler compiled to icm C C source file input for the C compiler cmp C source file containing intrinsics input for the C compiler asm Assembler source file hand coded or generated by C compiler from cmp or icm Generated source files ic C source file generated by the C compiler input for the C compiler icm C source file containing intrinsics generated by the C compiler input for the C compiler SIC Assembler source file generated by the C compiler Sif Source information file for the global storage optimizer gso Global storage optimizer file Object files Obj IEEE 695 relocatable object file generated by the assembler Ino Linked object module lib Object library file out Absolute locator output file abs IEEE 695 absolute object file hex Intel Hex absolute object file List files mpl Macro proprocessor list file Ist Assembler list file Inl Linker map file map Locator map file mcr MISRA C report file Overview 2 13 Extension Description Error list files err Compiler error messages file mpe Macro preprocessor error messages file erl Assembler error messages file elk Linker error messages file
282. le macro expansion The m flag overrules all other flags Examples The following command preprocesses the file test c and sends the output to the file preout cl166 E o preout test c The following command generates dependency rules for the file test c which can be used by mk166 the C166 ST10 make utility c166 Em test c test obj test c Compiler Use 4 23 e Option amp EDE always removes the output file on errors E e Description Remove the output file when an error has occurred With this option the make utility always does the proper productions Example c166 e test c 4 24 Chapter 4 e err Option Q In EDE this option is not useful E err Description Write errors to the file source err instead of stderr Example To write errors to the test err instead of stderr enter c166 err test c Compiler Use exit Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics Enable the Exit with error status even if only warnings were generated check box E exit Description Use alternative exit values in case warnings are reported In case warnings are reported the compiler returns an exit value as if there were errors reported 4 25 4 26 Chapter 4 F Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Floating Point Enable or disable f
283. ler Diagnostics 5 25 E 161 aggregates around operator do not match The contents of the structs unions or arrays on both sides of the operator must be the same The following example causes this error struct int a int b s struct int c int d int e t s t error E 162 operator requires an lvalue or function designator The amp address operator requires an lvalue or function designator The following is an example of this error int i i amp i 0 W 163 operands of operator have different level of indirection The types of pointers or addresses of the operator must be assignment compatible The following is an example of this warning char a char b a b warning E 164 operands of operator may not have type pointer to void The operands of operator may not have operand void W 165 operands of operator are incompatible pointer vs pointer to array The types of pointers or addresses of the operator must be assignment compatible A pointer cannot be assigned to a pointer to array The following is an example of this warning main typedef int array 10 array a array ap a warning E 166 operator cannot make something out of nothing Casting type void to something else is not allowed The following example generates this error 5 26 Chapter 5 void f void main int i i int error E 170 recursive expansion of inline function
284. les Environment Variable Description A166INC With this variable you specify one or more additional directories in which the assembler a166 looks for STDNAMES files C166INC With this variable you specify one or more additional directories in which the C compiler c166 looks for include files The compiler first looks in these directories then always looks in the default include directory relative to the installation directory CC166BIN When this variable is set the control program cc166 prepends the directory specified by this variable to the names of the tools invoked CC1660PT With this variable you specify options and or arguments to each invocation of the control program cc166 The control program processes these arguments before the command line arguments Software Installation Environment Description Variable LINK166 With this variable you specify extra options and or arguments to each invocation of the link stage of 1166 LM_LICENSE_FILE With this variable you specify the location of the license data file You only need to specify this variable if the license file is not on its default location c lex1m for Windows usr local f lexlm 1licenses for Solaris LOCATE166 With this variable you specify extra options and or arguments to each invocation of the locate stage of 1166 M166INC With this variable you specify one or more additional d
285. lized static public RAM data will be allocated in these default data sections unless the _far _huge _shuge keyword is explicitly used in the declaration or the T option is used for specifying a certain threshold value for this data All non initialized static public RAM data having a size below a certain threshold value will be allocated in these default data sections unless the _far _huge _shuge keyword is used explicitly in the declaration Strings floating point constants and jump tables are allocated in ROM and can never be in the default data sections 3 20 Chapter 3 The default data sections are member of a special DGROUP group which is of course limited to 16K It is possible to have a DGROUP area of max 16K per task DPP2 is ASSUMED to contain the page number of this group which is assigned at system startup During a context switch interrupt DPP2 and the scratch register DPPO are saved assigned new values and restored afterwards However you can also share the default data group area with the default data groups of each task interrupt The sections of the DGROUP must be declared as a COMMON section same name same size and same contents In that case the total size of the default data group area of the whole application is limited to 16K This results in the following DPP usage DPPO far pointer dereferencing external far variables DPP1 user stack RO user stack pointer xnear data space DPP2 default dat
286. llocO Otherwise the behavior is undefined Returns nothing nmalloc include lt stdlib h gt void near nmalloc size_t size Near variant of mallocQ See section 7 3 Heap Size nrealloc include lt stdlib h gt void near nrealloc void _near p size t size Near variant of realloc Q See section 7 3 Heap Size offsetof include lt stddef h gt int offsetof type member Be aware offsetof for bit structures unions may give unpredictable results Also the offsetofQ of a bitfield is undefined Returns the offset for the given member in an object of type Libraries 6 69 open include lt fcntl h gt int open const char name int flags Opens a file a file for reading or writing This function calls _open Gb See also fopen Returns the file descriptor if successful a non negative integer or 1 on error perror include lt stdio h gt void perror const char s Prints s and an implementation defined error message corresponding to the integer errno as if by fprintf stderr s s n s error message The contents of the error message are the same as those returned by the strerror function with the argument errno dE See also the strerror function Returns nothing pow include lt math h gt double pow double x double y A domain error occurs if x 0 and y lt 0 or if x lt 0 and y is not an integer Returns the resul
287. loating point options fee Fiflags Arguments Optionally a floating point control flag Default Fs Description Control floating point The flags which are controlled by a letter can be switched on with the lowercase letter and switched off with the uppercase letter F used without flags is the same as using Fs Currently the following flags are implemented c Enables the use of float constants C Default This flag is ignored when Fs is set s Forces using single precision Implies Fc S Default Compiler Use 4 27 f Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option to the Additional options field E f file Arguments o A filename for command line processing The filename denote standard input may be used to Description Use file for command line processing To get around the limits on the size of the command line it is possible to use command files These command files contain the options that could not be part of the real command line Command files can also be generated on the fly for example by the make utility More than one f option is allowed Some simple rules apply to the format of the command file 1 Itis possible to have multiple arguments on the same line in the command file 2 To include whitespace in the argument surround the argument with either single or double quotes 3 If sin
288. ls When the compiler detects no registers need to be saved in the interrupt frame the register bank will be omitted unless pragma noframe has been applied Language Implementation 3 79 3 13 EXTENSIONS FOR THE XC16x Super10 ARCHITECTURES The XC16x Super10 architectures support fast register bank switching using local register banks You can make use of this feature using the _localbank keyword This keyword can only be applied on interrupt functions _localbank num Where num can be one of the following 3 Use local register bank 3 but assume the hardware automatically swithches the register bank upon interrupt Enhanced Super10 only option x22 2 Use local register bank 2 but assume the hardware automatically swithches the register bank upon interrupt 1 Use local register bank 1 but assume the hardware automatically swithches the register bank upon interrupt 0 Use global register bank as usual 1 Use local register bank 1 and emit instruction in interrupt frame to select the correct local register bank 2 Use local register bank 2 and emit instruction in interrupt frame to select the correct local register bank 3 Use local register bank 3 and emit instruction in interrupt frame to select the correct local register bank Enhanced Super10 only option x22 Only the _localbank 0 qualifier can be used in conjunction with the _using qualifier The correct register bank will not be selected w
289. lt Ot medium and large model OT tiny and small model Description With Ot the compiler turns tentative declarations such as int i into defining occurrences e g int i 0 With OT declarations remain tentative as long as possible d Section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Compiler Use 4 63 Ou OU Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Use user stack for interrupt functions fee Ou OU Default OU Description With Ou the compiler uses the user stack instead of the system stack for task switch interrupt With OU the compiler uses the system stack for task switch interrupt 4 64 7 Chapter 4 Ov OV Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable the Dataflow analysis peephole DFAP check box fee Ov OV Default OV Description With Ov you enable the data flow analysis peephole DFAP optimizer With OV you disable the data flow analysis peephole DFAP optimizer This optimizer uses data flow analysis in the peephole to optimize the generated code Unlike the normal peephole DFAP has function scope and can optimize when there are program flow changes involved
290. lthough these keywords are also used by other C compilers for the 8086 family they are not part of the standard C language C is meant as a portable language In practice the majority of the C code of a complete application will be standard C without using any language extension This part of the application can be compiled without any modification using the memory model which fits best to the requirements of the system code size amount of external RAM etc Therefore c166 has a number of features optimizing data access on standard C in all memory models Note that a special section is present called 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Only a small part of the application will use language extensions These parts often deal with items such as I O using the extended special function registers high execution speed needed high code density needed access to non default memory required e g far huge shuge data bit type needed 3 6 Chapter 3 C interrupt functions 3 2 1 MEMORY MODELS c166 supports five memory models tiny small medium large huge You can select one of these models with the M option If you do not specify a memory model on the command line c166 uses the small memory model by default The memory models with their characteristics are represented in the following table Model DPP SEGMENTED CPU normal code far near usage control segmented
291. ly handled with conditional jumps Infineon reference CR107092 Use compiler option BZc166svlext Use libraries lib u Jextp lib Affected are the instructions EXTR EXTP EXTPR EXTS EXTSR and ATOMIC since the responsible code generates the control signals for all these instructions however the effects will differ Example EXTR JB MOV MOV CALL JMP_TARGET MOV MOV 1 DP1H 6 JMP_ TARGET taken jump MDC 0000Fh MDH MDL never reached MDC 0000Fh MDH MDL In this example the jump is correctly executed and taken However the control signal for the extended register sequence is not reset So at JMP_TARGET the extend sequence is still effective This means that the move instruction is extended and instead of writing to the SFR MDC FFOEh the move instruction writes to address F10Eh an ESFR address The bug occurs with taken conditional jumps only since they are executed as two cycle commands and therefore re injected in the pipeline If the jump is not taken or unconditional the sequence above will work properly since these jumps are executed as single cycle commands With extr 2 in the sequence above the second move will be affected as well ATOMIC instructions seem to be a minor issue since they do not create invalid accesses in this case the consequence of the bug is that the ATOMIC sequence will be extended to the target instructions also Workaround Do not jump from extend sequenc
292. macro on the command line and in the source with a define directive It also can be caused by macros imported from include files To eliminate the warning either remove one of the definitions or use an undef directive before the second definition 35 bad filename in line The string literal of a line if present may not be a wide char string So line 9999 L t45 c is not allowed 36 debug facility not installed pragma debug is only allowed in the debug version of the compiler 37 attempt to divide by zero A divide or modulo by zero was found Adjust the expression or test if the second operand of a divide or modulo is zero 38 non integral switch expression A switch condition expression must evaluate to an integral value So char p 0 switch p is not allowed 39 unknown error number number This error may not occur If it does contact your local TASKING office and provide them with the exact error message 40 non standard escape sequence Check the spelling of your escape sequence a backslash followed by a number or letter it contains an illegal escape character For example c causes this warning Compiler Diagnostics 5 11 E 41 elif without f The elif directive did not appear within an if ifdef or ifndef construct Make sure that there is a corresponding if ifdef or ifndef statement in effect before this statement E 42 syntax error expecting parame
293. mat va_list arg Does a formatted write to standard output Instead of a variable argument list as for printf Q this function expects a pointer to the list d See also printfO and _write0 vsprintf include lt stdio h gt int vsprintf char s const char format va_list arg Does a formatted write to a string Instead of a variable argument list as for printf this function expects a pointer to the list d gt See also printfQ and _write0 vfwprintf include lt wchar h gt int vfwprintf FILE stream const wchar_t format va_list arg Is equivalent to fwprintf except that instead of a variable argument list this function expects a pointer to the list Returns the number of wide characters transmitted or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred 6 96 Chapter 6 7 vswprintf include lt wchar h gt int vswprintf const wchar_t s size t n const wchar t format va_list arg Is equivalent to swprintf except that instead of a variable argument list this function expects a pointer to the list Returns the number of wide characters written in the array not counting the terminating null wide character or a negative value if an encoding error occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be written vwprintf include lt wchar h gt int vwprintf const wchar_t format va_list arg Is equivalent to wprintf except that instead of a variable
294. me comnbank COMNBANK COMREG RO R5 Section 3 12 Interrupt Pragma regdef in section 4 5 Pragmas 4 74 Chapter 4 S Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Allocation of Variables Enable the Static allocation of automatics instead of user stack check box E s Pragma static Description All functions of the C module are compiled using static memory for non register function automatics This option can be useful for non recursive applications Section 3 6 1 Static Approach of Function Automatics Pragmas automatic and static in section 4 5 Pragmas Compiler Use 4 75 S Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Output Enable the Merge C source code with assembly output check box E5 s i Pragma source Description Merge C source code with generated assembly code in output file When the additional i sub option is specified the C source of the include files will also be merged Example c166 s test c NAME TEST C test c 1 int is test c 2 test c 3 int test c 4 main void test c 5 PUBLIC _main TEST 1 PR SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC CPROGRAM _main PROC FAR Gls Pragmas source and nosrouce in section 4 5 Pragmas 4 76 Chapter 4 T Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the Application entry and sele
295. me way as described above The following assembly listing displays the code the C compiler generates for an indirect near function call The near function called indirectly is in the function pointer array named _ fp Rx contains the index value Rn is a register used by the C compiler for temporary results D 6 Appendix D min code state size times mov Rn SOF __RETURN_LABEL 4 2 mov RO Rn 2 2 mov Rn Rx _fp 4 4 jmpi CC_UC Rn 2 4 __RETURN_LABEL 12 12 It is obvious that the code needed to return from a near function is always the same because the function does not know whether it is called directly or indirectly See the previous section for the code the C compiler generates to return from a near function 2 3 INDIRECT INTER SEGMENT JUMPS USING THE EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET Because the extended instruction set is available e g C167 the system stack can be used for indirect inter segment jumps Because with the extended instruction ATOMIC the standard PEC interrupts and class A hardware trap can be disabled for a specified number of instructions To perform an indirect inter segment jump the segment number and segment offset are pushed on the system stack and a RETS instruction is executed Then the execution resumes at the inter segment address pushed on the system stack To avoid that these instructions are interrupted they are protected with an ATOMIC instruction The following assembly li
296. mmmmmmmmmmmmMMMM mmmmmmmmmmmMmMMMMM mmmmmmmmMmMmMMMMMMM s sign e exponent m mantissa The formula for double precision floating point numbers is value 1 1 z 2e71023 3 16 3 STORAGE IN MEMORY Floating point numbers are stored in IEEE754 format Single precisions float and double precision double are stored in memory as shown below Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Single emmmmmmm seeeeeee mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm esscsosse cece eee osoesooe Double eeeemmmm seeeeeee mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm s sign e exponent m mantissa not used Single precisions numbers can be stored in a register pair In this case the format is First register Second register seeeeeeeemmmmmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmM s sign e exponent m mantissa Double precisions numbers are never stored in registers Language Implementation 3 91 3 16 4 SINGLE PRECISION USAGE Floats can be stored in memory and in registers The floating point library subroutines pass operands and return value through registers 3 16 4 1 FLOAT BASE EXPRESSION SUBROUTINES Operands return value The first operand is stored in R4 R5 in IEEE 754 format R4 R5 seeeeeeeemmmmmmm Tmmmmmmmmmmmmmnmm s sign e exponent m mantissa The second operand is stored in R10 R11
297. mpiler Diagnostics 5 19 int f int g int return g error typedef int int_type int h int_type return 0 error E 114 incomplete struct union type The struct or union type must be known before you can use it The following is an example of this error extern struct unknown sa sb sa sb unknown does not have a defined type The left side of an assignment the lvalue must be modifiable E 115 label name undefined A goto statement was found but the specified label did not exist in the same function or module The following is an example of this error 1 at 3 W 116 2 goto a error label a is not defined in 2 W 116 label name not referenced The given label was defined but never referenced The reference of the label must be within the same function or module The following is an example of this warning az a is not referenced E 117 name undefined The specified identifier was not defined A variable s type must be specified in a declaration before it can be used This error can also be the result of a previous error The following is an example of this error unknown i error unknown undefined i 1 as a result i is also undefined W 118 constant expression out of valid range A constant expression used in a case label may not be too large Also when converting a floating poin
298. n You can modify the user stack size using the SECSIZE control of the locator Run time Environment double precision return value conventional parameters pushed register parameters pushed register framesize automatics conventional stacksize automatics temporary storage stack pointer adjust Figure 7 1 Stack diagram Example 1166 task tl lno SECSIZE C166_US 50 task t2 lno SECSIZE C166_US 10 TO applic out 7 10 Chapter 7 7 7 3 HEAP SIZE The heap is only needed when dynamic memory management library functions are used malloc calloc free and realloc The heap is allocated by the linker for each task in a special public section called C166_FHEAP or C166_NHEAP both with the class name CHEAP having a default size of 0 bytes If you are using one of the memory allocation functions listed above in a certain task you must change the heap size for that task using the HEAPSIZE control at link stage When the Flat Interrupt Concept is used the link stage is skipped and the locator generates the C166_NHEAP and C166_FHEAP sections when it is needed You can use the HEAPSIZE control for changing the heap size at locate stage The dynamic memory management library functions are not reentrant because they use static data for the memory management This means that when the memory management functions are used it is not poss
299. n See the description of the R option for the correct syntax 557 illegal number in option You must specify a valid number decimal or hexdecimal to the option 558 maximum number of GPR s in a registerbank is 16 ignored If you specify a number of GPRs to the r option or pragma regdef it must have a value in the range 6 16 inclusive 560 static initialization of sfr sfrbit esfr esfrbit is not allowed For example the construction sfr SYSCON 2 is not allowed 561 illegal storage class for sfr sfrbit esfr esfrbit xsfr e sfr e sfrbit xsfr is not allowed as static extern automatic register or parameter 562 itis not allowed to change the align type for internal ram data sections Internal ram data sections are always IRAM addressable 563 function 0 is invalid interrupt number use mainQ An interrupt number must be in the range 0 to 127 or 1 564 section name may not be BYTE aligned The sectoin must be word page segment or PEC aligned 565 Illegal combine type The combine type must be one of L local P public C common G global S Sysstack U Usrstack or A address absolute section AT constant address 566 Illegal align type The combine type must be one of B byte W word P page S segment C PEC addressable or I RAM addressable Compiler Diagnostics 5 37 E 568 more than 16K initialized data for name use shuge or use the m option more
300. n initialized static public variables check box E Ob OB Default OB Description With Ob the compiler performs no clearing of non initialized static and public variables With OB the compiler performs clearing of non initialized static and public variables d gt Section 3 9 Non Initialized Variables Pragma noclear and clear in section 4 5 Pragmas 4 46 Chapter 4 Oc 0C Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Common Subexpression Elimination CSE fee Oc OC Default Oc Description With Oc you enable CSE common subexpression elimination With this option specified the compiler tries to detect common subexpressions within the C code The common expressions are evaluated only once and their result is temporarily held in registers or on the user stack With OC you disable CSE common subexpression elimination With this option specified the compiler will not try to search for common expressions Example Compile with OC 00 Compile with Oc 00 common subexpressions are found and temporarily saved char x Y a b c d void main void x a b c d y a b c d a b and c d are common d gt Pragmas cse resume and cse suspend in section 4 5 Pragmas Compiler Use
301. n is limited to 64K E 519 no indirection allowed on bit type Pointer to a bit variable and array of bit is not allowed because the 80166 has no instructions to indirectly access a bit variable E 531 restriction impossible to convert to type The structure or union cannot be casted to types bit char int long float or double E 539 operator not allowed on bit type See section 3 4 3 The Bit Type for a list of operators that are allowed on type bit E 540 bit type parameter not allowed A bit type variable is not allowed as parameter The allowed classes for bit are static public or extern See also section 3 4 3 The Bit Type E 541 bit type switch expression not allowed A bit typed expression is not allowed as switch expression See also section 3 4 3 The Bit Type E 542 argument number is not an integral constant expression The argument of the specified intrinsic function must evaluate to an integral value See section 3 17 Intrinsic Functions for the syntax of the specified intrinsic function Compiler Diagnostics 5 35 W 543 extern near might be in other data group check Ggroupname option is also used with module defining external If you use the G option it is your own responsibility to declare extern near variables within the same group See also section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models E 544 semaphore must be bit object The intrinsic functions testset and _testclear must have a bit
302. name An _inline function may not be recursive The following example generates this error _inline int a int i a i recursive call return i main a l error E 171 too much tail recursion in inline function name If the function level is greater than or equal to 40 this error is given The following example generates this error _inline void a a main a W 172 adjacent strings have different types When concatenating two strings they must have the same type The following example generates this warning char b L abc def strings have different types E 173 void function argument A function may not have an argument with type void Compiler Diagnostics 5 27 E 174 notan address constant A constant address was expected Unlike a static variable an automatic variable does not have a fixed memory location and therefore the address of an automatic is not a constant The following is an example of this error int a static int b a error E 175 not an arithmetic constant In a constant expression no assignment operators no operator no operator and no functions are allowed The following is an example of this error int a static int b a error E 176 address of automatic is not a constant Unlike a static variable an automatic variable does not have a fixed memory location and the
303. nclosed in braces All if else if constructs should contain a final else Every non empty case clause shall be terminated with a break All switch statements should contain a final default case A switch expression should not represent a Boolean case Every switch shall have at least one case Floating point variables shall not be used as loop counters A for should only contain expressions concerning loop control 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 Dis 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 A R R R R R R R R R R R R R A A R R A A R R Appendix A Iterator variables should not be modified in a for loop Functions shall always be declared at file scope Functions with variable number of arguments shall not be used Functions shall not call themselves either directly or indirectly Function prototypes shall be visible at the definition and call The function prototype of the declaration shall match the definition Identifiers shall be given for all prototype parameters or for none Parameter identifiers shall be identical for declaration definition Every function shall have an explicit return type Functions with no parameters shall have a void parameter list An actual parameter type shall be compatible with the prototype The n
304. nction Registers For more information on _bitword variables see section 3 4 4 The Bitword Type The storage class of the defined bit is ignored The storage class is inherited from the _bitword variable instead The _atbit attribute has no effect on variables which are declared extern 3 44 Chapter 3 In the following situation the bit b0 will be allocated statically Yet it will be initialized at run time each time the function is entered _bit funct void static _bitword bw _bit b0 _atbit bw 2 1 return b0 3 2 8 INLINE C FUNCTIONS inline With the _inline keyword a C function can be defined to be inlined by the compiler An inline function must be defined in the same source file before it is called When an inline function has to be called in several source files each file must include the definition of the inline function This is typically solved by defining the inline function in a header file Example _inline int add int a int b return a b void main void int c add 1 2 The pragmas asm and endasm are allowed in inline functions This makes it possible to define inline assembly functions See also section 3 11 Inline Assembly in this chapter Language Implementation 3 45 3 2 9 UNALIGNED DATA _noalign With the _noalign attribute you can tell the compiler that an object is possibly located at an unaligned address and that the compiler must n
305. nd side effects as described below in separate notes If you use this option it is your own responsibility to declare extern near variables within the same group Therefore the compiler emits warnings for extern near declarations if you use the G option Be sure that functions called by this module do NOT use their own default data Some C library functions might use default data too 3 2 1 8 NEAR XNEAR FAR HUGE AND SHUGE As described before a limitation of a predefined memory model is that when you change memory models all data and code address sizes are subject to change Therefore c166 lets you override the default addressing convention for a given memory model and access near far huge or shuge objects using special declarations This is done with the _near far _huge or _shuge keyword These special type modifiers can be used with a standard memory model except tiny to overcome addressing limitations for particular items either data or code without changing the addressing conventions for the program as a whole The near xnear far huge and _shuge keywords are not allowed with automatics and parameters unless used as a target of a pointer of course The following explains how the usage of these keywords affects the addressing of code data or pointers to code or data in all models Language Implementation 3 23 tiny model In this model all normal data is implicitly _near because the processor
306. ndex Index 3 Symbols BASE_DPPn 7 7 define 4 21 include 4 34 4 85 pragma 4 88 dlias 4 88 align 4 91 align32 4 89 asm 3 73 4 90 asm_noflush 3 73 4 90 autobita 4 90 automatic 4 90 dautosavemac 4 96 class 4 91 clear 4 91 combine 4 91 cse resume 4 91 cse suspend 4 91 custack 4 91 default_attributes 4 92 dfap 4 92 endasm 3 73 4 90 eramdata 3 68 4 92 fix_byte_write 4 93 fragment 4 93 fragment continue 4 93 fragment resume 4 93 global 4 95 global_dead_store_elim 4 93 indirect_access 4 94 iramdata 3 08 4 92 m166include 4 94 macro 4 95 no_global_dead_store_elim 4 94 nodlias 4 89 nodlign32 4 89 noclear 4 92 nocustack 4 91 nodfap 4 92 nofix_byte write 4 935 noframe 3 77 4 95 nomacro 4 95 noreorder 4 95 nosavemac 4 96 nosource 4 96 novolatile union 4 97 preserve_mulip 4 95 public 4 95 regdef 4 95 reorder 4 95 restore_attributes 4 92 resume _align32 4 89 romdata 3 68 3 70 4 93 save _attributes 4 92 savemac 4 96 size 4 96 source 4 96 speed 4 96 static 4 91 stringmem 4 96 suspend_align32 4 89 switch_force_table 4 96 switch_smart 4 97 switch_tabmem_default 4 97 switch_tabmem_far 4 97 switch_tabmem_near 4 97 volatile_union 4 97 undef 4 78 DMEASURE_TIME 2 25 g option D 4 Ou option D 3 P option D 3 __banksw 3 136 __DATE_ 4 78 __FILE__ 4 78 __FP_ENV 3 105 __LINE__ 4 78 __STDC_ 4 78 __TIME_ 4 78 _at attribute
307. ndex 10 7 using the makefile 2 29 execution speed 4 49 exit 6 30 exit status 5 4 5 5 exp 6 30 expression rearrangement 2 7 expression recognition 4 50 expression simplification 2 7 extended features 4 82 extended instruction set D 6 extensions to C 3 3 extern keyword 3 49 external memory 3 30 F fabs 6 31 far 3 21 far function D 7 far pointer 3 53 fast loops 4 54 fast view66 B 7 fcalloc 6 31 fclose 6 31 fentl h 6 7 open 6 69 feof 6 31 ferror 6 31 fflush 6 32 ffree 6 32 fgetc 6 32 fgetpos 6 32 fgets 6 33 fgetwc 6 33 fgetws 6 33 file extensions 2 12 file system simulation 6 7 fix_byte_write 4 93 float 3 53 4 26 float h 6 7 isinf 0 45 Index isinff 0 45 isnan 6 46 isnanf 6 46 floating license 1 9 floating point double precision 3 93 double base expression subroutines 3 93 double conversion subroutines 3 94 double support subroutines 3 95 register usage 3 96 IEEE 754 3 88 interfacing 3 88 single precision 3 91 6 6 float base expression subroutines 3 91 float conversion subroutines 3 92 register usage 3 92 storage in memory 3 90 trapping 3 97 usage for assembly programmers 3 90 floating point constants 3 19 floor 6 33 fmalloc 6 33 fmod 6 34 fopen 6 34 fprintf 6 35 fputc 6 35 fputs 6 35 fputwc 6 35 fputws 6 36 fragment 4 93 fragment continue 4 93 fragment resume 4 93 fread 6 36 frealloc 6 36 free 6 36 freopen 6 37
308. near For near variables the locator automatically assigns the correct page to the correct DPP register Note that all other relocatable variables in the concerning page will also be moved The dynamic assignments of DPP registers can be overruled by the linker locator controls However in case of absolute variables this will usually lead to errors because there is only one valid DPP register page number combination If two sections overlap or if not all near sections can be located the linker locator will generate an error message The _at attribute cannot be used with the bit system bita _sfr esfr xsfr and _iram memory modifiers Examples _near int i _at 0x29000 _far const char ch _at 0x2A900 100 int j k _at 0x2B002 int fptr int int _at 0x12344 3 42 7 Chapter 3 This will generate the following sections when compiled in the small memory model TEST_ TEST_ i TEST_ TEST_ TEST_ _ch TEST_ TEST_ TEST_ _k TEST_ TEST_ TEST_ 1_NB SECTION LDAT WORD AT 029000h CNEAR 1_NB_ ENTRY LABEL BYTE LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC i 1 NB ENDS 2_FC SECTION PDAT BYTE AT 02A900h CFARROM 2_FC_ENTRY LABEL BYTE DB 64h PUBLIC _ch 2_FC ENDS 3_NB SECTION LDAT WORD AT 02B002h CNEAR 3_NB_ENTRY LABEL BYTE LABEL WORD DS 2 PUBLIC _k 3_NB ENDS 4 NB SECTION LDAT WORD AT 012344h CNEAR 4 NB ENTRY LABEL BYTE _fptr LABEL WORD TEST_ TEST_ TEST_
309. nfineon STMicroelectronics reference LONDON 1751 Use compiler option BA Use libraries lib u Jext2p lib In the following situation DIVU R12 ADD R13 R14 MOV MSW will destroy the division MOV R13 MDH re Problem 13 Interrupted signed division Infineon reference Problem 13 Use compiler option BD BM can also be used Use libraries lib u 166p lib lib u Jextp lib lib u Jext2p lib lib u goldp lib Signed divide operations may produce incorrect results when an interrupt PEC standard interrupt or hardware trap occurs during an execution of the DIV or DIVL instuction Note that this bug will not occur for unsigned divisions When the BD option is used the compiler will disable interrupts during a signed division When the BM option is used all multiply and divide instructions will be protected against interrupts This bypasses several other CPU problems as well C 20 Appendix C 7 Problem 17 Interrupted multiply with RETI Infineon reference Problem 17 Use compiler option BI Use libraries no solution in libraries required When a multiply instruction has been interrupted it may be completed incorrectly after return from interrupt if a higher priority interrupt or hardware trap is generated while the RETI instruction is executed This problem does not occur with PEC transfers In this case the previously mentioned workaround can be used but at the price of an increased
310. ngs in ROM only This approach also saves RAM which can be very scarce in an embedded single chip application As mentioned before c166 offers the possibility to allocate a static initialized variable in ROM only when declared with the const qualifier or after a pragma romdata This enables the initialization of a const character array in ROM const char romhelp help allocation of 5 bytes in ROM only Language Implementation 3 71 Or a pointer array in ROM only initialized with the addresses of strings also in ROM only char const messages hello alarm exit ANSI string concatenation is supported adjacent strings are concatenated only when they appear as primary expressions to a single new one The result may not be longer than the maximum string length 509 characters The Standard states that identical string literals need not be distinct i e may share the same memory To save ROM space 166 overlays identical strings within the same module Allocation of string constants By default the compiler allocates string constants in the memory model s default memory space You can overrule this with pragma stringmenm pragma stringmem memory space Where memory space is one of Memory Space String Location _near near ROM _xnear xnear ROM _far far ROM _shuge shuge ROM _huge huge ROM default memory model default The default
311. nique class name combine type or align type with a section name With Relmem new you can specify a new class name for mem same as pragma class With Rcomem new you can specify a new combine type for mem same as pragma combine With Ralmem new you can specify a new align type for mem same as pragma align In this way the order 1166 allocates these sections can be specified in a locator command file Section 3 2 3 Section Allocation Pragmas align class and combine in section 4 5 Pragmas Compiler Use 4 71 F Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Enter the register definition in the Register usage field Optionally enter a register name in the Register bank name field If the bank must be common enable the Make register bank common check box EES rpramet clliregdel Pragma regdef Arguments name is the name of the register bank for this module c is the common flag regdef is the register bank definition Description With the r option you can specify the name of the register bank and optionally if this register bank must be common c or not The regdef argument is specified as a comma separated list of register ranges A range is defined as Rx Ry When a register bank is declared common the resulting range must consist of consecutive registers starting from RO In all cases RO must be present in the regi
312. nnot use struct union members tags labels parameters or inline function locals as a base symbol to define bits in E 752 _localbank qualifier only allowed with interrupt functions You can only use the _localbank function qualifier in combination with the interrupt function qualifier W 753 name not allowed with namer name2 or names ignored For example the _localbank function qualifier cannot be used in combination with stackparm bank or using ignored E 754 mame function qualifier can only be used in combination with x2 The _localbank and _stacksize qualifiers can only be used with the XC16x Super10 architecture E 758 _stacksize qualifier only allowed with interrupt functions using a local register bank For example the following is not allowed void _interrupt 0x10 _localbank 0 _stacksize 20 ISR void Because _localbank 0 indicates a global register bank W 759 stack size must be even ignored The value of the _stacksize function qualifier must be even W 760 negative stack size adjustment exceeds user stack size estimation truncated Suppose the compiler estimates that the occupied stack space for an interrupt function is 12 bytes If stacksize 14 is added to the function definition this warning is generated and the value of the _stacksize qualifier will be adjusted to 12 5 44 Chapter 5 W 761 keyword name only allowed in combination with x2 tH ignored The used
313. no registers anymore for name There were no free registers left to allocat this pseudo register E 622 improper use of bita bitword in declaration of ame The bita keyword is only allowed on structures unions and integral types W 720 OZ no longer supported This version of the compiler no longer supports the OZ option E 724 _at requires a numerical address You can only use an expression that evaluates to a numerical address E 725 _atQ address out of range for this type of object The absolute address is not present in the specified memory space E 726 _at only valid for global variables Only global variables can be placed on absolute addresses E 727 _atQ only allowed on non initialized variables Absolute variables cannot be initialized 5 42 W mint g Chapter 5 728 _at has no effect on external declaration When declared extern the variable is not allocated by the compiler 729 _atQ cannot be used on struct union members ignored 730 _at cannot be used on bit bita system sfr esfr xsfr and iram 731 _at this type of object must be word aligned 732 _at address out of range for this memory model The absolute address does not fit in the specified memory model You might want to use a larger memory model 733 bad argument to pragma cse expect a number suspend or resume See the description of pragma cse for more information 734 pragma cse suspend res
314. nr unsigned char xtd unsigned long id unsigned char dir unsigned char dlc unsigned char txie unsigned char rxie Define a message object in the CAN module Returns nothing Libraries 6 109 init_can_16x include lt can_ext h gt void init _can_16x unsigned int baud_rate unsigned char eie unsigned char sie unsigned char ie Initialization of the CAN module Returns nothing ld_modata_16x include lt can_ext h gt void ld _modata_16x unsigned char nr unsigned char upl data_ptr Load the data bytes of a message object Returns nothing rd_modata_16x include lt can_ext h gt void rd_modata_16x unsigned char nr unsigned char downl_ data_ptr Read the data bytes of a message object Returns nothing rad_mo15_16x include lt can_ext h gt void rd_mol5 16x unsigned char mol5 db ptr unsigned long mol5 id ptr unsigned char mol5 dlc ptr Read the contents of message object 15 Returns nothing 6 110 Chapter 6 send_mo_16x include lt can_ext h gt void send_mo_16x unsigned char nr Send message object Returns nothing Libraries 6 111 6 8 CREATING YOUR OWN C LIBRARY There are several reasons why it is desired to have a specially adapted C library Therefore all C sources of all library functions are delivered with the compiler These files are placed in the directory lib sre Windows or lib sre UNIX When creating your own library
315. ns If the cumulated size of all C166_DGROUP sections of a task exceeds 16K there are five possibilities to solve it to be tried in this order Declare near variables as xnear system variables Declare variables to be far explicitly using the _far keyword Declare variables to be huge explicitly using the _huge keyword Decrease the threshold values T option so more variables are allocated in far data sections If the threshold value is 0 only near variables will be allocated in the default data sections Decrease the number of near variables 3 22 7 6 a Chapter 3 Use this possibility only if the other solutions cannot be used Use the Ggroupname option to specify the group to be used by the compiler So for example one set of C modules can allocate their default data in the first data group and all other modules allocate their default data in a second data group If the G option is used the C compiler emits code at each public not static function entry point to preserve the current DPP2 value and assign the page number of the new correct data group to DPP2 At function exit the original DPP2 value is restored This seems rather expensive but the gain of code size by using DPP2 can be more than the loss introduced by these instructions This is the last alternative and certainly not recommended because it might introduce some dangerous hard to fi
316. nt m mantissa You can convert this to an understandable number with the formula value 1 1 4 m Qe 127 An example 0x40490fdb s 0 e 0x80 128 m 0x490fdb 4788187 Ak S10 4788187 51_ ies value 1 2 Sepre 2 1 1 0 5707964 2 3 14159274 Language Implementation Special case single precision 0 0 0 0 is stored as s000000000000000 0000000000000000 seeeeeeeemmmmmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmM s sign e exponent m mantissa Notice that there is a 0 0 and a 0 0 Special case single precision NaN Not a Number Generated when the result of an expression is undefined e g 0 0 0 0 NaN is stored as s111111111111111 1111111111111111 seeeeeeeemmmmmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm s sign e exponent m mantissa According to the IEFE standard not all mantissa bits have to be set for a number to be handled as NaN Special case single precision INF Infinity Generated when the result of an expression is larger than can be stored e g 1 0e30f 1 0e30f INF is stored as s111111110000000 0000000000000000 seeeeeeeemmmmmmm mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm s sign e exponent m mantissa Sign defines INF or INF Basic double precision format Double precision numbers are stored comparable with single precision numbers 3 89 3 90 Chapter 3 7 Basic format double precision number seeeeeeeeeeemmmm m
317. nter segment code access unless the _near keyword is used explicitly in the function prototype Therefore this model allows code access in all segments up to 16M As in the medium model all data accesses are far The four DPP registers do not contain the system startup values The DPP registers are used to access the 16M of data in 16K pages Because the paging principle is used with 14 bit address arithmetic data objects e g arrays cannot be greater than 16K one page unless the _huge or _shuge keyword is used The _huge keyword tells the compiler to generate 24 bit address arithmetic The _shuge keyword tells the compiler to generate 16 bit address arithmetic Of course the processor must run in segmented mode In section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge some details are present about efficiency in large data models Map example 256K huge data shuge data code near data normal data xnear aes code o Figure 3 4 Large memory map example 3 16 Chapter 3 Item Usage Comments CPU segmented code gt 64K allows code anywhere in 256K 16M normal data gt 64K paged data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single data object is limited to 16K for objects larger than the specified near data threshold see the T compiler option xnear data lt 16K 16K per task of fast accessible user data anywhere in 256K 16M via
318. nterrupt registers omit analog digital registers omit capture compare registers omit cpu registers omit PEC registers omit port I O registers omit serial I O registers omit timer registers omit analog digital registers omit capture compare registers omit cpu registers omit PEC registers omit port I O registers omit serial I O registers You can make your own special function register header file but in that case you must supply the same names to a166 by an STDNAMES file c166 and a166 do not generate symbolic debugging information for special function registers because the register names should be known by the debugger Because the special function registers are dealing with I O it is not correct to optimize away the access to these registers Therefore c166 deals with special function registers as if they were declared with the volatile qualifier _sfr varl is treated like volatile unsigned int varl _sfrbit var2 is treated like volatile bit var2 _xsfr var3 is treated like volatile unsigned int var3 3 62 7 Chapter 3 3 5 PREDEFINED MACROS In addition to the predefined macros required by the ANSI C standard the TASKING C compiler supports the predefined macros as defined in Table 3 13 The macros are useful to create conditional C code Macro Description _DOUBLE_FP Defined when you do not use compiler option F Treat double as float _SINGLE_FP Defined when you use compiler
319. nts SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 1 1 1 1 Introduction pe 34 sae Ah i AA N E ES 1 3 1 2 Software Installation 0 eee eee 1 3 1 2 1 Installation for Windows 00 00 e eee ee 1 3 1 2 2 Installation for Solaris 1 0 cc eee 1 4 13 Software Configuration 000 cee eee ee 1 5 1 3 1 Configuring the Embedded Development Environment 1 5 1 3 2 Configuring the Command Line Environment 1 6 1 4 Licensing TASKING Products 0 0000 0 1 9 1 4 1 Obtaining License Information 4 1 10 1 4 2 Installing Node Locked Licenses 04 1 10 1 4 3 Installing Floating Licenses 0 0 0 eee eee 1 11 1 4 4 Modifying the License File Location 1 13 1 4 5 How to Determine the Host ID 004 1 14 1 4 6 How to Determine the Host Name 1 14 OVERVIEW 2 1 2 1 Introduction to C C166 ST10 Cross Compiler 2 3 2 2 General Implementation 0 00 e eevee 2 4 2 2 1 Compiler Phases 2 ree eh ca eet Maced Ata eee 2 4 2 2 2 Frontend Optimizations 00 eee eee 2 6 2 3 Program Development Flow 0005 2 9 2 4 Working With Projects in EDE 04 2 13 2 5 Stat EDE x soos es ea hak Vip aah ale Beare eee Be 2 15 2 6 Using the Sample Projects 0 00 000 cee eee 2 16 2 7 Create a New Project Space with a Project 2 17 2 8 Set Options for the Tools in the Toolchain 2 21
320. num alpha cntrl digit graph lower print punct space upper or xdigit d See also iswctype0 Returns a non zero value that is valid as the second argument to the iswctype function if property identifies a valid class of wide characters otherwise it returns zero wmemchr include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wmemchr const wchar t s wchar t c size t n Checks the first n wide characters of s on the occurrence of wide character c Returns a pointer to the located wide character or a null pointer if the wide character does not occur in the object wmemcmp include lt wchar h gt int wmemcmp const wchar_t sl const wchar t s2 size tn Compares the first n wide characters of s1 to the first n wide characters of s2 Returns lt 0 ifsl lt s2 0 ifsl s2 gt 0 ifsl gt s2 6 106 Chapter 6 7 wmemcpy include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wmemcpy wchar_t sl const wchar_t s2 size tn Copies n wide characters from s2 to s1 Does not check for memory overlapping Returns sl wmemmove include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wmemmove wchar_t sl const wchar_t s2 size tn Copies n wide characters from s2 to s1 Overlapping objects will be handled correctly Returns sl wmemset include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wmemset wchar t s wchar t c size t n Fills the first n wide characters of s with the value of c Returns s wprintf include lt wchar h gt int wprintf
321. o if more than maxsize wide characters where produced Libraries 6 99 weslen include lt wchar h gt size_t wcslen const wchar t s Returns the length of the wide string in s not counting the null wide character wesncat include lt wchar h gt wehar_t wcesncat wchar_t sl const wchar_t s2 size tn Concatenates at most n wide characters from wide string s2 to wide string s1 A terminating null wide character is always appended to the result Returns sl wesncmp include lt wchar h gt int wcsncmp const wchar t sl const wchar_t s2 size_t n Compares at most n wide characters of wide string s1 to wide string s2 Returns lt 0 ifsl lt s2 0 ifsl s2 gt 0 ifsl gt s2 wesncpy include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wcsncpy wchar_t sl const wchar t s2 size tn Copies at most n characters of wide string s2 onto the wide string s1 Adds trailing null characters if the string is smaller than n wide characters Returns sl 6 100 Chapter 6 7 wespbrk include lt wchar h gt wehar_t wcespbrk const wchar_t sl const wchar_t s2 Returns a pointer to the first occurrence in s1 of any wide character out of wide string s2 If none are found NULL is returned wesrcbr include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wesrchr const wchar_t s wchar t c Returns a pointer to the last occurrence of c in the wide string s If not found NULL is returned wesrtombs include lt wc
322. o is launched CrossView Pro will automatically download the absolute file for debugging d See the Cross View Pro Debugger User s Manual for more information Overview 2 31 2 12 USING DAvE PROJECTS WITH EDE Infineon Technologies DAVE 2 x is fully supported by means of its generated project information file dpt This means that you can easily import projects created with DAvE in the C166 ST10 EDE The memory model the CPU and startup register settings in the Project Project Options dialog will reflect the settings you made in DAVE In addition all files created by DAVE will be added automatically to your own EDE project when you press the Refresh DAVE imported project button this button only appears when your EDE project contains a DAvE generated project information file How to add DAVE projects to EDE Create your DAVE project for example my_project dav and generate code for the TASKING C166 ST10 products Now follow these steps 1 Create a new or open your existing C166 ST10 EDE project for example ede project pjt For more information on how to do this see section 2 7 Create a New Project Space with a Project 2 Add the DAVE generated project information file my_project dpt to the project in the Project Properties dialog click on the Add existing files to project button and select the DAVE project This file appears in the Other Files category of your project 3 Add the C start
323. o the final wide string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer Returns the converted value or zero if no conversion could be performed 6 102 Chapter 6 7 westok include lt wchar h gt wehar_t wcestok wchar_t sl const wchar_t s2 wchar_t ptr Searches the wide string s1 for tokens delimited by wide characters from wide string s2 It terminates the token with a null character Returns a pointer to the first wide character of a token A subsequent call with s1 NULL will return the next token in the string westol include lt wchar h gt long int westol const wchar_t nptr wchar_ t endptr int base Converts the initial portion of the wide string pointed to by nptr to long int Initial white spaces are skipped Then a value is read using the given base When base is zero the base is taken as defined for integer constants I e numbers starting with an 0 are taken octal numbers starting with Ox or 0X are taken hexadecimal Other numbers are taken decimal A pointer to the final wide string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer Returns the converted value or zero if no conversion could be performed Libraries 6 103 westombs include lt stdlib h gt size_t wcstombs char s const wchar_t pwcs size tn Converts a sequence of wide characters from the array pointed to by
324. ocation shall not be used The error indicator errno shall not be used The macro offsetof shall not be used lt locale h gt and the setlocale function shall not be used The setjmp and longjmp functions shall not be used The signal handling facilities of lt signal h gt shall not be used The lt stdio h gt library shall not be used in production code The functions atof atoi atol shall not be used The functions abort exit getenv system shall not be used The time handling functions of library lt time h gt shall not be used Gb See also section 3 19 C Code Checking MISRA C in Chapter Language Implementation DEBUG ENVIRONMENT all TASKING M XIGNAddV Debug Environment B 3 1 CROSSVIEW PRO AND EVALUATION BOARDS When you use an evaluation board with CrossView Pro a monitor will be run from the memory where your application is loaded and running You should use the 1166 RESERVE MEMORY locator control to prevent the locator from locating sections in the memory areas in use by the monitor For example RESERVE MEMORY 0FD00h to OFD4Bh Please see the CrossView user s manual which areas are in use by the monitor that is used for your evaluation board In the start asm file the EVA symbol must be enabled set to 1 When using a ROM monitor with a dual vector table the vector table of your application should be located at the memory location where the monitor expects
325. of all tasks to be allocated in the same page limiting the total near data area of the whole application to 16K However it is still possible to have both shared common and non shared public near data sections of each task in this area If the feature of a 16K near data area for every task is needed the shared data must be explicitly declared _far or huge or _shuge as done in the example above use pragmas global and public All public declarations in a source file following a pragma global are defined by c166 at the application global scope level in the Task Concept This means that externs referencing these public variables have to be resolved at the locate stage of 1166 Example An application consists of two tasks TASK_A and TASK _B A module mod_a c in TASK_A defines a variable which has to be accessed in mod_b c in TASK _B The variable gi is defined in mod_a c as follows pragma global unsigned int gi pragma public The pragma global promotes the scope of the variable gi from the task scope public to the application scope global In mod_b c in TASK _B the variable is declared via extern unsigned int gi 3 52 Chapter 3 When linking TASK_B LNO the linker will produce a warning about an unresolved external _ gi However you can tell the linker to check the unresolved externals with the object file mod_a obj or the task object file TASK_A LNO which should contain the c
326. of libraries Model requirements for the v are delivered to meet specific User Stack arious microcontroller architectures These libraries must be used in conjunction with the additional compiler option P These sets are located in separate directories uext The User Stack Model variant of the extended non protected libraries uextp The User Stack Model variant of the extended protected libraries uext2 The User Stack Model variant of the extended XC16x Super10 architectures non protected libraries uext2p The User Stack Model variant of the extended XC16x Super10 architectures protected libraries 6 4 Chapter 6 Each library set contains the following libraries c166 s lib C library The optional s stands for single precision floating point all floating point arithmetic is in single precision instead of ANSI double precision fp166 t lib Floating point library The optional t stands for trapping floating point using boundary checking and the floating point trap mechanism rt166 s m lib Run time library The optional s stands for single precision floating point The optional m stands for MAC optimized use MAC instructions in some basic operations for optimization The question mark in these library names must be replaced by a letter representing the selected memory model tiny small medium large huge A All C library functions are described in the section C Library Interface
327. off_t offset int whence Low level file positioning function _Iseek is used by all file positioning functions fgetpos fseek fsetpos ftell rewind 6 18 Chapter 6 7 open include lt stdio h gt int _open const char name int flags Low level file open function open is used by the functions fopen and freopen The given file should be properly opened _read include lt stdio h gt size t _read int fd char buffer size t size Low level block input function It reads a block of characters from the given stream This function interfaces to CrossView Pro s I O Simulation feature Returns the number of characters read _stime include lt time h gt void _stime time _t s Sets the current calendar time Returns nothing _sstrcat include lt string h gt char shuge sstrcat char shuge s const char shuge ct Concatenates shuge string ct to shuge string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s Libraries _ssirchr include lt string h gt char shuge sstrchr const char shuge cs int c Returns a shuge pointer to the first occurrence of character c in the string cs If not found NULL is returned _sstremp include lt string h gt int _sstrcemp const char shuge cs const char shuge ct Compares shuge string cs to shuge string ct Returns lt Oifes lt ct 0 ifes ct gt 0 ifcs gt ct _ssircpy include lt string h gt char s
328. ojects to the project space Add files to the project Edit the files Set development tool options ON BOY NS 3 Build the application Overview 2 5 START EDE Start EDE e Double click on the EDE shortcut on your desktop or Launch EDE via the program folder created by the installation program Select Start gt Programs gt TASKING toolchain gt EDE Figure 2 2 EDE icon The EDE screen contains a menu bar a toolbar with command buttons one or more windows default a window to edit source files a project window and an output window and a status bar Project Options Compile Build Rebuild Debug On line Manuals TASKING EDE Toolchain C target examples demo demo pjt File Edit Search Project Build Text Document Customize Tools Window Help amp C target examples demo DEMO C include lt string h gt include lt stdio h gt C Marget examples demo psp demo 1 Project EKSA demo 5 Files define BELL_CHAR typedef enum color_e Document Windows t Used to view and edit files red yellow blue Project Window Contains several tabs for viewing information about projects and other files type f struct rec_s Output Window Contains several tabs to display and manipulate results of EDE operations For example to view the results of builds or compiles A File Find A Search A Browse A Difference A Sh
329. on This is a bypass for the CR105619 functional problem 4 20 Chapter 4 Zno_c166svitrap Default Do not insert a NOP before a TRAP instruction Zcpu_jmpra_cache Fix broken program flow after not taken JMPR JMPA instruction This is a bypass for the CR108400 functional problem Zno_cpu_jmpra_cache Default Do not fix broken program flow after not taken JMPR JMPA instruction Zcpu_reti_int Fix lost interrupt while executing RETI instruction This is a bypass for the CR108342 functional problem Zno_cpu_reti_int Default Do not lost interrupt while executing RETI instruction Zinsert_div_mdl Insert NOP instructions between DIV and the read of MDL This is a bypass for the CR108309 functional problem Zno_insert_div_mdl Default Do not insert NOP instructions between DIV and the read of MDL Zinsert_mdlh_muldiv Insert NOP instruction between write to MDL MDH and DIVx MULx instruction This is a bypass for the CR108904 functional problem Zno_insert_mdlh_muldiv Default Do not insert NOP instruction between write to MDL MDH and DIVx MULx instruction Zmovbjb Insert NOP instruction between an explicit byte register modification and a bit jump that uses the opposite byte of the same word GPR Zno_movbjb Default Do not insert NOP instruction between explicit byte register modification and a bit jump d See Appendix C CPU Functional Problems for more details Compiler Use 4 21 Option From the Project menu
330. on error Sgetpos include lt stdio h gt int fgetpos FILE stream fpos t ptr Stores the current value of the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream in the object pointed to by ptr The type fpos_t is suitable for recording such values Returns zero if successful a non zero value on error Libraries 6 33 fgets include lt stdio h gt char fgets char s int n FILE stream Reads at most the next n 1 characters from the given stream into the array s until a newline is found Returns s or NULL on EOF or error fgetwc include lt wchar h gt wint_t fgetwc FILE stream Reads one wide character from the given stream Returns the read wide character or WEOF on error Sgetws include lt wchar h gt wchar_ t fgetws wchar_t s int n FILE stream Reads at most the next n 1 wide characters from the given stream into the array s until a newline is found Returns s or NULL on end of file or error floor include lt math h gt double floor double x Returns the largest integer not greater than x as a double Jmalloc include lt stdlib h gt void far fmalloc size_t size Far variant of malloc See section 7 3 Heap Size 6 34 Chapter 6 e fmod include lt math h gt double fmod double x double y Returns the floating point remainder of x y with the same sign as x If y is zero the result is implementation defined fopen
331. ong In bitaddressable memory chars will be word aligned When accessing single bits in these variables like _bita int w w 0x4000 if w amp 1 lt lt 10 w amp OXFFEF then the compiler will use bit instructions BSET _w 14 JNB _w 10 3 BCLR _w 4 3 For non static local variables the _bita keyword is not allowed Most local variables will be placed in registers automatically making them bitaddressable anyway See also the pragmas autobita and autobitastruct in section 4 5 Pragmas 3 28 Chapter 3 7 3 2 2 USER STACK MODEL If you use the P or Pd option of c166 the compiler does not emit the regular CALL RET instructions when calling a C function but emits code using a jumping mechanism specifying the return address on the user stack The advantage of this approach is that the system stack is not used at all The price paid for this feature is an execution speed penalty amp In EDE you can select the user stack model as follows From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the Application entry and select Memory Model Enable the Use user stack for return addresses check box When using plain user stack model special libraries are needed to support this feature These user stack model libraries are an integral part of this product If Pd was specified at the command line all calls to the library use the regular CALL RFT calling convention This behavior can also be forced for u
332. ons lt limits h gt Limits and sizes of integral types No C functions lt locale h gt localeconv setlocale Delivered as skeletons lt math h gt acos asin atan atan2 ceil cos cosh exp fabs floor fmod frexp hypot hypotf hypotl Idexp log log10 modf pow sin sinh sqrt tan tanh lt reg h gt Special function register declarations for all supported derivatives lt setjmp h gt longjmp setjmp 6 8 lt stdarg h gt lt signal h gt lt stddef h gt lt stdio h gt lt stdlib h gt lt string h gt lt time h gt lt unistd h gt Chapter 6 va_arg va_end va_start raise signal Functions are delivered as skeletons offsetof Definition of special types clearerr close fclose feof ferror fflush fgetc fgetpos fgets fopen fprintf fputc fputs fread freopen fscanf fseek fsetpos ftell fwrite getc getchar gets lseek open perror printf putc putchar puts read remove rename rewind scanf setbuf setvbuf sprintf sscanf tmpfile tmpnam ungetc vfprintf vprintf vsprintf unlink write abort abs atexit atof atoi atol bsearch calloc div exit fcalloc ffree fmalloc frealloc free getenv hcalloc hfree hmalloc hrealloc labs Idiv malloc mblen mbstowcs mbtowc ncalloc nfree nmalloc nrealloc qsort rand realloc scalloc sfree smalloc srand srealloc strtod strtol strtoul wcstombs wctomb memchr memcmp memcpffb memcpffw memc
333. ons in this manual Appendix D The offset of structure components relative to the structure can be determined from the symbolic debug information also needed for high level language debugging generated by the C compiler when you use the command line option g The syntax for structure symbolic debug information is described in section 3 18 Structure Type of the document C166 ST10 Symbolic Debug Specification The conventions for register and data page usage as well as the calling conventions for functions are fully documented in chapter 3 Language Implementation Section 3 6 Function Parameters of chapter 3 describes when parameters are passed via registers and when they are passed via the user stack 2 FUNCTION CALL AND RETURN The next sections describe how function calls and function returns are implemented in the libraries and in the C compiler to support a special stack frame 2 1 DIRECT INTRA SEGMENT FUNCTION CALL AND RETURN A direct intra segment function call near function call is normally performed with a CALLA instruction and returned with a RETN instruction But the direct intra segment function call must be performed without using the system stack Therefore the user stack is used to pass the return label to the near function Then the near function is invoked using an absolute intra segment jump At exit the near function return is implemented using an indirect jump on the contents of the user s
334. or is undefined Returns nothing bmalloc include lt stdlib h gt void _huge hmalloc unsigned long size Huge variant of malloc See section 7 3 Heap Size brealloc include lt stdlib h gt void _huge hrealloc void _huge p unsigned long size Huge variant of reallocQ See section 7 3 Heap Size hbypot include lt math h gt double hypot double x double y Returns the hypotenuse for the given values as a double hypotf include lt math h gt float hypotf float x float y Returns the hypotenuse for the given values as a float 6 44 Chapter 6 7 bypotl include lt math h gt long double hypotl long double x long double y Returns the hypotenuse for the given values as a long double isalnum include lt ctype h gt int isalnum int c Returns a non zero value when c is an alphabetic character or a number A Z a z 0 9 isalpha include lt ctype h gt int isalpha int c Returns a non zero value when c is an alphabetic character A Z a z isascti include lt ctype h gt int isascii int c Returns a non zero value when c is in the range of 0 and 127 This is a non ANSI function iscntrl include lt ctype h gt int iscntrl int c Returns a non zero value when c is a control character Libraries 6 45 isdigit include lt ctype h gt int isdigit int c Returns a non zero value when c is a numeric character 0
335. orage type or place the variable outside a function E 202 name is declared with void parameter list You cannot call a function with an argument when the function does not accept any void parameter list The following is an example of this error 5 32 Chapter 5 int void void parameter list main int i i i error i OK E 203 too many few actual parameters With prototyping the number of arguments of a function must agree with the protoype of the function The following is an example of this error int f int one parameter main int i i i i error one too many i f i OK W 204 U suffix not allowed on floating constant ignored A floating point constant cannot have a U or u suffix W 205 F suffix not allowed on integer constant ignored An integer constant cannot have a F or f suffix E 206 name named bit field cannot have 0 width A bit field must be an integral contstant expression with a value greater than zero E 207 list of rule numbers expected after misrac option A list of rule numbers is required after the misrac option W 208 unsupported MISRA C rule number number Specified MISRA C rule number is not supported E 209 MISRA C rule number violation rule A specified MISRA C rule is violated Compiler Diagnostics 5 33 E 212 name missing static function definition A fun
336. ore than once caused by a CALL RET JMPI JMPS or TRAP The bug occurs because the instruction sequentially following the not taken jump is fetched from memory but the identifier corresponding to this instruction is taken from the jump cache since this instruction was previously loaded in the jump cache As a consequence both instruction an identifier do not match exactly CR108904 DIV MUL interrupted by PEC when the previous instruction writes in MDL MDH Infineon reference CR108904 Use compiler option BZinsert_mdlh_muldiv Use libraries A workaround is not default enabled in the libraries Rebuild the libraries manually for C files use compiler option BZinsert_mdlh_muldiv for src files use assembler control CHECKC166SV1MULDIVMDLH for asm files use m166 control DEF FIX _EXTIMDLMULDIV CPU Functional Problems C 17 If the source pointer of PEC DPEC EPEC points to the SFR ESFR area PD bus the read operation to this SFR ESFR location is not performed when the PEC DPEC EPEC interrupts a DIV MUL instruction in its first execution cycle AND the DIV MUL instruction follows an instruction writing into MDL MDH In this case apart from the fact that the read operation is not performed the value that is written into the destination pointer is always FFFFh default value of the PD bus The instruction sequences affected are MOV mdh Rw or any instruction that writes in MDH MDL 1 using any addressing mo
337. orresponding global definition using the CHECKGLOBALS object_file linker control If the corresponding global definition is found by the linker no warning is emitted because the external is resolved at locate time when both TASK_A and TASK _B are located The linker and locator invocation may look like 1166 LINK mod_a obj TO TASK_A LNO 1166 LINK mod_b obj TO TASK_B LNO CHECKGLOBALS TASK_A LNO 1166 LOCATE TASK_A LNO TASK_B LNO TO tasks Out define more than one interrupt function in one task This is the easiest way to share code and data between interrupt functions It is in fact a step towards the Flat Interrupt concept When a task has more than one entry point several interrupt functions reentrancy of the functions and data must be checked use the Flat Interrupt Concept When the the Flat Interrupt Concept is used the assembler objects are directly input for the locator and the linker stage is skipped The public Task scope level of the Task Concept is promoted to the global application scope level by using the PUBTOGLB abbreviation PTOG locator control The PTOG control can also be applied to a set of objects files which makes it possible to mix the Flat Interrupt Concept with the Task Concept When the PTOG is specified for an object file all public task scope variables and functions are promoted to the application scope global as if they were defined after a pragma global See the section 1166 Controls in th
338. ot spend any effort to align the data This means that the object will not be aligned using an EVEN directive When the _noalign attribute is applied to a struct union member the member will not be aligned When an object at a possibly unaligned address needs to be accessed the compiler generates two byte instructions The following example illustrates this _noalign int i possibly unaligned object void func void itt return This generates the following code _func PROC FAR MOVB RL1 i fetch object using MOVB RH1 _it 1 77 byte instructions ADD R1 01h MOVB _i RL1 7 store object using MOVB _i 1 RH1 77 byte instructions RETS _ func ENDP Since the code that is generated is less efficient two byte instructions use this attribute only when really needed For example for data exchange with 8 bit processors Do not use the _noalign attribute on e automatic register variables e parameters e function return values The compiler issues a warning when you use the _noalign attribute on an unsupported object 3 46 Chapter 3 It is also possible to have a pointer referring to an unaligned object In this case the type the pointer refers to must also be qualified as possibly unaligned For example _noalign int ae possibly unaligned int _noalign int pi pointer referring to possibly unaligned int _noalign int _noalign npi same as above but pointer itself is also unaligned
339. ot checked for far data 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcphfb include lt string h gt void memcphfb void far dest void huge src size t n Copies n bytes from huge data pointed by src to far data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for far data 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing Libraries 6 59 memcphfw include lt string h gt void memcphfw void far dest void huge src size t n Copies n words from huge data pointed by src to far data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for far data 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcphhb include lt string h gt void memcphhb void huge dest void huge src size t n Copies n bytes from huge data pointed by src to huge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 65535 Returns nothing memcphhw include lt string h gt void memcphhw void huge dest void huge src size t n Copies n words from huge data pointed by src to huge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 65535 Returns nothing 6 60 Chapter 6 7 memcphnb include lt string h gt void memcphnb void near dest void huge src size t n Copies n bytes from huge data pointed by sre to near data pointed b
340. ot restored when returning from the non banked function f2 3 140 7 Chapter 3 3 19 C CODE CHECKING MISRA C The C programming language is a standard for high level language programming in embedded systems yet it is considered somewhat unsuitable for programming safety related applications Through enhanced code checking and strict enforcement of best practice programming rules TASKING MISRA C code checking helps you to produce more robust code MISRA C specifies a subset of the C programming language which is intended to be suitable for embedded automotive systems It consists of a set of 127 rules defined in the document Guidelines for the Use of the C Language in Vehicle Based Software published by Motor Industry Research Association MISRA Every MISRA C rule is classified as being either required or advisory Required rules are mandatory requirements placed on the programmer Advisory rules are requirements placed on the programmer that should normally be followed However they do not have the mandatory status of required rules Implementation issues The MISRA C implementation in the compiler supports most of the 127 rules Some MISRA C rules address documentation run time behavior or other issues that cannot be checked by static source code inspection Therefore some rules are not implemented These unsupported rules are visible in the C Compiler MISRA C MISRA C Rules entry of the Proje
341. ototype 92 no prototype for indirect function call Each function should have a valid function prototype 94 hiding earlier one Additional message which is preceded by error E 63 The second declaration will be used 95 protection error message Something went wrong with the protection key initialization The message could be Key is not present or printer is not correct Can t read key Can t initialize key or Can t set key model 96 syntax error in define define id requires a right parenthesis 97 incompatible with old style prototype If one function has a parameter type list and another function with the same name is an old style declaration the parameter list may not have ellipsis The following is an example of this error int f int int error old style 98 function type cannot be inherited from a typedef A typedef cannot be used for a function definition The following is an example of this error typedef int INTFN INTFN f return 0 error 99 conditional directives nested too deep if ifdef or ifndef directives may not be nested deeper than 50 levels 100 case or default label not inside switch The case or default label may only appear inside a switch Compiler Diagnostics 5 17 E 101 vacuous declaration Something is missing in the declaration The declaration could be empty or an incomplete statement was found You m
342. ou can specify the DMEASURE_TIME option if you want to build the sieve benchmark program for time measurement Note that this is done in the makefile which can be processed by mk166 Now you have created all the files necessary for debugging with CrossView Pro with one call to the control program If you want to see how the control program calls the compiler assembler link stage locate stage and formatter you can use the v option or v0 option The v0 option only displays the invocations without executing them The v option also executes them ccl66 g ieee o sieve abs sieve c v0 The control program shows the following command invocations without executing them UNIX output c166 sieve c o tmp cc5882c src e g al66 tmp cc5882c src TO sieve obj NOPR 1166 LNK TO tmp cc5882d lno sieve obj ext cl66s lib ext fpl66s lib ext rt166s lib 1166 LOC TO tmp cc5882e out tmp cc5882d lno NOPR ieeel66 tmp cc5882e out sieve abs 2 26 Chapter 2 The e option specifies to remove the output file if compiler errors occur The NOPR control suppresses the assembler list file generation The TO control has the same function as the o option of the compiler and specifies the output filename As you can see the tools use temporary files for intermediate results If you want to keep the intermediate files you can use the tmp option The following command makes this clear ccl66 g ieee o sieve abs sieve c v0 tmp This
343. owing access to SYSTEM extended SFR registers and bitaddressable memory DPPO DPP2 provide a linear data area of 48K anywhere in memory You must specify the base page number of this area at locate time via the ADDRESSES LINEAR G ddress locator control ITT SND DPP3 contains page number 3 allowing access to SYSTEM extended SFR registers and bitaddressable memory DPPO DPP1 and DPP2 contain the page number of a data area of 16K anywhere in memory These page numbers are specified at locate time via the SND locator control When you use this configuration the size of a single normal data object is limited to 16K Language Implementation 3 9 In variant I and II the paging principle is not really used so the size of a single normal data object e g array can be greater than 16K one page If you use the small memory model default of c166 the compiler uses the section type LDAT for normal user data This means that a non paged section unless SND is used of course must be allocated by the locator in either I first segment of 64K default II linear area of 48K specified with ADDRESSES LINEAR or in page 3 Ill one of the three possible areas of 16K specified with SND or in page 3 If you need more than 64K of data or if you need a huge data object you can use the _far _huge keywords in the declaration of these variables Small model memory map examples ExampleI Default Example IE Using loc
344. pe modifier Type qualifiers may not be repeated in a specifier list or qualifier list The following is an example of this warning long long i error 73 object cannot be bound to multiple memories Use only one memory attribute per object For example specifying both rom and ram to the same object is not allowed 74 declaration contains more than one class specifier A declaration may contain at most one storage class specifier So register auto i is not allowed 75 continue outside a loop continue may only appear in a loop body do for or while So switch i default continue is not allowed 76 duplicate macro parameter name The given identifier was used more than one in the formatl parameter list of a macro definition Each macro parameter must be uniquely declared 77 parameter list should be empty An identifier list not part of a function definition must be empty For example int f i j k is not allowed on declaration level 78 void should be the only parameter Within a function protoype of a function that does not except any arguments void may be the only parameter So int f void int is not allowed Compiler Diagnostics 5 15 E 79 constant expression expected A constant expression may not contain a comma Also the bit field width an expression that defines an enum array bound constants and switch case expressions must all be integral contstant expressions 80 oper
345. pfhb memcpfhw memcpfnb memcpfnw memcpfsb memcpfsw memcphfb memcphfw memcphhb memcphhw memcphnb memcphnw memcphsb memcphsw memcpnfb memcpnfw memcpnhb memcpnhw memcpnnb memecpnnw memcpnsb memcpnsw memcpsfb memcpsfw memcpshb memcpshw memcpsnb memcpsnw memcpssb memcpssw memcpy mMemmove memset strcat _fstrcat _hstrcat _sstreat strchr _fstrchr hstrchr _sstrchr strcmp _fstremp _hstrcmp _sstremp strcol strcpy _fstrcpy _hstrepy _sstrcpy strcspn _fstrcspn _hstrcspn _sstrcspn strerror strlen fstrlen hstrlen _sstrlen strncat _fstrncat _hstrncat _sstrncat strncmp _fstrncmp _hstrncmp _sstrncmp strncpy _fstrncpy _hstrncpy _sstrncpy strpbrk _fstrpbrk _hstrpbrk _sstrpbrk strrchr _fstrrchr _hstrrchr _sstrrchr strspn _fstrspn _hstrspn _sstrspn strstr _ fstrstr _hstrstr _sstrstr strtok _fstrtok _hstrtok _sstrtok strxfrm asctime clock ctime difftime gmtime localtime mktime _stime strftime time _tzset Non ANSI C header file with prototypes for standard POSIX I O functions access chdir close getcwd Iseek read stat Istat fstat unlink write Libraries lt vt100 h gt VT100 Terminal Emulation escape sequences for use with the CrossView Pro FSS feature lt wchar h gt fwprintf wprintf swprintf vfwprintf vwprintf vswprintf fwscanf wscanf swscanf fgetwc fgetws fputwc fputws fwide getwc getwchar putwc putwchar ungetwc wcstod westol
346. ple pragma class mem name would become zclass mem name c166 supports the following pragmas alias Default Same as OA option Perform strict alias checking See also section 4 6 Alias Compiler Use 4 89 noalias Same as Oa option Relax alias checking align32 When pragma align32 is used e long data types are aligned on 32 bit boundaries not for stack objects e struct union data types are aligned on 32 bit boundaries not for stack objects e the size of a struct union will always be a multiple of 4 bytes e the packed keyword overrules the pragma e struct union members of type long or bit field are 32 bit aligned Packing of bit field members will still be done according to the base type int Meaning that a bit field will be aligned to the next 32 bit boundary if the bit field crosses a 16 bit boundary or if the bit field is located at a 16 bit boundary struct s offset int bfl 15 0 bits int bf2 2 32 bits int bf3 2 34 bits int 12 int bf4 5 64 bits A bit field of size 0 will align any struct member to the next 32 bit boundary noalign32 Default 16 bit alignment suspend_align32 resume_align32 Whith these pragmas you can temporarily suspend resume the pragma align32 4 90 Chapter 4 asm args Insert the following non preprocessor lines as assembly language source code into the output file The inserted lines are not checked for their
347. processor phase 2 5 scanner phase 2 5 compiler structure 2 9 conditional bit jump 2 6 conditional jump reversal 2 7 4 58 configuration EDE directories 1 5 UNIX 1 6 const qualifier 3 68 constant folding 2 6 constant propagation 4 47 constant romdata 4 48 constant value propagation 2 8 context pointer register 7 7 control flow optimization 2 7 4 58 control macros 3 60 control program 4 3 options overview 4 4 conversions ANSI C 3 54 copy propagation 4 47 cos 6 29 cosh 6 29 cpu functional problems 4 16 creating a makefile 2 20 cross assembler 2 9 CSE 2 8 4 46 cse resume 4 91 cse suspend 4 91 ctime 6 29 ctype h 6 7 _tolower 6 22 _loupper 6 22 Index isalnum 6 44 isalpha 6 44 isascli 6 44 iscntrl 6 44 isdigit 0 45 isgraph 6 45 islower 6 45 isprint 6 46 ispunct 6 46 isspace 6 46 isupper 6 47 isxdigit 6 49 toascii 6 91 tolower 6 92 toupper 0 92 custack 4 91 d166 2 11 data allocation 3 19 data flow analysis peephole DFAP 4 64 data sections default 3 20 initialized 3 32 non initialized 3 31 normal 3 31 ramdata 3 32 romdata 3 31 specials 3 34 data types 3 53 3 61 _bit 3 53 _bitword 3 53 esfr 3 53 _esfrbit 3 53 fn 3 53 _sfrbit 3 53 _xsfr 3 53 double 3 53 far pointer 3 53 Index Index 9 float 3 53 huge pointer 3 53 long double 3 53 near pointer 3 53 shuge pointer 3 53 signed char 3 53 signed int 3 53 signed long 3 53
348. program calls all tools in the toolchain The v option shows all the individual steps The resulting file is getstart abs 2 10 1 USING THE CONTROL PROGRAM In order to debug your programs you will have to compile assemble link and locate them for debugging using the TASKING C166 ST10 tools You can do this with one call to the control program To use the control program on the sieve demo program in the subdirectory sieve in the examples subdirectory of the C166 ST10 product tree follow the steps below This procedure is outlined as a guide for you to build your own executables for debugging Overview 2 25 1 Make the subdirectory sieve of the examples directory the current working directory 2 Be sure that the directory of the binaries is present in the PATH environment variable 3 Compile assemble link and locate the modules using one call to the control program cc166 ccl66 g ieee o sieve abs sieve c The g option instructs the compiler to generate symbolic debugging information If you want to debug your program with the CrossView Pro high level language debugger this option must be on The ieee option specifies that the output file must be formatted in the IEEE Std 695 format The o sieve abs option specifies the output filename to be sieve abs The result of the command are the files sieve abs which can be loaded and executed by CrossView Pro and sieve map containing the locate map of the application Y
349. ptimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Extra flow optimization pass on intermediate representation E Op OP Default Op Description With Op you enable control flow optimizations on the intermediate code representation such as jump chaining and conditional jump reversal With OP you disable control flow optimizations Example Compile with OP 00 Compile with Op 00 compiler finds first time i is always lt 10 the unconditional jump is removed int i void main void for i 0 i lt 10 i do_something Compiler Use 4 59 Oq OQ Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Convert pointer to from long as far pointer E 0q 0Q Default OQ Description With Oq you treat casting a pointer to long equal to casting a pointer to a far pointer With OQ you treat casting a pointer to long equal to casting a pointer to a huge pointer 4 60 Chapter 4 Or OR Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select Custom optimization in the Optimization box Enable or disable Automatic C register variable allocation Eg Or OR Default Or Description With Or you retrieve better
350. quotation mark 20 empty character constant A character contant must contain exactly one character Empty character contants are not allowed 21 character constant overflow A character contant must contain exactly one character Note that an escape sequence for example t for tab is converted to a single character 22 define without valid identifier You have to supply an identifier after a define 23 else without if else can only be used within a corresponding if ifdef or ifndef construct Make sure that there is a if ifdef or ifndef statement in effect before this statement 24 endif without matching if endif appeared without a matching if ifdef or ifndef preprocessor directive Make sure that there is a matching endif for each if ifdef and ifndef statement 25 missing or zero line number line requires a non zero line number specification 26 undefined control A control line line with a identifier must contain one of the known preprocessor directives Compiler Diagnostics 5 9 W 27 unexpected text after control ifdef and ifndef require only one identifier Also else and endif only have a newline undef requires exactly one identifier W 28 empty program The source file must contain at least one external definition A source file with nothing but comments is considered an empty program E
351. r 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog appears 2 Expand the Application entry and select Processor C166 ST10 Project Options GETSTART PJT E Macro Preprocessor Linker Locator amp CrossView Pro 3 Optionally select a Manufacturer to narrow the list of processors 4 In the Processor list select your target processor for example C167 5 Click OK to accept the new project settings 2 22 Set tool options 1 From the Project menu select Project Options Chapter 2 The Project Options dialog appears Here you can specify options that are valid for the entire project To overrule the project options for the currently active file instead from the Project menu select Current File Options 2 Expand the C Compiler entry The C Compiler entry contains several pages where you can specify C compiler settings C166 ST10 Project Options GETSTART PJT m Optimization Optimization Default optimization z Basom setting chicptmrestions E Application E C Compiler E C Compiler Preprocessing Allocation of Variables Floating Point Language Debug Libraries Diagnostics Output E MISRA C Miscellaneous E Assembler E Macro Preprocessor E Linker Locator CrossView Pro Optimizations that increase compile time 1 Instruction rearderina T Dataflow analysis
352. r function using inline assembly it is your responsibility to preserve the parameter registers if any of this leaf function 7 14 Chapter 7 7 Global constants in different modules Proper interfacing often requires global constants in different modules which can be a problem when assembly and C modules are mixed You can work around this problem by using the C preprocessor on assembly files before assembling For example header h comment define CONSTANT 0x1 modulel c include header h int c CONSTANT module2 asm include header h MOV RO CONSTANT The assembler understands the C notation for hexadecimal numbers so no special conversions are needed for that The modules are built using c166 modulel c o modulel src al66 modulel src TO modulel obj and c166 E o module2 srce module2 asm al66 module2 src TO module2 obj When you use the control program the default preprocessor for assembly files is m166 You can change this default by using the cprep option which forces the control program to use the C preprocessor instead The above files can thus be easily built with the following single command ccl166 modulel c module2 asm cprep c Please note that the C preprocessor will not replace anything between pragma asmand pragma endasm in your C source XIGNAddV MISRA C gt ail TASKING XIGNAddV MISRA C Supported and unsupported MISRA
353. r is initialized using the predefined symbol USRSTACK_TOP When everything described above has been executed your C application is called using the public label _main which has been generated by c166 for the C function main When the C application returns which is not likely to happen in an embedded environment you can specify if the program uses the function exit abort or atexit At the assembly label __ EXIT the system stack pointer the user stack pointer and the floating point stack if floats are used are restored and the program performs an endless loop setting the CPU in power down mode IDLE instruction 7 8 Chapter 7 7 7 2 STACK SIZE c166 maintains two types of stack the system stack and the user stack The system stack is used for return addresses CALL RET instructions and can be accessed via PUSH POP instructions using the SP register Because the system stack is very small internal memory for the C166 ST10 c166 tries to avoid it as much as possible Code generator temporaries are pushed on the user stack Via the Ou option it is even possible to let a task switch interrupt use the user stack instead of the system stack As described above you must specify the size of the system stack size in the system startup code SYSCON register which is the system stack size for all tasks the whole application For XC16x Super10 architectures the system stack size is determined by specifyin
354. r more directory paths to the Include Files Path field E Idirectory Arguments The name of the directory to search for include file s Description Change the algorithm for searching include files whose names do not have an absolute pathname to look in directory Thus include files whose names are enclosed in are searched for first in the directory of the file containing the include line then in directories named in I options in left to right order If the include file is still not found the compiler searches in a directory specified with the environment variable C166INC C166INC may contain more than one directory Finally the directory include relative to the directory where the compiler binary is located is searched This is the standard include directory supplied with the compiler package For include files whose names are in lt gt the directory of the file containing the include line is not searched However the directories named in I options and the one in C166INC and the relative path are still searched Example c166 I proj include test c db Section 4 4 Include Files Compiler Use 4 35 Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the Application entry and select Memory Model In the Memory model box select a memory model E Mmodel Arguments The memory model to be used where model is one of t tiny cpu in non segmented mode s small m medium 1 larg
355. r stack R10 R5R4 1 None destroys to huge shuge R10 __store8n copy double from user stack R10 R4 None destroys to near R10 Table 3 20 Double support subroutines IR5R4 means that the most significant word is stored in R5 3 95 3 96 Chapter 3 z 3 16 5 4 REGISTER USAGE DOUBLE PRECISION The only registers destroyed by the normal double precision subroutines are R1 R5 The input operands R10 and R11 are destroyed R10 and R11 keep their value though except for routines converting to double Usually _ load8x and __store8x are also called __load8x changes RO R5 and R10 __store8x changes R1 R5 and R10 The subroutines __1dxf8r change RO R5 and R10 3 16 6 FLOAT DOUBLE USAGE FOR ASSEMBLY PROGRAMMERS Example of float usage for assembly programmers Create functionality of C expression 1tl float 4 PI MOV R4 4 CALLA cc_UC _ cif24r MOV R10 PI MOV R11 PI 2 R4 contains int 4 convert int 4 to float 4 0 R4R5 R4R5 4 0 R10R11 PI CALLA cc_UC _mlf4r multiplication result stored in R4R5 MOV R10 _fl1tl MOV R11 _f1t1 2 R4R5 4 0 PI R10R11 copy of _fl1tl CALLA cc_UC __adf4r addition result stored in R4R5 MOV flt1 R4 MOV _flt1 2 R5 save result Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Se ne e PI DW 04049h OOFDBh 3 141592654 IEEE754 format Registers not destroyed in this code fragment R0 R6 R9 R12 R15 Language Implementation 3 97 E
356. r stack pointer D 5 using 3 77 Index vV va_arg 6 94 va_end 6 94 va_start 6 94 variables initialized 3 68 non initialized 3 69 version information 4 80 vfprintf 6 94 vfwprintf 6 95 volatile 3 61 volatile_union 4 97 vprintf 6 95 vsprintf 6 95 vswprintf 6 96 vwprintf 6 96 Ww warnings 5 6 warnings suppress 4 81 wchar h 6 9 btowc 6 27 fgetwc 0 33 fgetws 0 33 fputwc 0 35 fputws 6 36 fwide 6 39 fwprintf 6 39 fwscanf 6 40 gelwc 6 42 getwchar 6 42 mbrlen 6 52 mbrtowc 6 53 mbsinit 6 53 mbsrtowcs 6 54 Index Index 23 putwce 6 73 putwehar 6 73 swprintf 0 89 swscanf 6 90 ungetwc 6 93 vfwprintf 6 95 vswprintf 6 96 vwprintf 6 96 wertomb 6 96 wescat 6 97 weschr 6 97 wescmp 6 97 wescoll 6 97 wescpy 6 98 wescspn 6 98 wesftime 6 98 weslen 6 99 wesncat 6 99 wesnomp 6 99 wesncpy 6 99 wespbrk 6 100 wesrchr 6 100 wesrtombs 6 100 wesspn 6 101 wesstr 6 101 westod 6 101 westok 6 102 westol 6 102 westoul 6 103 wesxfrm 0 103 wetob 6 104 wmemchr 6 105 wmemcmp 6 105 wmemcpy 6 106 wmemmove 6 106 wmemset 6 106 wprintf 6 106 wscanf 6 107 wcrtomb 6 96 wcscat 6 97 weschr 6 97 wescmp 6 97 wescoll 6 97 wescpy 6 98 wescspn 6 98 wesftime 6 98 wcslen 6 99 wesncat 6 99 wesncmp 6 99 wesncpy 6 99 wespbrk 6 100 wesrchr 6 100 wcsrtombs 6 100 wesspn 6 101 wesstr 6 101 westod 6 101 westok 6 102 westol 6 102 wcstombs
357. racter representation of that character calloc include lt stdlib h gt void calloc size_t nobj size t size The allocated space is filled with zeros The maximum space that can be allocated can be changed by customizing the heap size see section 7 3 Heap Size By default no heap is allocated Returns a pointer to space in external memory for nobj items of size bytes length NULL if there is not enough space left 6 28 Chapter 6 ceil include lt math h gt double ceil double x Returns the smallest integer not less than x as a double chdir include lt unistd h gt int chdir const char path Use the file system simulation feature of CrossView Pro to change the current directory on the host to the directory indicated by path Returns zero if successful 1 on error clearerr include lt stdio h gt void clearerr FILE stream Clears the end of file and error indicators for stream Returns nothing clock include lt time h gt clock _ t clock void To perform real time clock support you must customize this function See the file time c in the examples time directory demonstrating an implementation of this low level time function Returns the processor time used To determine the time used in seconds the value returned must be divided by the value of the macro CLOCKS _PER_SEC as defined in time h If the processor time used is not available or its value cannot be represented th
358. rap handler restores the environment saved in _ FP_ENV The data section containing the floating point jump buffer _ FP_ENV is cleared at startup The initialization codes for it are stored in the C166_BSS sections There are two entry points available in the floating point trap handler one for double precision floating point functions causing a trap and one for single precision floating point functions causing a trap This default trap handler is precision independent but if you want to write a trap handler for each precision you need these two entry points You can use your own floating point trap handler by linking the object module overruling the floating point trap handler of the floating point library Or you can replace the floating point trap object module in the floating point library with the object module of your own floating point trap handler 3 106 Chapter 3 7 3 16 9 IEEE 754 COMPLIANT ERROR HANDLING When using the floating point libraries without trapping the routines continue calculation with erroneous input values This behavior is not conforming to the IEEE 754 standard but does deliver the highest speed because the input value checking is omitted If your application requires IEEE 754 compliant handling of erroneous input values the trapping version of the floating point libraries should be used But if you do not want to handle the error conditions with a trap routine but just continue calculation confo
359. rce address load destination address store return value release space for double return value pointer to return value release parameter stackspace destination address store release return value For clarity this example was compiled using OJ disabling the peephole Normally the ADDs and SUBs on RO are combined Intrinsic functions with a variable argument list are not allowed If this occurs the compiler generates an error E 771 variable argumentlist not allowed with intrinsic function Ss N There are three points that should be considered when you create an intrinsic function 1 Special care must be taken when pointers are passed to a user defined intrinsic When default pointers are used the size will differ when an application is compiled in an other memory model It is therefore advisable to specify the memory the pointer refers to and thus the pointer will always have the same size 2 Itis not possible to define pointers to intrinsic functions 3 Internal intrinsic functions cannot be redefined Language Implementation 3 133 Include a macro preprocessor file In order to include a macro preprocessor include file you can use the following pragma pragma m166include include file This pragma generates a INCLUDE control in the output file For example pragma ml66include myinclude inc will generate SINCLUDE myinclude inc On error the following message will be generated
360. re converted for output d gt See also printfO Returns the number of wide characters transmitted or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred 6 40 Chapter 6 7 fwrite include lt stdio h gt size_t fwrite const void ptr size_t size size_t nobj FILE stream Writes nobj members of size bytes to the given stream from the array pointed to by ptr Returns the number of successfully written objects Swscanf include lt wchar h gt int fwscanf FILE stream const wchar_t format Reads input from the given stream under control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment using subsequent arguments as pointers to the objects to receive the converted input db See also scanfQ Returns the number of input items assigned or EOF on error getc include lt stdio h gt int getc FILE stream Reads one character out of the given stream db See also _read0 Returns the character read or EOF on error Libraries 6 41 getchar include lt stdio h gt int getchar void Reads one character from standard input Gb See also read Returns the character read or EOF on error getcwd include lt unistd h gt char getcwd char buf size t size Use the file system simulation feature of CrossView Pro to retrieve the current directory on the hos
361. refore the address of an automatic is not a constant The following is an example of this error int a automatic static int b amp a error W 177 static variable name not used A static variable is declared which is never used To eliminate this warning remove the unused variable W 178 static function name not used A static function is declared which is never called To eliminate this warning remove the unused function E 179 inline function name is not defined Possibly only the prototype of the inline function was present but the actual inline function was not The following is an example of this error 5 28 Chapter 5 _inline int a void prototype main int b b a error hi E 180 illegal target memory memory for pointer The pointer may not point to memory For example a pointer to bitaddressable memory is not allowed E 181 invalid cast to function This error is generated when attempting to cast an object to a function type as shown in the example below int i void main void it int int i return W 182 argument number different types With prototypes the types of arguments must be compatible W 183 variable name possibly uninitialized Possibly an initialization statement is not reached while a function should return something The following is an example of this warning int a int f void int i if a i 0 statement not reac
362. resent on each TASKING product CD for detailed information 1 14 Chapter 1 n 1 4 5 HOW TO DETERMINE THE HOST ID The host ID depends on the platform of the machine Please use one of the methods listed below to determine the host ID Platform Tool to retrieve host ID Example host ID Windows licadmin License Administrator 0060084dfbe9 or use Imhostid Solaris hostid 170a3472 Table 1 2 Determine the host ID On Windows the License Administrator licadmin helps you in the process of obtaining your license key AN If you do not have the program licadmin you can download it from our Web site at http www tasking com support flexlm licadmin zip It is also on every product CD that includes FLEXIm in directory licensing 1 4 6 HOW TO DETERMINE THE HOST NAME To retrieve the host name of a machine use one of the following methods Platform Method Windows licadmin or Go to the Control Panel open System In the Computer Name tab look for Full computer name Solaris hostname Table 1 3 Determine the host name OVERVIEW all TASKING M daLdVH Overview 2 3 2 1 INTRODUCTION TO C C166 ST10 CROSS COMPILER This manual provides a functional description of the TASKING C C166 ST10 Cross Compiler This manual uses c166 the name of the binary as the shorthand notation for TASKING C C166 ST10 Cross Compiler T
363. rintfQ etc This SMALL version does not contain the required functionality to handle precision specifiers and floating point I O which can specified in the format argument of these functions The following extra libraries are included to support easy switching between the three I O formatter versions MEDIUM I O formatter library no floating point I O supported precision specifiers supported fmtio m lib LARGE I O formatter library floating point I O supported precision specifiers supported fmtio 1 s lib The question mark in these library names must be replaced by a character representing the selected memory model tiny small medium large huge ae These I O formatter libraries are included in all library sets You can use the control program options libfmtiom and libfmtiol to select the MEDIUM and LARGE I O formatter libraries If no cc166 libfmtio option is specified on the commandline then the SMALL printfQ scanfQ formatter variant is linked from the C library In EDE you can select an I O formatter library as follows From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Libraries Select a Printf and scanf I O formatters option 6 6 e Chapter 6 6 3 SINGLE PRECISION FLOATING POINT Q In ANSI C all mathematical functions lt math h gt are based on double arguments and double return type So even if you are using only float variables in your code the
364. rm to IEEE 754 you can provide an empty trap function You can add the following trap handling code to your application to achieve this include lt setjmp h gt pragma noclear jmp buf FP ENV void _fptrap8 void double precision void _fptrap4 void single precision Language Implementation 3 107 3 17 INTRINSIC FUNCTIONS When you want to use specific C166 ST10 instructions that have no equivalence in C you normally must write inline assembly to perform these tasks However c166 offers a way of handling this in C The c166 has a number of built in functions that are implemented as intrinsic functions The advantage of this approach is that the same C source can be compiled by a standard ANSI C compiler for simulator purposes See section 3 21 Portable C Code for details Because the ANSI specification states that public C names starting with an underscore are implementation defined all intrinsic functions names have a leading underscore Several of the intrinsic functions have restricted operand types There are two possible restricted types The first is called ICE which denotes that the operand must be a Integral Constant Expression rather than any type of integral expression this is because the BMOV instruction et al do not support otherwise The second is called BITADDR which means that the operand must be a bit addressable integer i e bitword bitaddressable sfr or bitaddressable esfr
365. rmat Is equivalent to fwscanf except that the input is obtained from a wide string argument s Returns the number of input items assigned or EOF on error tan include lt math h gt double tan double x Returns the tangent of x tanh include lt math h gt double tanh double x Returns the hyperbolic tangent of x time include lt time h gt time t time time_t tp The return value is also assigned to tp if tp is not NULL Returns the current calendar time in seconds or 1 if the time is not available Libraries 6 91 tmpfile include lt stdio h gt FILE tmpfile void Creates a temporary file of the mode wb that will be automatically removed when closed or when the program terminates normally Returns a stream if successful or NULL if the file could not be created tmpnam include lt stdio h gt char tmpnam char s L_tmpnam Creates a temporary name not a file Each time tmpnam is called a different name is created tmpnam NULL creates a string that is not the name of an existing file and returns a pointer to an internal static array tmpnam s creates a string and stores it in s and also returns it as the function value s must have room for at least L_tmpnam characters At most TMP_MAX different names are guaranteed during execution of the program Returns a pointer to the temporary name as described above toascii include lt ctype h gt int
366. rmines the stack size in bytes on XC16x Super10 architectures __SSKSEG Determines the segment where the system stack is positioned on XC16x Super10 architectures In the startup file a code section named __CSTART_PR is declared In this code section the task procedure __CSTART is declared using interrupt number 0 which is the power on vector of the processor First the system is configured using a macro for each configuration item wait states read write signal delay system clock output segmentation control system stack size etc You must specify these values using the appropiate macros depending on the specific needs of your target system Please review the appropriate startup file for an exact overview of initialized registers and macros used The system stack registers overflow underflow and stack pointer are initialized using the predefined symbols SYSSTACK_BOTTOM and SYSSTACK_ TOP The assembler linker and locator treat predefined symbols all starting with a in a special way They give the assembler programmer access to information which is normally not available before the locate stage of the application Run time Environment 7 7 After the context pointer register is set to the register bank of this task write output is enabled and the end of initialization instruction EINIT is executed All bit addressable memory is cleared because this guarantees all non initialized bit variables of each task to ha
367. rning char p void main void p hello Conform to ANSI C by checking for assignments of a constant string to a non constant string pointer The example above produces warning W130 operands of are pointers to different types Same as ACDFIKLMPSTUVWX disable all Same as AcdfiklmpstuVwx default Example To disable character arithmetic and C comments enter cl166 ACP test c 4 16 Chapter 4 Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the Application entry expand the Processor entry and select CPU Problem Bypasses and Checks Enable or disable one or more bypasses ees Biflags Arguments Optionally one or more CPU functional problem bypass flags Default Babdefhijklmnou Description Enable disable bypass for certain CPU functional problems Without the B option the default is BabdefhijkImnou all bypasses off Flags which are controlled by a letter can be switched on with the uppercase letter and switched off with the lowercase letter The following flags are allowed a A Default Do not protect DIVx MD LH sequences by an ATOMIC instruction Protect DIVx MD LH sequences by an ATOMIC instruction The DIVx instruction and a read from MDL MDH are not interruptable because the will be generated within the same atomic sequence This is a bypass for the LONDON1751 CPU functional problem Refer to Appendix C CPU Functional Problems
368. rol CPU problem bypasses Control floating point Select memory model tiny small medium large or huge B iflag F flag M t s m I h Compiler Use Description Options Control optimization Oflag Use user stack model stack frame calling P d convention to be used with special stack frame C library if d is not specified Enable GSO acquire phase gso Enable GSO allocation phase Specify scaling of interrupt vector table needs x2 0 for no scaling default 1 for x2 2 for x4 3 for x8 Omit REGDEF or specify number nr of GPR registers the name of the register bank and C for common gso file gso iscale r name c regdef Allow all or some functions of the extended x 1 2 22 d architectures to be used with ext or ext2 library sets Identical to pragma pragma inthe C source zoragma Language control options Enable disable specific language extensions Afflag Treat all char variables as unsigned u Output file options Remove output file if compiler errors occur e Send output to standard output n Specify name of output file o file Merge C source code with assembly output s i Diagnostic options Display invocation syntax Display version header only V Send diagnostics to error list file err err Alternative exit values exit Enable symbolic debug information g b f I s Enable individua
369. ror struct T int i struct T long j error 64 incompatible redeclaration of name The specified identifier was already declared All declarations in the same function or module that refer to the same object or function must specify compatible types The following is an example of this error int i char i error 66 function name variable name not used A variable is declared which is never used You can remove this unused variable or you can use the w66 option to suppress this warning 67 illegal suboption option The suboption is not valid for this option Check the invocation syntax for a list of all available suboptions 68 function name parameter name not used A function parameter is declared which is never used You can remove this unused parameter or you can use the w68 option to suppress this warning 69 declaration contains more than one basic type specifier Type specifiers may not be repeated The following is an example of this error int char i error 5 14 7 E Chapter 5 70 break outside loop or switch A break statement may only appear in a switch or a loop do for or while So if 0 break is not allowed 71 illegal type specified The type you specified is not allowed in this context For example you cannot use the type void to declare a variable The following is an example of this error void i error 72 duplicate ty
370. ructures 3 46 parser 2 5 PDAT 3 12 PEC support 3 142 peephole optimization 4 52 perror 6 69 pointer casting to long 4 59 register automatic register variable allocation 4 60 contents tracing 4 53 portable c code 3 144 pow 6 69 pragma 3 35 4 88 alias 4 88 align 4 91 align32 4 89 asm 4 90 asm_noflush 4 90 autobita 4 90 autobitastruct 4 90 automatic 3 66 4 90 dutosavemac 4 96 class 4 91 clear 4 91 combine 4 91 cse resume 4 91 Index cse suspend 4 91 custack 4 91 default_attributes 4 92 dfap 4 92 endasm 4 90 eramdata 4 92 fix_byte write 4 95 fragment 4 93 fragment continue 4 93 fragment resume 4 95 global 4 95 global_dead_store_elim 4 93 indirect_access 4 94 iramdata 4 92 m166include 4 94 macro 4 95 no_global_dead_store_elim 4 94 noalias 4 89 nodlign32 4 89 noclear 4 92 nocustack 4 91 nodfap 4 92 nofix_byte_write 4 93 noframe 4 95 nomacro 4 95 noreorder 4 95 nosavemac 4 96 nosource 4 96 novolatile_union 4 97 on command line 4 84 preserve_mulip 4 95 public 4 95 regdef 4 95 reorder 4 95 restore_attributes 4 92 resume_align32 4 89 romdata 4 93 save_attributes 4 92 savemac 4 96 size 4 96 source 4 96 speed 4 96 Index Index 17 static 3 65 4 91 stringmem 4 96 suspend_align32 4 89 switch _force_table 4 96 switch smart 4 97 switch_tabmem_default 4 97 switch _tabmem_far 4 97 switch _tabmem_near 4 97 volatil
371. s include lt math h gt double fabs double x Returns the absolute double value of x x fcalloc include lt stdlib h gt void far fcalloc size_t nobj size_t size Far variant of calloc Q See section 7 3 Heap Size fclose include lt stdio h gt int fclose FILE stream Flushes any unwritten data for stream discards any unread buffered input frees any automatically allocated buffer then closes the stream Returns zero if the stream is successfully closed or EOF on error feof include lt stdio h gt int feof FILE stream Returns a non zero value if the end of file indicator for stream is set ferror include lt stdio h gt int ferror FILE stream Returns a non zero value if the error indicator for stream is set 6 32 Chapter 6 7 Sflush include lt stdio h gt int fflush FILE stream Writes any buffered but unwritten date if stream is an output stream If stream is an input stream the effect is undefined Returns zero if successful or EOF on a write error JSfree include lt stdlib h gt void ffree void far p Deallocates the space pointed to by p p Must point to space earlier allocated by a call to fcallocQ fmallocQ or freallocQ Otherwise the behavior is undefined Returns nothing JSgetc include lt stdio h gt int fgetc FILE stream Reads one character from the given stream Returns the read character or EOF
372. s a b error E 192 missing filename after f option The f option requires a filename argument 5 30 7 Chapter 5 E 194 cannot initialize typedef You cannot assign a value to a typedef variable So typedef i 2 is not allowed 195 constant expression out of range truncated The resulting constant expression is too large to fit in the specified data type The value is truncated The following example generates this warning int i 140000L warning value is too large to fit in an int 196 constant expression out of range due to signed unsigned type mismatch The resulting constant expression is too large to fit in the specified data type The following example generates this warning int i 40000U the unsigned value is too large to fit in a signed int unsigned int i 40000U is OK Note that this warning is formally correct but not very useful is most cases Consider the following situation unsigned int a a 0x1234u amp Ox00FFu When you compile this example with option Au default this warning appears Here the type of the unary operator is int Constant folding optimizes the expression to a 0x1234u amp OxFFO00 right operand is a signed int Next the right operand needs to be converted to an unsigned int in order to compute the result of the bitwise AND It is this conversion that generates the warning since the sign bit is differently interpreted
373. s case p is a pointer to a far char and therefore contains a 24 bit far address Language Implementation 3 25 e If the item immediately to the right of the keyword is an identifier the keyword determines the storage type of the item whether it must be allocated in the default data section or a separate data section In this case the pointer p is explicitly declared to be allocated in normal data if tiny small model is used or in the default data group if medium large huge model is used e If the item immediately to the right of the keyword is a pointer a star the keyword determines the logical type whether the pointer will hold a near address 2 bytes a _far address 4 bytes a huge address 4 bytes or an _shuge address 4 bytes For example char _far _near p allocates p as a_ far pointer to an item of type char The pointer p itself is allocated in near data e The memory model used determines the default logical type of a pointer In int p p is a far pointer when you use the medium or large model a huge pointer in the huge model otherwise a near pointer The storage type of p itself is near in tiny and small model and depending on the threshold value probably also near in medium large and huge model e You cannot apply the _far keyword to functions 3 2 1 9 SYSTEM IRAM AND BITA As described before c166 lets you override the default addressing convention for a given memory model and
374. s error int f int 2 int f int 3 error 108 different types Corresponding parameters must have compatible types and the type of each prototype parameter must be compatible with the widened definition parameter This error is usually followed by informational message I 111 The following is an example of this error int f int int f long error different type in parameter list 109 floating point constant out of valid range A floating point constant must have a value that fits in the type to which it was assigned See section Data Types for the valid range of a floating point constant The following is an example of this error float d 10EF9999 error too big 110 function cannot return arrays or functions A function may not have a return type that is of type array or function A pointer to a function is allowed The following are examples of this error typedef int F F error typedef int A 2 A g error 111 parameter list does not match earlier prototype Check the parameter list or adjust the prototype The number and type of parameters must match This message is preceded by error E 106 E 107 or E 108 112 parameter declaration must include identifier If the declarator is a prototype the declaration of each parameter must include an identifier Also an identifier declared as a typedef name cannot be a parameter name The following are examples of this error Co
375. s in the interrupt frame instead of using a SCXT instruction Only the GPRs that are used in the interrupt function are saved void _interrupt 0x22 _using push timer void With the _using push function qualifier it is allowed to use the _localbank qualifier The compiler will use the selected localbank only to administrate the user stack size estimates on the correct stack See section 3 13 Extensions for the XC16x Super10 Architectures for more information Register Banks _using When you use the _using function qualifier with a register bank name as an argument you can tell the compiler to generate a new register bank for the interrupt function For example _interrupt 0x28 _using ADCONV_RB void ad_conv_complete void 3 78 eT Chapter 3 This way you can define several interrupt functions in one module with each function having its own register bank Or you can share a register bank between several interrupt functions which have the same interrupt level and thus can never interrupt each other When several interrupt functions in a source module are using a register bank with the same name the compiler uses the same register bank for these functions 1166 will overlay register banks with equal names All interrupt functions without the _using keyword use a register bank with a name derived from the module name This means that all interrupt functions in one C source file which
376. s is given below a relax alias checking b no clearing of non initialized static and public variables c common subexpression elimination d data flow constant copy propagation e allocate constant romdata in PDAT instead of LDAT only with Ms f optimize for speed increases code size g enable expression recognition h optimize interrupt frame j peephole optimization k register contents tracing 1 fast loops increases code size m instruction reordering 4 42 Chapter 4 NOP removal code order rearranging control flow optimization use far pointer when converting to from long optimize allocation of register variables use jump table for switch statement turn tentative into defining occurrence use user stack for interrupt data flow analysis peephole DFAP relax alias checking assume no cross type aliasing inline the intrinsic version of some C library functions edd ertvrovos i Example c166 OAcdFhkLnprstVw test c Compiler Use 4 43 Onumber Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select an optimization level in the Optimization box E Onumber Arguments A number in the range 0 3 Default O1 Description Control optimization You can specify a single number in the range 0 3 to enable or disable optimization The options are a combination of the other optimization flags 00
377. s on the assembly code This optimizer runs after the normal peephole optimizer described above The optimizer has function scope and solves a number of DFA problems With the analysis results optimizations can be performed without being hampered by flow changing instructions The instruction reordering phase This phase is only enabled for the ext2 architectures It tries to reorder the instructions in order to keep the pipeline from stalling as much as possible During this phase no instructions will be added or removed All phases of both frontend and backend are combined into one program c166 The compiler does not use any intermediate file for communication between the different phases of compilation The backend part is not called for each C statement but is started after a complete C function has been processed by the frontend in memory thus allowing more optimization The compiler only requires one pass over the input file resulting in relatively fast compilation 2 2 2 FRONTEND OPTIMIZATIONS The following optimizations are performed on the intermediate code They are independent of the target processor and the code generation strategy Constant folding Expressions only involving constants are replaced by their result Overview 2 7 Expression rearrangement Expressions are rearranged to allow more constant folding E g 1 x 3 is transformed into x 1 3 which can be folded Expression simplification
378. s product The file ap292201 pdf describes the usage of these libraries This file is located in the doc pdf directory See section 6 7 CAN Library Interface Description for a description of the CAN library routines The can166 Lib CAN libraries are available for all memory models in the ext extp uext and uextp library sets These libraries can be rebuilt using the corresponding makefiles Libraries 6 7 6 5 HEADER FILES The following header files are delivered with the C compiler lt assert h gt assert lt c166 h gt Special file for portability between c166 and other C compilers Contains macros to enable or disable the usage of TASKING C166 ST10 language extensions lt can_ext h gt CAN libraries function prototypes check_busoff_16x check_mo_16x check_mo15_16x def_mo_16x init_can_16x ld_modata_16x rd_modata_16x rd_mo15_16x send_mo_16x lt canr_16x h gt Definitions of CAN module control registers No C functions lt ctype h gt isalnum isalpha isascii iscntrl isdigit isgraph islower isprint ispunct isspace isupper isxdigit toascii tolower tolower toupper toupper lt errno h gt Error numbers No C functions lt fentl h gt open Also contains definitions of flags used by _opend lt float h gt _ isinf isinff isnan isnanf Constants related to floating point arithmetic lt fss h gt Definitions for file system simulation lt iso646 h gt Alternative spellings No C functi
379. section for mem Static allocation of automatics Use size as threshold before allocating data in default data group Mm MI Mh only Compiler Use Option Description T size size2 Umacro V e err exit f file glb fii s gso gso file gso iscale mmemesize mmem size n misracn n misrac advisory warnings misrac required warnings Nn 0 file r name c regdef s i t u w number wstrict In addition to the previous option you can also specify a threshold for intiialized data Default infinite Remove preprocessor macro Display version header only Remove output file if compiler errors occur Send diagnostics to error list file err Alternative exit values Read options from file Enable symbolic debug information Enable GSO acquire phase Enable GSO allocation phase Specify scaling of interrupt vector table needs x2 0 for no scaling default 1 for x2 2 for x4 3 for x8 Specify memory size Specify maximum section size for mem and in addition a threshold n for switching to a new section Enable individual MISRA C checks Generate warnings for advisory MISRA C rules Generate warnings for required MISRA C rules Send output to standard output Specify name of output file Omit REGDEF or specify number nr of GPR registers the name of the register bank and c for common Merge C source code with assembly output
380. select Directories The Directories dialog box appears 3 Fill in the following fields e In the Executable Files Path field type the pathname of the directory where the executables are located The default directory is PRODDIR bin e In the Include Files Path field add the pathnames of the directories where the compiler and assembler should look for include files The default directory is PRODDIR include Separate pathnames with a semicolon The first path in the list is the first path where the compiler and assembler look for include files To change the search order simply change the order of pathnames 1 6 Chapter 1 e In the Library Files Path field add the pathnames of the directories where the linker should look for library files The default directory is PRODDIR lib Separate pathnames with a semicolon The first path in the list is the first path where the linker looks for library files To change the search order simply change the order of pathnames amp Instead of typing the pathnames you can click on the Configure button A dialog box appears in which you can select and add directories remove them again and change their order 1 3 2 CONFIGURING THE COMMAND LINE ENVIRONMENT To facilitate the invocation of the tools from the command line either using a Windows command prompt or using Solaris you can set environment variables You can set the following variab
381. select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing In the Define user macro box click on an empty Macro field and enter a macro name Optionally click in the Definition field and enter a definition E Dmacro def Arguments The macro you want to define and optionally its definition Description Define macro to the preprocessor as in define If def is not given is absent 1 is assumed Any number of symbols can be defined The definition can be tested by the preprocessor with if ifdef and ifndef for conditional compilations If the command line is getting longer than the limit of the operating system used you can use the f option Example The following command defines the symbol NORAM as 1 and defines the symbol PI as 3 1416 c166 DNORAM DPI 3 1416 test c db v 4 22 Chapter 4 E Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing Enable the Store preprocessor output lt file gt i check box E E m clilp x Description Run the preprocessor of the compiler only and send the output to stdout When you use the E option use the o option to separate the output from the header produced by the compiler An overview of the flags is given below m generate dependencies for make c do not strip comments i keep include directives p do not generate line source position info x disab
382. ser defined functions using either the _usm or _nousm function qualifiers If _usm is specified at the function definition the function is called using user stack model calling conventions If _nousm is specified the function is called using the generic CALL RET calling method even if P was specified on the command line P option Libraries Def func _USMLIB qualifier macro none default _nousm _nousm P USM _usm _usm Pd default _usm _nousm Table 3 8 User stack model There are two valid reasons to use this option and libraries e Real time Operation Systems When using a real time kernel it is often not allowed to use the system stack area in fact change SP because this area is reserved for the kernel Therefore the P option can be used when using a kernel Please refer to the documentation supplied with the kernel to verify if this option must be used Language Implementation 3 29 e Heavy recursion When the system stack area is getting too small and it is not possible to implement a circular system stack approach using SOV SUN exception handlers the P option can be used In this case the compiler uses the user stack instead of the system stack You must link the application with the user stack model libraries Using P does not mean that you have to use a kernel You can run the application as a standalone application without any kernel db For more details see Appendix D User
383. signed short 3 53 unsigned char 3 53 unsigned int 3 53 unsigned long 3 53 unsigned short 3 53 xnear pointer 3 53 DAVE support 2 31 dead code elimination 2 8 debug environment B 1 CrossView Pro B 3 Hitex B 6 Kontron B 4 pls fast view66 B 7 debug information 4 30 debugger starting 2 30 def_mo_16x 6 108 default_attributes 4 92 DEFINE m166 control 7 4 defining occurrence 3 21 derivatives 2 4 detailed option description compiler 4 10 4 84 development flow 2 10 dfap 4 92 difftime 6 30 directories setting 1 5 1 6 directory separator 4 86 div 6 30 dmp166 2 11 double 3 53 double precision 3 93 double base expression subroutines 3 93 double conversion subroutines 3 94 double support subroutines 3 95 DPP registers 7 7 DPP usage 3 20 EDE build an application 2 23 create a project 2 18 create a project space 2 17 rebuild an application 2 24 specify development tool options 2 21 starting 2 15 efficiency in large data models 3 19 5 22 endasm 4 90 environment variables 1 6 A166INC 1 6 C166INC 1 6 4 34 4 85 CC166BIN 1 6 CC166OPT 1 6 LINK166 1 7 LM _LICENSE FILE 1 7 1 13 LOCATE166 1 7 M166INC 1 7 PATH 1 7 TASKING_LIC_WAIT 1 7 TMPDIR 1 7 eramdata 4 92 errno h 6 7 error level 5 4 errors 5 6 backend 5 34 frontend 5 6 esfr 3 53 esfrbit 3 53 EVA 7 5 EX_AB 7 5 example using separate programs 2 26 using the control program 2 24 I
384. sponding wide character and then if pwe is not a NULL pointer stores that value in the object pointed to by pwe If the corresponding wide character is the NULL wide character the resulting state described is the initial conversion state Returns the number of bytes or 0 if s points to the null character or size _t 2 if the bytes form an incomplete but potentionally valid multi byte character or size_t 1 if the bytes do not form a valid multi byte character mbsinit include lt wchar h gt int mbsinit const mbstate_t ps Determines whether the pointed to mbstate_t object describes an initial conversion state if ps is not a NUL pointer Returns non zero if ps is a NULL pointer or if the pointed to object describes an initial conversion state Otherwise it returns zero 6 54 Chapter 6 e mbsrtowcs include lt wchar h gt size_t mbsrtowcs wchar_t dst const char src size_t len mbstate_t ps Converts a sequence of multi byte characters that begins in the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps from the array indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding wide characters This function then stores the converted characters into the array pointed to by dst stopping when len wide characters have been stored or when a sequence of bytes is encountered that does not form a valid multi byte character or if a null wide character is stored Returns the number of multi by
385. srac required warnings Description With this option you can change the error level for messages on the required and advisory MISRA C rules to warnings The default messages are errors Refer to Appendix A MISRA C for a list of MISRA C rules Example c166 misrac9 misrac required warnings test c Will generate a warning in case test c contains nested comments 4 40 Chapter 4 Option N Description Do not create output files but send the output to stdout This option is for example useful to quickly inspect the output or to redirect the output to other tools Example c166 n test c The compiler sends the output normally test src to stdout and does not create the file test src Compiler Use 4 41 0 Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select an optimization level in the Optimization box If you select Custom optimization in the Optimization box you can enable or disable individual optimizations in the Custom setting of optimizations list E Oflags Arguments One or more optimization flags Default O1 Description Control optimization By default c166 performs as much code optimizations as possible same as O1 Flags which are controlled by a letter can be switched on with the lower case letter and switched off with the uppercase letter These options are described together An overview of the flag
386. ss C166_VECTAB An example of an inlined interrupt function is shown below kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Section which will be located at vector position 0x10 by the locator the scaling 3 32bytes entry available in vector table kkkxkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk se Ne Ne Ne Ne C166 INT SECTION CODE WORD PUBLIC C166 VECTAB a3 PROC TASK SCALEDVE TASK INTNO SCALEDVE_INUM 010h SCALING 3 INLINE PUSH CP 7 2 bytes SCXT MDC 010h 7 4 bytes PUSH DPPO 7 2 bytes MOV DPP0 PAG BASE_ DPPO 4 bytes PUSH DPP2 7 2 bytes MOV DPP2 PAG BASE DPPO 4 bytes PUSH MDH 77 2 bytes MOV SCALEDVE_RB RO 4 bytes MOV CP SCALEDVE_RB 77 4 bytes Context switch right before JMPS JMPS SEG _ISR1 ISR1 4 bytes RETV sep Gabe 3 ENDP 77 32 bytes C166 INT ENDS 3 82 se Ne Ne Chapter 3 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Start of ISR kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SCALEDVE_1 PR SECTION CODE _ISR1 PROC TASK ISR PUSH MDL se Ne Ne POP POP POP POP POP POP RETI _ISR1 ENDP kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk User code goes here kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk MDL MDH DPP2 DPPO MDC CP A faster way to trasfer control to an interrupt function is to make use of cached interrupts To support this the hardware of the ext2 architectures bypasses the interrupt vector table at all In this case the compiler cannot inline any code of the interrupt fuction in the vector table Therefor
387. ss specifier in the declaration of this local variable because c166 might allocate other C variables into the CPU registers than the variables you prefer to be in registers Avoid static initialized bit variables which must have the value 1 after startup because this takes a lot of ROM space and is very time consuming during system startup Use the t option to inspect the size of the code generated This is useful when experimenting with compiler options Use the Of optimization option to prefer speed instead of code density OF is default Use the Ox optimization option to enable extra inlining of C library functions when you prefer speed instead of code density COMPILER USE all TASKING M daLdVH Compiler Use 4 3 4 1 CONTROL PROGRAM The control program cc166 is provided to facilitate the invocation of the various components of the C166 ST10 toolchain The control program accepts source files options and controls on the command line in random order The invocation syntax of the control program is cc166 option control file Options are preceded by a minus sign Controls are reserved words The input file can have any extension as explained below AN When you use a UNIX shell Bourne shell C shell arguments containing special characters such as and must be enclosed with or escaped The option in the C shell be
388. ssumes the C16x ST10 architecture without any silicon bug workarounds enabled Therefore the library set in the subdirectory ext is used 5 Link the module by typing PC 1166 link sieve obj ext cl66s 1lib ext rt166s lib to sieve lno 2 28 Chapter 2 UNIX 1166 link sieve obj ext cl66s 1lib ext rt166s 1lib to sieve lno By default the linker searches the 1ib directory for libraries This way it finds the c166s 1lib and rt166s 1lib libraries The cstart obj C startup code is extracted from the rt166s 1ib library because the compiler generates a reference to this module when the main function is defined The result of this command is the linked task object module sieve lno When you use the PRINT control the file sieve 1n1 is created containing information about the linking stage memory map symbol table register map However this is slowing down the process of linking and therefore turned off by default Locate the module by typing 1166 locate sieve to sieve out nocc The result of this command is the absolute output file sieve out and the file sieve map containing the locate map of the application The nocc control disables the checking on definition of class ranges used to locate all parts of the application in user defined memory ranges In order to load this application into the CrossView Pro debugger the output file must be formatted into IEEE Std 695 format Format the output file by typing ieeel66 sieve ou
389. st occurrence of character c in the string cs If not found NULL is returned _hstrcmp include lt string h gt int _hstrcmp const char huge cs const char huge ct Compares huge string cs to huge string ct Returns lt Oifes lt ct 0 ifes ct gt O0ifes gt ct Libraries 6 15 _hstrcpy include lt string h gt char huge hstrcpy char huge s const char huge ct Copies huge string ct into the huge string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s _hstrcspn include lt string h gt size_t _hstrcspn const char huge cs const char huge ct Returns the length of the prefix in huge string cs consisting of characters not in the huge string ct _hstrlen include lt string h gt size_t _hstrlen const char huge cs Returns the length of the huge string in cs not counting the NULL character _hstrncat include lt string h gt char huge hstrncat char huge s const char huge ct size tn Concatenates huge string ct to huge string s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character Returns s 6 16 Chapter 6 7 _hstrncmp include lt string h gt int _hstrncemp const char huge cs const char huge ct size tn Compares at most n bytes of huge string cs to huge string ct Returns lt Oifes lt ct 0 ifes ct gt 0 ifcs gt ct _hstrncpy include lt string h gt char huge hstrncpy char huge s const char huge
390. stdlib h gt double strtod const char s char endp Converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by s to a double value Initial white spaces are skipped When endp is not a NULL pointer after this function is called endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion Returns the read value strtok include lt string h gt char strtok char s const char ct Search the string s for tokens delimited by characters from string ct It terminates the token with a NULL character Returns a pointer to the token A subsequent call with s NULL will return the next token in the string strtol include lt stdlib h gt long strtol const char s char endp int base Converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by s to a long integer Initial white spaces are skipped Then a value is read using the given base When base is zero the base is taken as defined for integer constants I e numbers starting with an 0 are taken octal numbers starting with 0x or 0X are taken hexadecimal Other numbers are taken decimal When endp is not a NULL pointer after this function is called endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion Returns the read value Libraries 6 89 strtoul include lt stdlib h gt unsigned long strtoul const char s char endp int base Converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by s to an unsigned long
391. ster definition If not the compiler adds this register and generates a message The register definition remains valid until the next pragma regdef in the source When only the name and optional common flag are used in the r option a full register bank consisting of RO R15 is the default 4 72 B Chapter 4 When the r option is used without any arguments the REGDFF directive for this module will be omitted Note that register banks originating from the _using function qualifier will still be generated Interrupt functions that do not have the _using qualifier use the module s register bank Since this bank will be omitted no code will be generated in the interrupt frame to switch register banks With pragma regdef the used register set can be redefined A pragma setting will remain active until the next pragma regdef The syntax for regdef is the same as in the r option As an alternative the number of registers starting from RO may be specified When different register sets are used for different functions the compiler will combine the register sets for the same register bank When pragma regdef is used without arguments or with argument 0 the REGDEF directive for interrupt functions will be omitted even if the _using qualifier is used In this case the compiler will not generate code in the interrupt frame to switch global register banks When the register set that the compiler can use for code generation is l
392. sting shows the code for an indirect inter segment jump using the ATOMIC instruction Rseg and Rsof contain the inter segment address to jump to code can be read as mov CSP Rseg mov IP Rsof atomic 3 protect against interrupts Nee Se Ne te Ne te Ne push Rseg SP lt SP 2 SP lt Rseg push Rsof SP lt SP 2 SP lt Rsof rets IP lt SP SP lt SP 2 CSP lt SP SP lt SP 2 User Stack Model D 7 2 4 DIRECT INTER SEGMENT FUNCTION CALL AND RETURN A direct inter segment function call far function call is normally performed with a CALLS instruction and returned with a RETS instruction but now the system stack may not be used to store the function return address A direct inter segment function can be invoked using a JMPS instruction but the called function does not know where to return to on exit Therefore before a direct inter segment jump can be performed to the far function the segment number and segment offset of the return label must be stored on the user stack The far function being invoked returns to its caller by getting the return label from the user stack and then performing an indirect inter segment jump to the return label as described in the previous section The next assembly listing displays the code the C compiler generates for a far function call when extended instructions are available The far function called is named _f Rsof and Rseg ar
393. struction Protect BFLDH BFLDL instructions by an ATOMIC instruction This is a bypass for the CPU 21 CPU functional problem Refer to Appendix C CPU Functional Problems for details Default Do not protect JMPI CALLI instructions by an ATOMIC instruction Protect JMPI CALLI instructions by an ATOMIC instruction This is a bypass for the LONDON1 CPU functional problem Refer to Appendix C CPU Functional Problems for details Default Assume hardware environment is present where there is no need to protect the execution of multiply instructions and divide instructions against interrupts Emit inline code MUL DIV DIVU DIVL DIVLU instead of a run time library call You must use the non protected version of the library This option emits code to protect multiply divide operations against interrupts The protection will be generated inline using ATOMIC instructions Use the protected version of the library lib extp 1ib This is a bypass for many CPU problems among which are problem 7 problem 13 problem 17 CPU 2 CPU 11 and CPU 18 as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems Default Do not avoid pipeline conflict after CoSTORE instruction Avoid pipeline conflict after CoSTORE instruction This is a bypass for the Kfm_BR03 CPU functrional problem as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems Compiler Use 4 19 o Default Do not prevent the generation of MOV B Rn Rm data16 instructions O Disa
394. t Returns the directory name if successful NULL on error getenv include lt stdlib h gt char getenv const char name Returns the environment string associated with name or NULL if no string exists gets include lt stdio h gt char gets char s Reads all characters from standard input until a newline is found The newline is replaced by a NULL character d See also readQ Returns a pointer to the read string or NULL on error 6 42 Chapter 6 7 getwc include lt wchar h gt wint_t getwc FILE stream Reads one wide character out of the given stream Returns the wide character read or WEOF on error getwchar include lt wchar h gt wint_t getwchar void Reads one wide character from standard input Returns the wide character read or WEOF on error gmtime include lt time h gt struct tm gmtime const time_t tp Converts the calender time tp into Coordinated Universal Time UTC Returns a structure representing the UTC or NULL if UTC is not available bcalloc include lt stdlib h gt void _huge hcalloc unsigned long nobj unsigned long size Huge variant of calloc0 See section 7 3 Heap Size Libraries 6 43 hfree include lt stdlib h gt void hfree void _huge p Deallocates the space pointed to by p p Must point to space earlier allocated by a call to heallocQ hmalloc or hrealloc Otherwise the behavi
395. t Attribute 2 0 eee eee 3 43 3 2 8 Inline C Functions inline yrei ian aA 3 44 3 2 9 Unaligned Data noalign 0000 3 45 3 2 10 Using Packed Structures packed 3 46 33 Task SCOPE wins ics wenden oles ed Osea OAE OA ETEN hes 3 49 3 4 Data TYPES bs soheectepeataieaaheear turas A ees 3 53 3 4 1 ANSI C Type Conversions 0 00 0 eee eee 3 54 3 4 2 Character Arithmetic usssuss arere 3 57 3 4 3 The Bit Type tans Shay ttn artes Ree Mek ee Ree eae 3 58 3 4 4 The Bitword Types earan a a a a eee 3 59 3 4 5 Special Function Registers 0 0 eee eee eee 3 60 3 5 Predefined Macros ess gaea t ea E A a eae 3 62 3 6 Function Parameters ussa uaaa 3 63 3 6 1 Static Approach of Function Automatics 3 64 3 7 Register Variables oorecga iepa E pE TERTRE E EEES 3 66 3 8 Initialized Variables unnan 3 68 Table of Contents 3 8 1 3 8 2 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 16 1 3 16 2 3 16 3 3 16 4 3 16 4 1 3 16 4 2 3 16 4 3 3 16 5 3 16 5 1 3 16 5 2 3 16 5 3 3 16 5 4 3 16 6 3 16 7 3 16 8 3 16 9 3 17 3 17 1 3 17 2 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 Automatic Initializations 00 0 00 cece eee 3 68 Static Initializations 0 2 0 eee 3 68 Non Initialized Variables 0 0000000 e ee 3 69 STAN Sts eit Ge eet Ge hla st se bans give es 3 70 Inline Assembly sa 0 0 cece eee eae 3 73 Interrupt yaaa aaa ieee Lia bane 3 76
396. t objects are accessed This is a bypass for the CPU 16 problem as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems Default Do not prevent the generation of Label_C JMPR cc xx Label_A instructions Disable the generation of Label_C JMPR cc xx Label A instructions This is a bypass for the BUS 18 problem as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems Default Do not place BFLDH PSW 0F0h 0F0h before RETI in interrupt functions Place the instruction BFLDH PSW 0F0h 0F0h before RETI in interrupt functions This is a bypass for the CPU problem 17 as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems Default Do not place ATOMIC 2 before a JMPS instruction Do not delete the return addresses from the system stack in interrupt functions 4 18 7 B J Chapter 4 Place ATOMIC 2 before a JMPS instruction The JMPS instructions in the interrupt vector table will be replaced by CALLS instructions linker locator control FIXSTBUS1 The compiler generates an ADD SP 04 instruction to delete the return address generated by CALLS from the system stack This is a bypass for the ST_BUS 1 problem as described in Appendix C CPU Functional Problems The instruction to delete the return address from the system stack is part of the interrupt frame If pragma noframe was used this instruction will not be generated you have to do it manually k K Default Do not protect BFLDH BFLDL instructions by an ATOMIC in
397. t Use default section attributes See the section 3 2 3 Section Allocation for details save_attributes Save the current section attributes See the section 3 2 3 Section Allocation for details about changing section attributes restore_attributes Restore the last saved section attributes A warning is issued when no section attributes were saved See the section 3 2 3 Section Allocation for details about changing section attributes dfap Default Enable the data flow analysis peephole The Ov option must be active for this pragma to work nodfap Disable the data flow analysis peephole eramdata Allocate all non automatic initialized variables in both ROM and RAM The RAM data section has the class name CINITERAM unless part of the default data group where all sections must have the same class name Copy from ROM to RAM at startup transparent for the user See section 3 8 Initialized Variables for details iramdata Default Allocate all non automatic initialized variables in both ROM and RAM The RAM data section has the class name CINITIRAM unless part of the default data group where all sections must have the same class name Copy from ROM to RAM at startup transparent for the user See section 3 8 Initialized Variables for details Compiler Use 4 93 romdata Allocate all non automatic variables in ROM only The ROM data section can have the class names CROM CNEARROM CFARROM
398. t s2 Compares wide string s1 to wide string s2 Returns lt 0 ifsl lt s2 0 ifsl s2 gt 0 ifsl gt s2 wescoll include lt wchar h gt int wcscoll const wchar_t sl const wchar t s2 Compares wide string s1 to wide string s2 The comparison is based on wide strings interpreted as appropriate to the program s locale Returns lt 0 ifsl lt s2 0 ifsl s2 gt 0 ifsl gt s2 6 98 7 Chapter 6 wescpy include lt wchar h gt wchar_t wcscpy wchar_t sl const wchar_t s2 Copies wide string s2 intto wide string s1 including the trailing null wide character Returns sl wescspn include lt wchar h gt size_t wcescspn const wchar_t sl const wchar t s2 Returns the length of the maximum initial segment of wide string s1 which consists entirely of wide characters not from wide string s2 wesftime include lt wchar h gt size_t wcsftime wchar_t s size_t maxsize const wchar t format const struct tm timeptr This function is equivalent to the strftime function except that The argument s points to the initial element of an array of wide characters into which the generated output is to be placed The argument maxsize indicates the limiting number of wide characters The argument format is a wide string and the conversion specifiers are replaced by corresponding sequences of wide characters Returns the number of wide characters 0 not included or zer
399. t a 2 is 146 argument number memory spaces do not match With prototypes the memory spaces of arguments must match Compiler Diagnostics 5 23 W 147 argument number different levels of indirection With prototypes the types of arguments must be assignment compatible The following code generates this warning int i void func int int func 1 amp i warning argument 2 W 148 argument number struct union type does not match With prototypes both the prototyped function argument and the actual argument was a struct or union but they have different tags The tag types should match The following is an example of this warning f struct s prototype main struct int i t f t t has other type than s E 149 object name has zero size A struct or union may not have a member with an incomplete type The following is an example of this error struct struct unknown m s error W 150 argument number pointers to different types With prototypes the pointer types of arguments must be compatible The following example generates this warning int f int long 1 1 warning W 151 ignoring memory specifier Memory specifiers for a struct union or enum are ignored E 152 operands of operator are not pointing to the same memory space Be sure the operands point to the same memory space This error occurs for example when you try to assign a pointer
400. t bitaddressable at You can specify a variable to be at an absolute address 3 4 7 Chapter 3 _atbit You can specify a variable to be at a bit offset within a _bitword or bitaddressable _sfr variable _inline Used for defining inline functions _usm _nousm With these function qualifiers you can force that a function is called using the user stack model calling convention or using the generic CALL RET calling convention _bita You can tell the compiler that a struct must be located in bitaddressable memory by using the _bita memory qualifier memory specific pointers c166 allows you to define pointers which point to a specific target memory These types of pointers are very efficient and require only 2 or 4 bytes memory space special types Apart from a memory category extern static you can specify a storage type in each declaration This way you obtain a memory model independent addressing of variables in several address ranges of the C166 ST10 _near xnear far huge shuge system _iram interrupt functions You can specify interrupt functions directly through interrupt vectors in the C language _interrupt keyword You may also specify the register bank to be used _using keyword intrinsic functions A number of pre declared functions can be used to generate inline assembly code at the location of the intrinsic built in function call This avoids the overhead which is normally used to do
401. t is a pointer to short rather than int or by I letter ell if the argument is a pointer to long The conversion characters e f and g may be preceded by T if a pointer double rather than float is in the argument list and by L if a pointer to a long double A conversion specifier maximum field width and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Length specifier and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Character Scanned as d int signed decimal i int the integer may be given octal i e a leading 0 is entered or hexadecimal leading Ox or 0X or just decimal o int unsigned octal u int unsigned decimal X int unsigned hexadecimal in lowercase or upper case c single character converted to unsigned char S char a string of non white space characters The argument should point to an array of characters large enough to hold the string and a terminating NULL character f float e E float g G float n int the number of characters written so far is written into the argument No scanning is done 6 78 Chapter 6
402. t locate stop at 1no cm Always also invokes the C muncher cp Always also invokes the C pre linker cprep Use C preprocessor instead of macro preprocessor cs Do not assemble stop at src Compiler Use libfmtiovariant libmac noc nolib nostl nostlo 0 file srec tmp trap notrap V v0 WC Option Description f file Read arguments from file denotes standard input gs Pass cl to ieee166 set compatibility mode to 1 ieee Produce an IEEE 695 output file ihex Produce an Intel hex output file lib directory Specify the location of user built libraries libcan Link CAN library Link MEDIUM or LARGE printf scan library variants Link MAC optimized runtime library Force C files to C mode Do not link with the standard libraries Do not link the STLport library Do not link the STLport extension library Specify the output file Produce an S record output file Keep intermediate files Use a floating point library with trap handler Use a floating point library without trap handler Verbose option show commands invoked Same as v but commands are not started Enable C and assembler warnings for C files Table 4 1 Control program options For more detailed information about the control program cc166 refer to section cc166 in Chapter Utilities of the Cross Assembler Linker Locator Utilities User s Manual 4 5 Chapter 4 4 2 COMPILER The invo
403. t of x raised to the power of y xY 6 70 Chapter 6 7 printf include lt stdio h gt int printf const char format Performs a formatted write to the standard output stream Gb See also writeQ Returns the number of characters written to the output stream The format string may contain plain text mixed with conversion specifiers Each conversion specifier should be preceded by a character The conversion specifier should be build in order Flags in any order specifies left adjustment of the converted argument a number is always preceded with a sign character has higher precedence as space space a negative number is preceded with a sign positive numbers with a space 0 specifies padding to the field width with zeros only for numbers specifies an alternate output form For o the first digit will be zero For x or X 0x and 0X will be prefixed to the number For e E f g G the output always contains a decimal point trailing zeros are not removed A number specifying a minimum field width The converted argument is printed in a field with at least the length specified here If the converted argument has fewer characters than specified it will be padded at the left side or at the right when the flag was specified with spaces Padding to numeric fields will be done with zeros when the flag 0 is also specified only when padding left Instead of
404. t sieve abs The file sieve abs can be loaded and executed by CrossView Pro Overview 2 29 2 10 3 USING A MAKEFILE The examples directory contains several subdirectories with example programs Each subdirectory contains a makefile which can be processed by mk166 to build the example The examples directory also contains a makefile for building all examples For building all examples add the bin directory of the installed product to the search path and type mk166 For building one example program make the directory containing the example the current working directory Build the example by typing mk166 When the example has already been built before only the parts which are out of date are rebuilt For more information see also the readme txt files in the subdirectories of the examples To see which commands are invoked by mk166 without actually executing them type mk166 n When you want to re translate the examples with other settings you should first clean up the results of a previous translation This can be done by mk166 clean You can also use this when you just want to clean up the example directories 2 30 Chapter 2 7 2 11 DEBUGGING YOUR APPLICATION Once the files have been compiled with symbolic debug information enabled option g assembled linked located and formatted they are ready for debugging Start CrossView Pro e Click on the Debug application button al CrossView Pr
405. t value to an integer the floating point constant may not be too large This warning is usually preceded by error E 16 or E 109 The following is an example of this warning 5 20 Chapter 5 int i 10E88 error and warning 119 cannot take sizeof bitfield or void type The size of a bit field or void type is not known So the size of it cannot be taken 120 cannot take sizeof function The size of a function is not known So the size of it cannot be taken 121 not a function declarator This is not a valid function This may be due to a previous error The following is an example of this error int return 0 missing int g error g is nota formal parameter and therefore this is nota valid function declaration 122 unnamed formal parameter The parameter must have a valid name 123 function should return something A return in a non void function must have an expression 124 array cannot hold functions An array of functions is not allowed 125 function cannot return anything A return with an expression may not appear in a void function 126 missing return function name A non void function with a non empty function body must have a return statement 129 cannot initialize name Declarators in the declarator list may not contain initializations Also an extern declaration may have no initializer The following are examples of this error extern int i
406. ta objects can easily be greater than 64K As with the large and medium models the processor must run in segmented mode In section 3 2 1 7 Efficiency in Large Data Models Medium Large Huge some details are present about efficiency in large data models Map example 16M normal data shuge data code near data far data xnear Jata code o Figure 3 5 Huge memory map example 3 18 Chapter 3 Item Usage Comments CPU segmented code gt 64K allows code anywhere in 256K 16M normal data gt 64K huge data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single object is not limited Huge data access is less fast than near or far data access Size of one struct lt 64K Array of struct any type gt 64K xnear data lt 16K 16K per task of fast accessible user data anywhere in 256K 16M via DPP1 This memory space shares DPP1 with the user stack hence xnear data user stack lt 16K Use the _xnear keyword near data lt 16K 16K per task of fast accessible user data anywhere in 256K 16M via default data group Automatically utilized by c166 The keywords near systemand_iram also allow explicit user manipulation far data gt 64K paged data access anywhere in 256K 16M The size of a single data object is limited to 16K for objects larger than the specified near data threshold see the T compiler option shuge data
407. tack The following assembly listing displays the code the C compiler generates for an absolute near function call The near function called is named _ f Rn is a register used by the C compiler for temporary results User Stack Model D 5 min code state size times mov Rn SOF __RETURN_LABEL 4 2 mov RO Rn 2 2 jmpa cCC_UC f 4 4 __RETURN_LABEL 10 8 The assembly listing described below displays the code the C compiler generates to return to the caller of the near function min code state size times mov R2 RO 2 2 jmpi CC_UC R2 2 4 retv virtual return 0 0 4 6 Temporary register R2 is used to pop the return address from the user stack and to continue program execution at the return label via a indirect jump on the contents of R2 The user stack pointer is updated by the called function before it returns see R0 This is not the regular method to handle the user stack pointer in a C function but this saves one instruction Register R2 can be used because it is always free for use at function return No parameters are returned via register R2 2 2 INDIRECT INTRA SEGMENT FUNCTION CALL AND RETURN An indirect intra segment function call indirect near function call must also be performed without using the system stack The user stack is used to pass the return label to the near function The offset address of the near function is determined at run time At exit the near function returns the sa
408. taddressable operand _bfld bw 0x7f 1 BFLDL _bw 07Fh 01h _bfld SOCON 0x7 00 0x100 BFLDH SOCON 07Fh 01h _bfld bw 0x03c0 0x80 BFLDH _bw 03h 00h BFLDL _bw 0C0h 080h 3 120 7 Chapter 3 _getbit _bit _getbit BITADDR operand ICE bitoffset Returns the bit at bitoffset range 0 15 of the bitaddressable operand for usage in bit expressions b _getbit P0 0 BMOV _b P0 0 IEN _getbit bwarray 2 4 BMOV IEN bwarrayt 4 4 _putbit void putbit _bit value BITADDR operand ICE bitoffset Assign value to the bit at bitoffset range 0 15 of the bitaddressable operand _putbit 1 PO 3 BSET P0 3 _putbit si PO 2 MOV R4 _si BMOVN P0 2 2 _putbit _getbit P0 0 PO 1 BMOV PO0 1 P0 0 _int166 void _int166 ICE intno Execute the C166 ST10 software interrupt specified by the interrupt number intno via the software trap TRAP instruction _int166 0 emits an SRST Software Reset instruction _int166 4 TRAP 04h _int166 0 SRST Language Implementation 3 121 void _idle void Use IDLE instruction to enter the idle mode In this mode the CPU is powered down while the peripherals remain running Returns nothing if save_power MOV R5 _Save_power JMPR cc _Z _12 _idle wait until peripheral interrupt or external interrupt occurs IDLE _12 _nop void _nop void A NOP instruction is generated before and behind t
409. te characters successfully converted not including the terminating null character if any or size_t 1 if an invalid multi byte character is encountered mbstowcs include lt stdlib h gt size_t mbstowcs wchar_t pwcs const char s size tn Converts a sequence of multi byte characters that begins in the initial shift state from the array pointed to by s into a sequence of corresponding wide characters and stores these wide characters into the array pointed to by pwcs stopping after n wide characters are stored or a null wide character is stored Returns the number of array elements modified not including a terminating null wide character if any or size_t 1 if an invalid multi byte character is encountered Libraries 6 55 mbtowc include lt stdlib h gt int mbtowc wchar_t pwc const char s size tn Determines the number of bytes that comprise the multi byte character pointed to by s It then determines the value of the wide character that corresponds to that multi byte character If the multi byte character is valid and pwc is not a null pointer the mbtowc function stores the value of the wide character in the object pointed to by pwc At most n bytes will be examined starting at the byte pointed to by s Returns the number of bytes or 0 if s points to the null wide character or 1 if the bytes do not form a valid multi byte character memchr include lt string h gt void memchr const void
410. ted without any notice Default When a 32 bit value is divided by a 16 bits divisor and only 16 bits of the result are being used then the operation can be done by a DIVL or DIVLU instruction depending on the signed unsigned setting of the operands The same applies for the modulo operator When there are chances for overflow and the truncated result must still be conform ANSI then it is better to switch this option off Example long m32 short m16 divisor m16 m32 divisor m32 short m32 m16 4 14 Chapter 4 See also the intrinsic functions _div32 divu32 mod32 and _modu32 in section 3 17 Perform divide modulo operation always in 32 bits using run time library calls Default Allow C style comments in C source code For example e g this is a C comment line Do not allow C style comments in C source code to conform to strict ANSI C Default _STDC__ is defined as 0 The decimal constant 0 intended to indicate a non conforming implementation When one of the language extensions are enabled _ STDC__ should be defined as 0 __ STDC __ is defined as 1 In strict ANSI C mode A _ STDC __ is defined as T Default Do not promote old style function parameters when prototype checking Perform default argument promotions on old style function parameters for a strict ANSI C implementation char type arguments are promoted to int type and float type arguments are then promoted
411. ter type declaration statement A syntax error occurred in a parameter list a declaration or a statement This can have many causes such as errors in syntax of numbers usage of reserved words operator errors missing parameter types missing tokens E 43 unrecoverable syntax error skipping to end of file The compiler found an error from which it could not recover This error is in most cases preceded by another error Usually error E 42 I 44 in initializer name Informational message when checking for a proper constant initializer E 46 cannot hold that many operands The value stack may not exceed 20 operands E 47 missing operator An operator was expected in the expression E 48 missing right parenthesis Y was expected W 49 attempt to divide by zero potential run time error An expression with a divide or modulo by zero was found Adjust the expression or test if the second operand of a divide or modulo is zero E 50 missing left parenthesis C was expected E 51 cannot hold that many operators The state stack may not exceed 20 operators E 52 missing operand An operand was expected 5 12 E E Chapter 5 53 missing identifier after defined operator An identifier is required in a if defined identifier 54 non scalar controlling expression Iteration conditions and if conditions must have a scalar type not a struct union or a pointer For example after static struct int i si
412. the compiler memory model E 790 E 849 Reserved for gs0166 errors E 000 from gso166 maps on compiler error E 790 E 001 from gso166 maps on compiler error E 791 etc F 850 cannot find object object in GSO file The name of a global object cannot be found in the gso file for automatic storage assignment W 851 T option cannot be used in conjunction with gso When you use gso166 for building the application gso166 will assign storage to global objects However with the Tsize option the compiler is not allowed to allocate global objects in _near memory that exceed the specified size W 852 pragma name cannot be used in conjunction with gso You cannot use pragmas that control the storage of global objects in conjunction with gso166 W 860 pragma name has no effect inside a function ignored You cannot use this pragma inside a function body use the pragma before or after a function W 861 illegal memory space in pragma name ignored See section 3 10 Strings for a list of all available memory spaces with pragma stringmem W 862 bad argument to pragma name ignored See section 3 10 Strings for a list of all available arguments of pragma stringmem W 864 _atbit d has no effect on external declaration Do not use _atbitQ on external declarations of a bit object Use _atbitQ on the definition instead 5 46 Chapter 5 865 object name containing bit type fields is forced into bitaddressable area This error occurs when you
413. this CPU problem C 6 Appendix C 7 CPU 16 MOVB Rn mem Infineon reference CPU 16 Use compiler option BF Use libraries lib u 166p 1lib lib u Jextp lib lib u goldp lib When the MOVB Rn mem instruction is executed where a mem specifies a direct 16 bit byte operand address in the internal ROM Flash memory and b Rn points to an even byte address while the contents of the word which includes the byte addressed by mem is odd or Rn points to an odd byte address while the contents of the word which includes the bytes addressed by mem is even the following problem occurs 1 when Rn points to external memory or to the X Peripheral XRAM CAN etc address space the data value which is written back is always 00h 2 when Rn points to the internal RAM or SFR ESFR address space a the correct data value mem is written to Rn 1 i e to the odd byte address of the selected word in case Rn points to an even byte address b the correct data value mem is written to Rn 1 i e to the even byte address of the selected word in case Rn points to an odd byte address Since internal ROM Flash OTP data is referred to as const data the compiler will prevent generating the MOVB Rn mem instruction when even const objects are accessed The compiler is unaware of the exact location of these objects which is determined at locate time CPU Functional Problems C 7 CPU 18 Probl
414. ting point and does not accept flags width specifier period and precision This formatter is considerably smaller in code size than the MEDIUM or LARGE version putc include lt stdio h gt int putc int c FILE stream Puts one character onto the given stream d See also _write0 Returns EOF on error Libraries 6 73 putchar include lt stdio h gt int putchar int c Puts one character onto standard output Gb See also _writeQ Returns the character written or EOF on error puts include lt stdio h gt int puts const char s Writes the string to stdout the string is terminated by a newline d See also _write0 Returns NULL if successful or EOF on error putwc include lt wchar h gt wint_t putwc wchar_t c FILE stream Puts one wide character onto the given stream Returns the wide character written or WEOF on error putwchar include lt wchar h gt wint_t putwchar wchar t c Puts one wide character onto standard output Returns the wide character written or WEOF on error 6 74 Chapter 6 7 qsort include lt stdlib h gt void qsort void base size t n size t size int cmp const void const void This function sorts an array of n members The initial base of the array is given by base The size of each member is specified by size The given array is sorted in ascending order according to the results of the function
415. to a pointer from a different memory space 5 24 Chapter 5 153 sizeof zero sized object An implicit or explicit sizeof operation references an object with an unkown size This error is usually preceded by error E 119 or E 120 cannot take sizeof 154 argument number struct union mismatch With prototypes only one of the prototyped function argument or the actual argument was a struct or union The types should match The following is an example of this error f struct s prototype main int i f i i is not a struct 155 casting Ivalue type to type is not allowed The operand of the 4 or operator or the left operand of an assignment or compound assignment lvalue may not be cast to another type The following is an example of this error int i 3 unsigned i error cast expression is not an lvalue 157 name is not a formal parameter If a declarator has an identifier list only its identifiers may appear in the declarator list The following is an example of this error int f i int a error 158 right side of operator is not a member of the designated struct union The second operand of or gt must be a member of the designated struct or union 160 pointer mismatch at operator Both operands of operator must be a valid pointer The following example generates this error int pi 44 right side not a pointer Compi
416. to double type Default Use type unsigned char for 0x80 Oxff The type of an octal or hexadecimal constant not suffixed with L or I is the first of the corresponding list in which its value can be represented Character arithmetic enabled Ac char unsigned char int unsigned int long unsigned long Character arithmetic disabled AC strict ANSI C int unsigned int long unsigned long Do not use type unsigned char for 0x80 Oxff The type of an octal or hexadecimal constant not suffixed with L or I is the first of the corresponding list in which its value can be represented Compiler Use 4 15 0 1 Character arithmetic enabled Ac char int unsigned int long unsigned long Character arithmetic disabled AC strict ANSI C int unsigned int long unsigned long Allow type cast of an lvalue object with incomplete type void and Ivalue cast which does not change the type and memory of an lvalue object Example void p int p allowed int i char i 2 NOT allowed Default A cast may not yield an lvalue to conform strict ANSI C mode Default Allow propagation of const initializers This optimization makes the following code possible const int one 1 int array one Disable propagation of const initializers Default Do not check for assignments of a constant string to a non constant string pointer With this option the following example produces no wa
417. tomatics would have been allocated in the following registers i gt R15 c gt R14 1 gt R12 R13 All basic data types which are allowed as automatic variable are supported except float double bit char int long near far huge shuge pointer Of course sfr sfrbit xsfr and _bitword are not possible If register usage must be minimized e g interrupt function module specify r6 on the command line RO R5 used in REGDEF When the r option is used the automatic register allocation scheme of c166 is adjusted to meet the requirements of the user 3 68 Chapter 3 7 3 8 INITIALIZED VARIABLES There are two types of initialized variables which depend on the class of the variable static or automatic The implementation is described in the following sections 3 8 1 AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATIONS Automatic initialized variables are initialized run time each time a C function is entered Normally this is done by generating code which assigns the value to the automatic variable In the old K amp R language definition it was not allowed to initialize an automatic aggregate type e g an array or structure but only integral types The ANSI standard also allows run time initialization of automatic aggregate types To support this feature C166 generates code to copy the initialization constants from ROM to RAM each time the function is entered 3 8 2 STATIC INITIALIZATIONS There is a lot of existing C source
418. tools will run in trial mode This means you can use the toolset 15 days with full functionality When you run the toolset in trial mode each tool will report this When you use a license that does not cover the full toolset the tools that are not covered by the license will run in trial mode When after you installed the license file the tools that are covered by the license still report that they are running in trial mode this means that there is a license error If you want to force the termination of the trial mode to get the FLEXIm error message you can set the environment variable FORCE_NO_TRIAL to yes 1 10 Chapter 1 1 4 1 OBTAINING LICENSE INFORMATION Before you can install a software license you must have a License Key containing the license information for your software product If you have not received such a license key follow the steps below to obtain one Otherwise you can install the license Windows 1 2 Run the License Administrator during installation and follow the steps to Request a license key from Altium by E mail E mail the license request to your local TASKING sales representative The license key will be sent to you by E mail Solaris 1 If you need a floating license on Solaris you must determine the host ID and host name of the computer where you want to use the license manager Also decide how many users will be using the product See section 1 4 5 How to Determine the Host
419. trnepy 6 16 _hstrpbrk 6 16 _hstrrchr 6 16 _hstrspn 6 17 _hstrstr 0 17 _hstrtok 6 17 _sstrcat 6 18 _sstrchr 6 19 _sstrcmp 6 19 _sstrcpy 6 19 _ssircspn 6 19 _sstrlen 6 20 _sstrncat 6 20 _sstrncmp 6 20 _sstrncpy 6 21 _sstrpbrk 6 21 _sstrrchr 6 21 _ssirspn 0 21 _sstrstr 0 22 _sstrtok 0 22 memchr 6 55 memcmp 6 55 memcpffb 6 56 memcepffw 6 56 memcpfhb 6 56 memcpfhw 6 57 memcpfnb 6 57 memcpfnw 6 57 memcpfsb 6 58 memepfsw 6 58 memcphfb 6 58 memcphfw 6 59 memcphhb 6 59 memcphhw 6 59 memcphnb 6 60 memcphnw 6 60 memcphsb 6 60 memcphsw 6 61 memcpnfb 6 61 memcpnfw 6 61 memcpnhb 6 62 memcpnhw 6 62 memcpnnb 6 62 memcpnnw 6 63 memcpnsb 6 63 memcpnsw 6 63 memcpsfb 6 64 memcpsfw 6 64 memcpshb 6 64 memcpshw 6 65 memecepsnb 6 65 memecepsnw 6 65 Index Index Index 21 memcpssb 6 66 memcpssw 6 66 memcpy 6 66 memmove 6 66 memset 6 67 strcat 6 83 strchr 6 83 strcmp 6 84 strcoll 6 84 strcpy 6 84 strcspn 6 84 strerror 6 85 strlen 6 86 strncat 6 86 strncmp 6 86 strncpy 6 87 strpbrk 6 87 strrchr 6 87 strspn 6 87 strstr 6 87 strtok 6 88 strxfrm 6 89 stringmem 4 96 strings 3 19 3 70 3 72 strlen 6 86 strncat 6 86 strncmp 6 86 strncpy 6 87 strpbrk 6 87 strrchr 6 87 strspn 6 87 strstr 6 87 strtod 6 88 strtok 6 88 strtol 6 88 strtoul 6 89 structures unaligned members 3 46 strxfrm 6 89 Super10 C language extensions 3
420. turns a 10 bit page number pag_hp _pag harray MOV R4 SOF _harray MOV R5 SEG _harray MOV R12 R5 SHL R12 02h BMOV R12 0 R4 14 BMOV R12 1 R4 15 bof unsigned int _pof void p Inline code is generated by the C compiler to get the page offset of pointer p Not available in tiny model Returns a 14 bit page offset pof_hp _pof harray MOV R4 SOF _harray MOV R5 SEG _harray MOV R13 R4 AND R13 03FFFh Language Implementation 3 127 Ses unsigned int _seg void p Inline code is generated by the C compiler to get the segment number of pointer p Not available in tiny model Returns an 8 bit segment number seg fp _seg farray MOV R4 POF _farray MOV R5 PAG _farray MOV R14 R5 SHR R14 02h sof unsigned int _sof void p Inline code is generated by the C compiler to get the segment offset of pointer p Not available in tiny model Returns a 16 bit segment offset sof fp _sof farray MOV R4 POF _farray MOV R5 PAG _farray MOV R15 R5 SHL R15 0Eh OR R15 R4 _mkfp void far _mkfp unsigned int pof unsigned int pag Inline code is generated by the C compiler to make a far pointer from a page offset pof and page number pag The arguments pag and pof are expected to be in a valid range Returns a far pointer 3 128 Chapter 3 fp _mkfp pof_hp pag_hp MOV R4 R13 MOV R5 R12 MOV _fp R4 MOV _fp 2 R5 _mkbp void huge _mkhp unsigned int sof unsign
421. u select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language In the Language extensions box select Enable all extensions or select Custom extensions and enable or disable one or more language extensions G Aylags Arguments Optionally one or more language extension flags Default Al Description Control language extensions Without the A option all c166 language extensions are enabled A without any flags specifies strict ANSI mode all language extensions are disabled This is equivalent with ACDFIKLMPSTUVWxX and A0 Flags which are controlled by a letter can be switched on with the lower case letter and switched off with the uppercase letter Note that the usage of these options might have effect on code density and code execution performance The following flags are allowed c Default Perform character arithmetic c166 generates code using 8 bit character arithmetic as long as the result of the expression is exactly the same as if it was evaluated using integer arithmetic See also section 3 4 2 Character Arithmetic C Disable character arithmetic d Default Define storage for uninitialized constant rom data instead of implicit zero initialization The compiler generates a DS 1 for const char i 1 D Uninitialized constant rom data is implicitly zero The compiler generates a DB 1 for const char i 1 Compiler Use 4 13 pio Default 14 bit arithmetic is use
422. ubroutines AN 1 Return value on the user stack 2 R5R4 means that the most significant word is stored in R5 Language Implementation 3 16 5 3 DOUBLE SUPPORT SUBROUTINES Doubles can be stored anywhere in memory near far huge shuge but the floating point library expects them to be on the user stack This is why some library subroutines were implemented for fast copying of doubles to and from user stack _ load8n _load8f and __load8h copy doubles from near far or s huge area to the user stack space allocated by these routines themselves These routines change the user stack pointer and return a register pointer to the user stack __store8n space allocated by __ load8x store8f and _ store8h copy doubles from the user stack to near far huge or shuge These routines do not free the user stack __1d0 8r and ___1d1 8r allocate user stack similar to __ load8x and copy the value 0 0 or 1 0 to this area Available double support subroutines Subroutine Operation Operands Result __load8f copy double to user stack R5R4 1 R10 far __loadgh copy double to user stack R5R4 1 R10 huge shuge __load8n copy double to user stack R4 R10 near __IdOf8r create 0 0 on alloacted user None R10 stack __ d1f8r create 1 0 on allocated user None R10 stack __store8f copy double from user stack R10 R5R4 1 None destroys to far R10 __store8h copy double from use
423. ude lt string h gt char strncat char s const char ct size tn Concatenates string ct to string s at most n characters are copied Add a trailing NULL character Returns s strnucmp include lt string h gt int strncmp const char cs const char ct size tn Compares at most n bytes of string cs to string ct Returns lt Oifes lt ct 0 ifes ct gt O0ifes gt ct Libraries 6 87 strncpy include lt string h gt char strncpy char s const char ct size tn Copies string ct onto the string s at most n characters are copied Adds a trailing NULL character if the string is smaller than n characters Returns s strpbrk include lt string h gt char strpbrk const char cs const char ct Returns a pointer to the first occurrence in cs of any character out of string ct If none are found NULL is returned strrchr include lt string h gt char strrchr const char cs int c Returns a pointer to the last occurrence of c in the string cs If not found NULL is returned strspn include lt string h gt size_t strspn const char cs const char ct Returns the length of the prefix in string cs consisting of characters in the string ct Strstr include lt string h gt char strstr const char cs const char ct Returns a pointer to the first occurrence of string ct in the string cs Returns NULL if not found 6 88 Chapter 6 7 strtod include lt
424. umber of actual parameters shall match the prototype The values returned by void functions shall not be used Void expressions shall not be passed as function parameters const should be used for reference parameters not modified A function should have a single point of exit Every exit point shall have a return of the declared return type For void functions return shall not have an expression Function calls with no parameters should have empty parentheses If a function returns error information it should be tested include shall only be preceded by other directives or comments Non standard characters shall not occur in include directives MISRA C x mM mM mM 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 R R R A A R R R A R R R A A R R R R R R R R R include shall be followed by either lt filename gt or filename Plain macros shall only be used for constants qualifiers specifiers Macros shall not be define d and undefd within a block undef should not be used A function should be used in preference to a function like macro A function like macro shall not be used without all arguments Macro arguments shall not contain pre preprocessing directives Macro definitions parameters should be
425. ume has no effect outside function body Pragma cse suspend resume has a function scope 735 pointer conversion restricts arithmetic precision and alignment When a huge pointer is converted to an shuge pointer it may lead to incorrect code when the huge object it points to crosses a segment boundary After the conversion the compiler assumes that the object is 64Kb at most and won t cross a segment boundary Both assumptions may be wrong A similar problem arises when converting a shuge or huge pointer to a far pointer Far objects are limited to 16Kb and never cross a page boundary 736 function name too big should be lt 64Kb code Break the function into smaller ones 737 function name doesn t fit in section try mPR 0 4000 See the description of the m option for additional information 739 ormask Oxbexnumber does not fit into andmask Oxbexnumber When the set bits in the ormask do not overlap the set bits in the andmask these bits might be unintentionally set 740 schar is invalid suboption Only can be used as a suboption See the description of the s option for additional information Compiler Diagnostics 5 43 E 744 bad pragma m166include syntax An error occured when defining a macro processor include file E 745 no registers left for expression There were no free registers left to pass expression to a user defined intrinsic E 750 _atbitQ not possible on type name You ca
426. up code start asm to your project from the Project menu select Project Options expand the Application entry and select Startup enable the check box Generate system startup code and add it to project and specify the name start asm in the Startup code file name field 4 Click the Refresh DAVE imported project button in the EDE toolbar E The EDE project is now fully setup to build the application you have created using DAVE 2 32 Chapter 2 The C166 ST10 EDE only reflects those E SFR register settings which must be configured when booting the CPU before the execution of the EINIT end of initialization instruction These registers are configured in the C startup code All other registers are configured from the C code which is generated by DAVE Every update to the DAVE project will automatically be imported in your EDE project when you press the Refresh DAVE imported project button This will override any settings with respect to the memory model the CPU and startup register settings you have made from the EDE in the Project Project Options dialog because these settings are already defined by you from within DAVE All other C166 ST10 EDE settings keep your configured values Changes you make manually to your EDE project settings and the source code which is generated by DAVE cannot be imported back into your DAVE project Therefore this should only be done if you plan not to use DAVE anymore for making changes to yo
427. ur project files and settings LANGUAGE IMPLEMENTATION all TASKING M ddaLdVH Language Implementation 3 3 3 1 INTRODUCTION The TASKING C C166 ST10 cross compiler offers a new approach to high level language programming for the C166 ST10 family It conforms to the ANSI standard but allows the user to control the I O registers bit memory interrupts and data page architecture of the C166 ST10 in C This chapter describes the language implementation in relation to the C166 ST10 architecture The extensions to the C language in c166 are _bit You can use data type _bit for the type definition of scalars and for the return type of functions _bitword You can declare word variables in the bit addressable area as fp You can access individual bits using the intrinsic functions _getbit and _putbit _Sfrbit _esfrbit Data types for the declaration of specific absolute bits in special function registers or special absolute bits in the SFR address space _sfr _esfr Data types for the declaration of Special Function Registers _xsfr Data type for the declaration of Special Function Registers not residing in SFR memory but do reside in internal RAM An example of these SFRs are PEC source and destination pointers The compiler will use a mem addressing mode for this data type whereas for an object of type _sfr a reg or mem addressing mode may be used These SFRs are no
428. urce within assembly code size Default Same as OF option Favour code density above execution speed Speed Same as Of option Favour execution speed above code density stringmem memory spdace Controls the allocation of string constants See section 3 10 Strings for details switch_force_table Same as Os option Allow number of gaps to exceed number of case labels and yet use a jump table See section 3 14 Switch Statement for more details Compiler Use 4 97 switch_smart Default Same as OS option Try to use jump table if it is worthwhile See section 3 14 Switch Statement for more details switch_tabmem_far Place jump tables for the small memory model in far ROM The ROM section where the jump tables are placed have class CFARROM See section 3 2 5 Constant Romdata Section Allocation for details switch _tabmem_near Place jump tables for the small memory model in near ROM The ROM section where the jump tables are placed have class CNEARROM See section 3 2 5 Constant Romdata Section Allocation for details switch_tabmem_default Default Jump tables are located as specified by the Oe OE option See section 3 2 5 Constant Romdata Section Allocation for details volatile_union Treat unions as if declared volatile prohibiting certain optimizations which clash with non ANSI use of unions Sometimes a union is used for converting data by writing one member but reading back another novolat
429. ust declare array declarators and struct union or enum members The following are examples of this error int error static int a 2 error E 102 duplicate case or default label Switch case values must be distinct after evaluation and there may be at most one default label inside a switch E 103 may not subtract pointer from scalar The only operands allowed on subtraction of pointers is pointer pointer or pointer scalar So scalar pointer is not allowed The following is an example of this error int i int pi amp i ff 1 pi error E 104 left operand of operator has not struct union type The first operand of a or gt must have a struct or union type E 105 zero or negative array size ignored Array bound constants must be greater than zero So char a 0 is not allowed E 106 different constructors Compatible function types with parameter type lists must agree in number of parameters and in use of ellipsis Also the corresponding parameters must have compatible types This error is usually followed by informational message I 111 The following is an example of this error int f int int f int int error different parameter list 5 18 Chapter 5 107 different array sizes Corresponding array parameters of compatible function types must have the same size This error is usually followed by informational message I 111 The following is an example of thi
430. utomatic parameter p is always aligned return value of func is always aligned Compiler Diagnostics 5 47 E F 881 register Rn is outside REGDEF definition and is needed for code generation This error may occure when the size of the register bank has been decreased with pragma regdef or the r command line option and a specific register outside the defined register bank is needed for code generation The need for a specific register may arise in situations as listed below 1 function return values R4 R5 2 when handling function parameters R12 R15 3 run time and floating point library calls Situation 1 should never cause an error because a minimum register bank always includes R4 R5 You can avoid situation 2 by using the _stackparm function qualifier This will force all parameters on the user stack In all other situations the size of the register bank needs to be increased 882 common register bank can consist of one range only and must start with RO Adjust the register bank definition accordingly See the r option for the correct syntax 883 illegal register bank definition regdef See the r option for the correct syntax W 884 common register bank can consist of one range only and must start with RO extended Adjust the register bank definition accordingly See the r option for the correct syntax W 885 RO not included in register bank definition forced The compiler adds register R
431. ve the value of 0 The startup code also takes care of initialized static public C variables of each task residing in the different RAM areas not const or pragma romdata All these initialized variables are allocated in both a ROM and RAM section for each category bit near far huge See section 3 8 Initialized Variables for more details The startup code copies the initial values of initialized C variables for the whole application all tasks in the Task Concept from ROM to RAM using a table in the global C166_INIT section which has been built by the compiler The predefined symbol C166_INIT_HEAD contains the start address of the table In ANSI C all non initialized static public C variables must have the initial value of 0 Non initialized bit variables are already cleared by previous code Therefore the startup code clears the non initialized non bit variables of the whole application all tasks in the Task Concept using a table in the global C166_BSS section which has been built by the compiler unless the Ob option has been used The predefined symbol C166_BSS_HEAD contains the start address of the table See section 3 9 Non Initialized Variables for more information Finally the DPP registers are initialized depending on the memory model used DPPO to DPP2 are initialized accordingly The predefined symbols BASE DPPO to BASE DPP2 are used to initialize DPPO to DPP2 Last but not least the user stack pointe
432. ven stream 4b See also _writeQ Returns EOF on error Sputs include lt stdio h gt int fputs const char s FILE stream Writes the string to a stream The terminating NULL character is not written dE See also _write0 Returns 0 if successful or EOF on error Sputwc include lt wchar h gt wint_t fputwc int c FILE stream Puts one wide character onto the given stream Returns the wide character written or WEOF on error 6 36 Chapter 6 7 Sputws include lt wchar h gt int fputws const wchar_t s FILE stream Writes the wide string to a stream The terminating NULL wide character is not written Returns 0 if successful or EOF on error fread include lt stdio h gt size_t fread void ptr size t size size t nobj FILE stream Reads nobj members of size bytes from the given steam into the array pointed to by ptr Gb See also read Returns the number of successfully read objects Srealloc include lt stdlib h gt void far frealloc void far p size t size Far variant of realloc Q See section 7 3 Heap Size Sree include lt stdlib h gt void free void p Deallocates the space pointed to by p p Must point to space earlier 09 allocated by a call to callocQ malloc Q or reallocQ Otherwise the behavior is undefined db See also calloc0 mallocQ and reallocQ Returns nothing Libraries 6
433. verflow bit V is set by the CPU when the result cannot be represented in an int data type or when the divisor y was zero Returns the result when no overflow occurs Language Implementation 3 125 _mod32 int _mod32 long x int y Use DIVL instructions to perform a 32 bit by 16 bit signed modulo and returning a signed 16 bit result The overflow bit V is set by the CPU when the quotient cannot be represented in an int data type or when the divisor y was zero Returns the result when no overflow occurs _modu32 unsigned int _modu32 unsigned long x unsigned int y Use DIVLU instructions to perform a 32 bit by 16 bit unsigned modulo and returning a unsigned 16 bit result The overflow bit V is set by the CPU when the quotient cannot be represented in an int data type or when the divisor y was zero Returns the result when no overflow occurs int muldiv32 int argl int arg2 int divisor long m32 int d32 if m32 _mul32 argl arg2 V MOV R8 R12 MUL R8 R13 MOV R9 MDH MOV R8 MDL JNB v _14 errno OVERFLOW MOV R4 01h MOV _errno R4 _14 if d32 _div32 m32 divisor V MOV R15 R14 MOV MDH R9 MOV MDL R8 DIVL R15 3 126 Chapter 3 MOV R15 MDL JNB V _15 errno OVERFLOW MOV R4 01h MOV _errno R4 _15 return d32 MOV R4 R15 pag unsigned int _pag void p Inline code is generated by the C compiler to get the page number of pointer p Not available in tiny model Re
434. wed as automatic or parameter The allowed classes for bitword are static public or extern 6 The sizeof of a bitword type is same as int 7 A bitword typed expression is allowed as switch expression 3 60 Chapter 3 7 3 4 5 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS c166 recognizes the keywords sfr and _sfrbit to access the special function register area With the keywords _esfr and esfrbit you can access the extended special function reigister area c166 also recognizes the keyword _xsfr The _xsfr keyword is used to access special function registers outside the E SFR areas but within internal RAM DPP3 Variables declared as xsfr are not bitaddressble Example PEC source and destination pointers SRCPx DSTPx c166 emits the name of the special function register in the assembly code c166 does not perform any check whether the name is correct or not but passes the name to a166 The assembler checks the validity of the name For each derivative a special include file regderivative h is delivered with the package which contains all sfr xsfr sfrbit and esfrbit declarations of the selected derivative Depending on the selected x option the compiler generates a STDNAMES assembler control for a default register definition file for the assembler x xd STDNANES reg def reg def contains the C167 register set x2 STDNAMES regsuper10bo def x22 STDNAMES regsuper10m345 def By default a166 searches files supplied to the STDNAM
435. westoul wescpy wesncpy wcscat wesncat wescmp wcscoll wesncmp wesxfrm weschr wescspn wespbrk wesrchr wesspn wesstr wcstok wcslen wmemchr wmemcmp wmemcpy wmemmove wmemset wesftime btowc wctob mbsinit mbrlen mbrtowc wcrtomb mbsrtowcs wesrtombs lt wctype h gt iswalnum iswalpha iswentrl iswdigit iswgraph iswlower iswprint iswpunct iswspace iswupper iswxdigit towlower towupper wctype iswctype wctrans towctrans 6 9 6 10 Chapter 6 7 6 6 C LIBRARY INTERFACE DESCRIPTION AN Library functions that take void pointers as parameters imply default memory So in that case explicit memory qualifiers such as _huge are not allowed _close include lt stdio h gt int _close int fd Low level file close function _close is used by the functions close and fclose The given file descriptor should be properly closed any buffer is already flushed _fstrcat include lt string h gt char far _fstrcat char far s const char far ct Concatenates far string ct to far string s including the trailing NULL character Returns s _fstrchr include lt string h gt char far fstrchr const char far cs int c Returns a far pointer to the first occurrence of character c in the string cs If not found NULL is returned Libraries 6 11 _Sfstremp include lt string h gt int _fstrcemp const char far cs const char far ct Compares far string cs to far string ct
436. which use static initializations Static initialized variables normally use the same amount of space in both ROM and RAM This is because the initializers are stored in ROM and copied to RAM at start up In the task philosophy of c166 this ROM to RAM copy has to be performed at startup for each task c166 takes care of a mechanism which is completely transparent for the user It performs initialization per task from system startup code using compiler generated tables Static initialized variables use the same amount of space in both ROM and RAM The only exception is an initialized variable residing in ROM by means of either the pragma romdata or the const storage type qualifier For normal initialized RAM variables you can specify the class name CINITIRAM or CINITERAM to be used with pragma iramdata or pragma eramdata You can use the CLASSES locator control to affect the location of these variables See section 3 2 3 Section Allocation for details on section names and section attributes Language Implementation 3 69 Example using small model const char b b 1 byte in ROM pragma iramdata default may be omitted unless pragma romdata eramdata was used before int i 100 2 bytes in ROM 2 bytes in IRAM char a a 1 byte in ROM 1 byte in IRAM char p ABCD 5 bytes in ROM for ABCD 2 bytes in ROM 2 bytes in IRAM for p pragma romdata Needed for
437. with length one in the initial shift state Otherwise it returns the single byte representation of that character as an unsigned char converted to an int wctomb include lt stdlib h gt int wctomb char s wchar_t wchar Determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multi byte character corresponding to the wide character whose value is wchar including any change in the shift state It stores the multi byte character representation in the array pointed to by s if s is not a null pointer At most MB_CUR_MAX characters are stored If the value of wchar is zero the wctomb function is left in the initial shift state Returns the number of bytes or 1 if the value of wchar does not correspond to a valid multi byte character wectrans include lt wctype h gt wetrans_t wctrans const char property Constructs a value with type wctrans_t that describes a mapping between wide characters identified by the string argument property Valid strings are tolower or toupper Gb See also towctrans Returns a non zero value that is valid as the second argument to the towctrans function if property identifies a valid mapping of wide characters otherwise it returns zero Libraries 6 105 wetype include lt wctype h gt wetype t wctype const char property Constructs a value with type wctype_t that describes a class of wide characters identified by the string argument property Valid strings are al
438. with old IEEE 695 consuming tools If you use gs it is also recommended to invoke ieee166 with the c1 option This combination gives the best compatibility with old IEEE 695 consuming tools When you invoke the control program cc166 with gs this will also set c1 on invocation of ieee166 Examples To add symbolic debug information to the output files enter c166 g test c To add symbolic debug information to the output files but disable lifetime information for all types enter c166 gl test c Compiler Use 4 31 gso Option Q From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous Add the option to the Additional options field E gso gso ile gso Arguments The name of a gso file with object allocation information for the final build Description Enable the global storage optimizer Please refer to section gso 66 in Chapter Utilities of the Cross Assembler Linker locator Utilities User s Manual for more details Examples c166 module c gso Generates the file module sif Source Information File with information on all global objects c166 module c gso module gso Generates module c with the global objects allocated as specified in the module gso file 4 32 Chapter 4 H Option From the Project menu select Project Options Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing Enter one or more filenames in the Include these f
439. xample of double usage for assembly programmers Create functionality of C expression dbll double 4 PI MOV R4 4 R4 contains int 4 allol CALLA cc_UC _ cif28r convert int 4 to double 4 0 R10 MOV R11 R10 copy pointer to 4 0 to R11 MOV R4 PI pointer to PI source address allo2 CALLA cc_UC _ load8n copy PI to new allocated stack R10 R10 PI user stack R11 4 0 user stack CALLA cc_UC _mlf8r multiplication result stored in R10 MOV R11 R10 copy pointer to 4 0 PI to R11 MOV R4 _db11 allo3 CALLA cc_UC __load8n copy _dbll to new allocated stack R10 A R10 copy of _dbl user stack R11 4 0 PI user stack CALLA cc_UC _ adf8r addition result stored in R10 MOV R4 _dbl1 destination address in R4 CALLA cc_UC _ store8n copy result to _dbll ADD RO 24 restore stack stack allocated by lines allo PI DW 04009h 021FBh 7 3 141592654 IEEE754 format DW 05452h 04550h s Registers not destroyed in this code fragment R0 R6 R9 R12 R15 3 16 7 FLOATING POINT TRAPPING Two sets of floating point libraries are delivered with the compiler one with a floating point trapping mechanism and one without a floating point trapping mechanism the chapter Libraries explains the naming conventions The floating point libraries with a trapping mechanism call a trapping routine which is in module trap obj
440. y dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for near data 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcphnw include lt string h gt void memcphnw void near dest void huge src size t n Copies n words from huge data pointed by src to near data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap Page boundaries are checked for huge data but not checked for near data 0 lt n lt 8192 Returns nothing memcphsb include lt string h gt void memcphsb void shuge dest void huge src size t n Copies n bytes from huge data pointed by src to shuge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 65535 Returns nothing Libraries 6 61 memcphsw include lt string h gt void memcphsw void shuge dest void huge src size t n Copies n words from huge data pointed by src to shuge data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 65535 Returns nothing memcpnfb include lt string h gt void memcpnfb void far dest void near src size t n Copies n bytes from near data pointed by src to far data pointed by dest No care is taken if the two objects overlap 0 lt n lt 16384 Returns nothing memcpnfw include lt string h gt void memcpnfw void far dest void near src size t n Copies n words from near data pointed by src to far data
441. y value Any Byte write instruction on RxH JB Rx 0 jump_address WILL BE WRONGLY TAKEN Example 2 Assume Rx y is 1 x any GPR 0 7 y any bit except bit0 MOVB RxL any _value Any Byte write instruction on RxL for y 8 15 or RxH for y 1 7 7 JNB Rx y jump_address WILL BE WRONGLY TAKEN Example 3 Assume Rx 0 is 0 x any GPR 0 7 MOVB RxH any value Any Byte write instruction on ROH JNB Rx 0 jump_address WILL NOT BE TAKEN Example 4 Assume Rx y is 1 x any GPR 0 7 y any bit except bit0 MOVB RxL any _value Any Byte write instruction on RxL for y 8 15 or RxH for y 1 7 WILL NOT BE TAKEN see JB Rx y jump_address Note that the bug is only visible when the bit used for the jump evaluation is set e 1 for all the bits Rx 15 to Rx 1 or not set i e 0 for Rx 0 C 10 Appendix C Example 5 BUG NOT VISIBLE Assume Rx 0 is 1 x any GPR 0 7 MOVB RxH any _value Any Byte write instruction on RxH JB Rx 0 jump_address WILL BE CORRECTLY EXECUTED TAKEN Note that the bug exists also when the byte write operation writes into the GPR using indirect addressing mode or memory addressing mode This situation includes also the use of PECB DPECB which destination pointer points into a GPR i e data write is performed on a GPR Workaround 1 Include a NOP between any byte write instruction on a GPR and a jump bit instruction on the same GPR but on a bit belonging to a diff
442. you can examine the exit status of the program executed with ERRORLEVEL c166 s 1l c IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO STOP_BATCH Compiler Diagnostics 5 5 In a bourne shell script the exit status can be found in the variable for example c166 case in 0 echo ok 1 2 3 echo error esac The exit status of c166 is one of the numbers of the following list Compilation successful no errors There were user errors but terminated normally A fatal error or System error occurred premature ending Stopped due to user abort Neo or if the exit commandline option was used Compilation successful no errors warnings There were user errors warnings but terminated normally A fatal error or System error occurred premature ending Stopped due to user abort Neo 5 6 E 5 3 Chapter 5 ERRORS AND WARNINGS Errors start with an error type followed by a number and a message The error type is indicated by a letter information error fatal error system error W warning Gim i Frontend F 1 evaluation expired Your product evaluation period has expired Contact your local TASKING office for the official product 2 unrecognized option option The option you specified does not exist Check the invocation syntax for the correct option 4 expected number more endif The preprocessor part of the compiler found the if ifdef or ifndef dirctive but did not find a corresponding endif
443. ystem startup configuration default for the library it is included in The compiler generates a reference to this module when it translates the definition of the main function This reference causes the start obj to be extracted from the library by 1166 This file specifies the run time environment of your C166 application The file is delivered in assembly source start asm in the directory lib src The file start asm includes the file cstartx asm or cstartx2 asm depending on the selected architecture Modifications to these files are not necessary since all parameters can be manipulated using macro preprocessor symbols Startup code and EDE When you use EDE the startup code will be automatically generated and included in the project The contents of the EDE generated startup code is largely defined by the options you set in EDE When you want to use your own startup code you can disable the generation of the startup code in EDE 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog appears 2 Expand the Application entry and select Startup 3 Disable the check box Generate system startup code and add it to project 4 Click OK 5 Remove the file start asm from the project and add your own startup code If necessary you can specify EDE to generate the startup code in a different file than start asm 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog appears Chapter
444. zation Returns nothing _einit end of initialization EINIT _atomic void _atomic ICE number Use ATOMIC instruction to let interrupts be disabled for a specified number of instructions nwmber 1 4 Returns nothing _atomic 3 next 3 instructions are not interrupted ATOMIC 03h 3 124 Chapter 3 7 _mul32 long _mul32 int x int y Use MUL instruction to perform a 16 bit by 16 bit signed multiplication and returning a signed 32 bit result The overflow bit V is set by the CPU when the result cannot be represented in an int data type Returns the result when no overflow occurs _mulu32 unsigned long _mulu32 unsigned int x unsigned int y Use MULU instruction to perform a 16 bit by 16 bit unsigned multiplication and returning a unsigned 32 bit result The overflow bit V is set by the CPU when the result cannot be represented in an int data type Returns the result when no overflow occurs _div32 int _div32 long x int y Use DIVL instructions to perform a 32 bit by 16 bit signed division and returning a signed 16 bit result The overflow bit V is set by the CPU when the result cannot be represented in an int data type or when the divisor y was zero Returns the result when no overflow occurs _divu32 unsigned int _divu32 unsigned long x unsigned int y Use DIVLU instructions to perform a 32 bit by 16 bit unsigned division and returning an unsigned 16 bit result The o

User Manual - v8.8 C166/ST10 C Compiler

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents